JP7840610B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This relates to a gaming machine equipped with a game area from which game balls are launched.

Traditionally, among various types of pachinko machines, those known as Type 1 pachinko machines displayed multiple symbols in a changing pattern on a display area, such as a liquid crystal display, located approximately in the center of the game board (hereinafter, such displays will be referred to as "symbol changes" or "change display," etc.). These machines are known to transition to a special game, known as a "jackpot," where more prize balls are awarded than in normal gameplay, when the combination of symbols obtained by stopping the changing patterns of multiple rows reaches a specific pattern. The changing symbol display in the display area is not simply a matter of multiple symbols changing; rather, it incorporates effects to heighten the player's anticipation, such as extending the display time when only one symbol is needed to achieve a jackpot, as seen in a state known as a "reach screen." Furthermore, the use of characters in the image of symbols to create a story in the changing display, and the use of pre-announcement effects that suggest a high probability of transitioning to a special game, also enhance the player's anticipation (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2003-230714 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-156805 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-58534 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-54516 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-49016 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2019-209048 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2014-239839 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2013-111184 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2019-3746 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-192427 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2007-191 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2021-52984 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2021-23624 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2020-99621 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2019-72385 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2018-171305 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2019-54930 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-116689 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-22161 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2021-137143 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2021-78689 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2018-61597 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2018-57588 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2012-239744

In recent years, the specifications of pachinko machines have become more diverse, and the inclusion of unprecedented functions has become increasingly common. As a result, it has become necessary to adequately handle complex and specialized specifications in terms of monitoring fraud and managing game states.

In view of the above-mentioned problems, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can flexibly accommodate various specifications.

To solve the above problems, a gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention comprises an image display device and an image control means for controlling the game's presentation. The performance control means is capable of displaying an error notification image on the performance display device to notify of an error, displaying a setting menu image that may include a volume adjustment setting menu on the performance display device screen while the game is in standby mode, displaying a setting menu image that may include a volume adjustment setting menu on the performance display device screen while the game is in progress, executing a specific performance that performs a predetermined transformation process on the images displayed on the performance display device, performing the predetermined transformation process on specific images that do not contain the error notification image or the setting menu image during the execution of the specific performance, but not performing the predetermined transformation process on non-specific images that contain at least one of the error notification image or the setting menu image, displaying one error notification image or setting menu image in a visible position that overlaps with multiple specific images but does not overlap with other non-specific images, outputting a confirmation sound indicating the volume adjustment setting when the volume is adjusted while the game is in standby mode, and suppressing the output of the confirmation sound when the volume is adjusted while the volume adjustment setting is reflected in the volume settings of performance sounds other than the confirmation sound.

Furthermore, any combination of the above components, or any substitution of components or expressions of the present invention between methods, apparatus, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc., are also valid embodiments of the present invention.

The present invention provides a pachinko game machine that can flexibly accommodate various specifications.

This diagram shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine. This diagram shows the basic structure of the back side of a pachinko game machine. This is a diagram showing the functional blocks of a pachinko game machine. This is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main board. This diagram schematically shows the success/failure determination table. This diagram schematically shows the range settings for the winning/losing lottery values for each set value. This diagram schematically shows the pattern determination table. This diagram schematically shows a table of fluctuation patterns. This diagram schematically shows the pre-qualification table referenced in the pre-qualification process. This diagram schematically shows a pre-win/loss determination table corresponding to the game settings. This is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. This diagram schematically illustrates the outline of the mobile phone connectivity system. This is a block diagram that schematically shows the hardware configuration of the main board and sub-board. This is a block diagram that schematically shows the hardware configuration of the performance control system. This is a flowchart showing the control start process for the main board of a pachinko game machine. This is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process in S124 in Figure 15. This flowchart shows in detail the setting confirmation process in S126 in Figure 15. This is a flowchart showing in detail the main process of S120 in Figure 15. The flowchart shows the details of interrupt handling. This is a flowchart showing the control start process for a sub-board in a pachinko game machine. This is a flowchart showing in detail the main process of S518 in Figure 20. This is a flowchart showing the interrupt handling process when a command is received from the main board. This flowchart shows the interrupt processing when a timer interrupt occurs for controlling the visual effects. This flowchart shows the interrupt handling process when a sub-CPU receives a command from the control CPU. This flowchart shows the interrupt processing when a timer interrupt occurs for the control of various devices. This is a flowchart showing the process of displaying special symbol variations. This is a flowchart showing the process of displaying changing decorative patterns. This is a flowchart showing the process of the special game. This is a flowchart showing the process of winning a small prize. This figure shows an example of a screen display for a visual display device. This diagram schematically illustrates an example of frame image contraction in screen transformation effects. This diagram schematically illustrates an example of frame image oscillation in screen transformation effects. This diagram schematically shows the layer structure of the animation screen in a screen transformation effect. This diagram schematically illustrates the process of the movable prop effect, which is executed simultaneously with the screen transformation effect. This diagram schematically shows multiple buffer regions obtained by dividing the frame buffer. This diagram schematically illustrates the relationship between the display size of a frame image and the capacity of the frame buffer area. This diagram schematically illustrates the process of transforming a frame image stored in a buffer area. This figure shows an example screen for the third special effect pattern. This diagram schematically illustrates the process of using the buffer area in the third special effect pattern. This diagram shows the correspondence between error types and error signals. This figure shows a first example of an external information output terminal. This figure shows a second example of an external information output terminal. This is a diagram illustrating the output terminal explanation section. This figure shows a first example of a circuit board case unit for a dispensing control board. This figure shows a second example of a circuit board case unit for a dispensing control board. This figure shows an example of the administration menu screen. This figure shows an example of customization instructions. This figure shows an example of customization instructions. This figure shows examples of the volume control screen and the brightness control screen. This figure shows example screens of an error warning image and a settings menu image during gameplay in the first embodiment. This figure shows a first example of the error warning image and setting menu image during the game waiting period in the first embodiment. This figure shows a second example of the error warning image and setting menu image during the game waiting period in the first embodiment. This figure shows an example of a screen displaying a preview image in the screen transformation effect of the third embodiment. This is a time chart showing the relationship between the right-handed hit notification and the processing after power outage and restoration in the fourth embodiment. This is a time chart showing the error notification timing for power outage recovery in the fifth embodiment. This figure shows the state of the movable mechanism and the location of the error notification in the sixth embodiment. This figure shows the error notification methods for various types of errors. This diagram shows error notification methods for various performance devices that do not affect the progress of the game.

(First prerequisite technology)
In the first prerequisite technology, a pachinko game machine contains multiple games equivalent to what is conventionally called a Type 1 pachinko game machine. The second game is given priority so that the first and second games are not executed simultaneously. In order to balance these gameplay characteristics, the machine is equipped with multiple starting entry points, multiple special symbol display devices, and multiple reserve lamps. The machine is designed so that the payout from a jackpot in the second game is generally greater than the payout from a jackpot in the first game. For example, the second game has a higher probability of resulting in a jackpot with a probability change, and the second game has a larger number of unit games that make up the special game when a jackpot is hit (including cases where long-opening unit games with long opening times for the large prize slot and short-opening unit games with short opening times are mixed in a single special game, and even with the same number of unit games, the second game has more long-opening unit games than the first game). Thus, the second game is designed to be relatively more profitable than the first game. On top of that, the gameplay is designed so that the player initially aims for an initial jackpot in the first game, and after a jackpot in the first game grants a time-saving bonus, the player repeatedly aims for the second game to obtain a large payout.

Figure 1 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine. The pachinko game machine 100 mainly consists of a game machine frame and a game board. The game machine frame of the pachinko game machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball tray 105, a lower ball tray 106, a launching handle 107, a speaker 108, a performance button 109, a directional pad 110, and decorative lamps 111. The outer frame 101 has an opening and is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine 100 in the desired installation position. The front frame 102 is a frame body that aligns with the opening portion of the outer frame 101 and is attached to the outer frame 101 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for launching game balls, a mechanism for detachably housing the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, etc.

The transparent plate 103 is made of glass or the like and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball tray 105 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending game balls to the launch rail, and removing game balls to the lower ball tray 106. The lower ball tray 106 has a mechanism for storing and removing game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides of the top of the door 104, and the means for controlling the effects outputs sound effects and music according to the game state and effects. Most of the resin material that makes up the exterior of the door 104 is semi-transparent, and decorative lamps 111 are provided inside the transparent interior. The decorative lamps 111 are LEDs that emit light in various colors according to the game state and effects according to the means for controlling the effects, and they perform an effect by flashing, etc.

The game board 80 is located on a game area 81 demarcated by rails 82 and includes a first start opening 11, a second start opening 12, a big prize opening 20, a first operation opening 31, a second operation opening 32, a general prize opening 33, an out opening 34, a performance display device 60, and a center ornament 64. The center ornament 64 is a decorative resin member provided to form the screen frame of the performance display device 60, extending over the approximate center of the game area 81 and its upper and right sides. It has functions such as a flow path for game balls, protection of the performance display device 60, and decoration. Below the center ornament 64, a stage 65 is formed on which the incoming game balls roll. Depending on how the balls roll, the direction in which they fall from the stage 65 is divided into a direction towards entering the first start opening 11 and a lateral direction that does not enter the first start opening 11. Above the center ornament 64, a movable mechanism 66 is provided that is driven according to the performance content and performs performance-like actions. The game area 81 is equipped with multiple game pins, windmills, and other mechanisms (not shown) for forming a flow path for the game balls. In this specification, "ball entry," "prize entry," and "ball drop" may be considered synonymous. Furthermore, each prize entry point and each ball entry point may consist of a "pass-through opening" (also called a "gate" or "through checker") through which the game balls pass, and "ball entry," "prize entry," "ball drop," and "pass-through" may also be considered synonymous.

The first starting opening 11 is provided as a starting prize entry opening corresponding to the first game, and the second starting opening 12 is provided as a starting prize entry opening corresponding to the second game. The first starting opening 11 and the second starting opening 12 are configured so that the player can aim to enter one of them by adjusting the strength of the shot of the game ball according to their will. The first starting opening 11 is provided in the lower center of the game area 81, and the second starting opening 12 is provided directly below the first starting opening 11. When the player hits the ball relatively weakly, aiming to direct it towards the left-hand passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy for the ball to enter both the first starting opening 11 and the second starting opening 12. On the other hand, when the player hits the ball relatively strongly, aiming to direct it towards the right-hand passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy for the ball to enter the second starting opening 12, but it is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the first starting opening 11. This is how the flow path is formed by the arrangement of the game pins. However, under normal circumstances, the opening of the second start port 12 is covered by the first start port 11, preventing the inflow of game balls. Therefore, unless the expansion mechanism of the second start port 12 is opened, it is impossible or difficult for balls to enter the second start port 12. The win/loss lottery determines whether or not the game transitions to a special game mode, which is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay, and is conducted each time a ball enters either the first start port 11 or the second start port 12.

Furthermore, the first starting opening 11 and the second starting opening 12 may be positioned far enough apart from each other to allow for targeting different targets depending on the strength of the ball's launch. The first starting opening 11 and the second starting opening 12 may be positioned separately on the left and right sides of the game area 81, respectively, to make it difficult for a ball aimed at one to enter the other. For example, the first starting opening 11 may be positioned so that a ball can enter, or enters easily, when shot relatively weakly with a leftward shot, i.e., aiming to direct the ball towards the left-hand passage of the center decoration 64. The second starting opening 12 may be positioned so that a ball can enter, or enter easily, when shot relatively strongly with a rightward shot, i.e., aiming to direct the ball towards the right-hand passage of the center decoration 64.

The first starting port 11 is equipped with a first starting prize detection device 16. The first starting prize detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 11 and generates first starting prize information indicating the entry of the ball. The second starting port 12 is equipped with a second starting prize detection device 17, a standard electric mechanism 90 (a so-called electric tulip) which is an expansion/contraction mechanism, and a standard electric mechanism solenoid 91 for opening and closing the standard electric mechanism 90. The second starting prize detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 12 and generates second starting prize information indicating the entry of the ball.

The first operating port 31 is located on the left side of the game area 81 and includes a first passage detection device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of a game ball into the first operating port 31 and generates passage information indicating the passage when the ball passes through. The second operating port 32 is located on the right side of the game area 81 and includes a second passage detection device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of a game ball into the second operating port 32 and generates passage information indicating the passage when the ball passes through. The passage of a game ball into the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 triggers an opening lottery that determines whether or not to open the normal electric mechanism 90. When a game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, a normal symbol, which is a symbol indicating the result of the opening lottery, is displayed in the normal symbol display unit 45. Therefore, the opening lottery is also called the "normal symbol lottery". After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the variation display of the normal symbols stops. When the normal symbols stop on a winning symbol, the normal electric mechanism 90 expands due to the driving force of the normal electric mechanism solenoid 91, increasing the probability of balls entering the second start opening 12. As a modification, the number of operating openings may be reduced to one, and the opening may be located on the left side of the game area 81.

Each of the three general prize slots 33 is equipped with a general prize detection device 38 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The general prize detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general prize slot 33 and generates general prize information indicating the entry at the time of entry.

The large prize slot 20 includes a large prize detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball and a large prize slot solenoid 92 for opening and closing the large prize slot 20. The large prize detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize slot 20 and generates large prize slot entry information indicating the entry of the ball when it enters. The large prize slot 20 is a horizontal rectangular prize slot that opens as a "jackpot" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined manner. The large prize slot 20 is located in the upper right position of the out slot 34. As a modification, another large prize slot may be provided in the lower center of the game area 81 or above or below the large prize slot 20, resulting in a configuration with multiple large prize slots. The out slot 34 is an outlet from which game balls that did not enter any of the prize slots are discharged, and is equipped with an out detection device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects game balls being discharged after passing through the out opening 34, and generates discharge information indicating the detection. The out opening 34 is located at the lowest center of the game area 81 so that all game balls that did not enter any of the prize-winning openings can be guided through it. Multiple out detection devices 39 may be installed side-by-side while ensuring a sufficiently wide game ball passage to prevent ball jamming in the out opening 34.

A symbol display unit 120 is positioned below and outside the game area 81 on the game board 80. The symbol display unit 120 includes various display sections, such as a first special symbol display section 41, a second special symbol display section 42, a first special symbol hold display section 71, a second special symbol hold display section 72, a normal symbol display section 45, a normal symbol hold display section 75, a game status display section 76, and an abnormality notification section 77. Specifically, the first special symbol display section 41, corresponding to the first game, and the second special symbol display section 42, corresponding to the second game, are arranged side-by-side on the lower left side, displaying the changes in the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the first win/fail lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 11, and a jackpot as a special game occurs when it stops in a predetermined winning pattern. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the second win/fail lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start opening 12, and a jackpot as a special game occurs when it stops in a predetermined winning pattern. The first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 are 8-segment LED display devices consisting of 8 segments, for example, 7 segments forming a "figure 8" and 1 segment representing a "dot". An 8-segment LED can represent 8 bits of numerical value by combining the 8 segments. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, represented by the combination of segments, do not necessarily take the form of letters or numbers, and may be symbols that do not generally have meaning, formed by the combination of each segment. These symbols rapidly change and are displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42, or a predetermined display (e.g., "-") and non-display (e.g., all lights off) are repeated for a predetermined time, after which a symbol corresponding to the judgment result is displayed, thereby realizing the symbol variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. Alternatively, the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 may use LED dot arrays other than 8-segment LEDs, and multiple types of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 may be represented by combinations of lighting patterns and colors.

Furthermore, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily need to have a visual or theatrical role, in the first prerequisite technology, they are displayed in an inconspicuous size on the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 located in the lower left of the game area 81. However, if a method is adopted to express the special symbols without using decorative symbols by giving them a visual or theatrical role, the special symbols may be displayed on another display device, such as a liquid crystal display, instead of an 8-segment LED.

Above the first special symbol display unit 41, a first special symbol reserve display unit 71 is provided as a reserve lamp for special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the first game, and above the second special symbol display unit 42, a second special symbol reserve display unit 72 is provided as a reserve lamp for special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the second game. The first special symbol reserve display unit 71 consists of two lamps, and the number of lamps lit or blinking indicates the number of winning/losing lottery values that are reserved in the first game (hereinafter, the number of winning/losing lottery values that are reserved will also simply be called the "reserved number"). The reserved number in the first special symbol reserve display unit 71 is the number of times (number) that a lottery value has been acquired based on entering the first start opening 11 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 or the execution of the special game, and indicates the number of winning balls for which the symbol fluctuation has not yet been executed. The second special symbol reserve display unit 72 also consists of two lamps, and the number of lamps lit or blinking indicates the reserved number in the second game. The number of reserved balls in the second special symbol reserved display unit 72 represents the number of times (number of) a lottery value has been obtained based on balls entering the second start opening 12 during the variation of the second special symbol 52 or during the execution of a special game. It indicates the number of balls that have entered the opening before the symbol variation has been executed. The number of reserved win/loss lottery values is also displayed at the bottom of the screen of the performance display device 60, represented by the number of lit reserved lamps.

On the right side of the symbol display unit 120, a normal symbol display section 45 is provided. For convenience, the normal symbol display section 45 is composed of two lamps, and the display state of the normal symbol is expressed by the combination of their illumination. First, the variation of the normal symbol is expressed by simultaneously flashing the first and second lamps, and finally, the stopping symbol of the normal symbol is expressed by the combination of the illumination states of the first and second lamps. For example, the illumination of the first lamp and the extinguishing of the second lamp express a losing stopping symbol, the extinguishing of the first lamp and the illumination of the second lamp express the first winning pattern, and the illumination of both the first and second lamps expresses the second winning pattern.

Furthermore, a regular symbol reserve indicator unit 75 is provided to the right of the regular symbol display unit 45 as a reserve lamp for regular symbol variations. The regular symbol reserve indicator unit 75 also consists of two lamps, and the number of lit or blinking lamps indicates the number of reserved regular symbol variations. The number of reserved regular symbol variations represents the number of game balls that passed through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32 during the regular symbol variation, indicating the number of regular symbol draws for which the regular symbol variation has not yet been executed.

The symbol display unit 120 is equipped with a game status display unit 76 and an abnormality notification unit 77. The game status display unit 76 is a display unit that shows game statuses corresponding to specific game states, such as those described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, it notifies the game status by lighting up when probability fluctuations are occurring, flashing when the ball entry is easy, and turning off when the game is in a normal state. During the execution of a special game, the 7-segment LED displays the number of unit games (rounds) to be played in that special game. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that notifies abnormalities in part of the game machine, and is composed of, for example, multiple lamps that notify the abnormality using lighting patterns corresponding to the type of abnormality. These display units do not necessarily have to be consolidated in the symbol display unit 120; each display unit may be configured individually, or they may be divided into multiple display devices as appropriate. Furthermore, the notification of game statuses, such as specific game states, may be configured to be limited to a predetermined period, such as a certain time after power is restored from a power outage.

Approximately in the center of the game area 81, a display device 60 is provided so that the screen is exposed from a screen frame formed by the center ornament 64. This device displays variations in the performance image, including decorative symbols 61 that are linked to the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52. Hereinafter, such displays will be referred to as "symbol variations" or "variation displays," etc.

The performance display device 60 is a display device composed of a liquid crystal display that displays decorative symbols 61 in a manner that is linked to the changing display of the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52. The decorative symbols 61 are symbols that visually enhance the display of the lottery result indicated by the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The performance display device 60 displays, as decorative symbols 61, a moving image of multiple rows of symbols that mimic a slot machine game, for example, in the central area of the screen. In the first premise technology, symbols composed of the numbers "0" to "9" are displayed in three rows and changed, and the combination of three symbols that are finally stopped and displayed indicates a win or a loss. Each of the multiple symbols that make up the decorative symbols 61 consists of numbers, letters, or symbols that are decorated with colors and patterns, but these numbers, letters, and symbols may be combined by adding a common image to all symbols or a different image for each symbol to unify them. This pattern depicts motifs related to the decorative or performance theme set for the pachinko machine 100, and may, for example, depict human or animal characters. The decorative pattern 61 may be configured to switch between being displayed as a single, integrated pattern, and being displayed as separate patterns, with only the numbers, letters, or symbols changing, in accordance with the progression of the performance. The background of the changing decorative pattern 61 displays animated images with theatrical effects related to the decorative or performance theme set for the pachinko machine 100, in conjunction with the pattern changes.

The display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display, which is a high-definition dot matrix type display device. The width of its display area may be about half the width of the game area, or it may be a large size exceeding half. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the display device is formed with a width that allows one game ball to pass through, and the player can almost certainly pass the game ball through the right-hand passage by shooting with maximum force as a so-called "right-handed shot," allowing for differentiation between so-called "left-handed shots." The display device 60 may consist not only of a single display device, but also of a combination of multiple display devices. In the case of multiple displays, displays of different sizes, such as a main LCD and a sub-LCD, may be combined. The sub-LCD may be placed adjacent to the main LCD, or it may be installed in a location other than the game board, for example, near the launch handle (upper ball tray, right-side decorative lamp, etc.). When installed near the launch handle, it may be configured as a touch panel that the player can operate. The display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display; it may also be composed of other display devices such as an organic EL display, or it may be composed of mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type or an LED matrix type.

The performance button 109 is an input means that the player presses to input a predetermined instruction to the game machine according to the performance content, and the performance content changes depending on how it is pressed. The performance button 109 is provided on the front frame 102. Normally, the performance button 109 is housed within the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back of the performance button 109, allowing the rod-shaped member and the performance button 109 to protrude in a direction approximately perpendicular to the game board. When the rod-shaped member and the performance button 109 protrude outwards, they function as a performance lever 112, allowing the player to grasp the performance button 109 and pull the performance lever 112 downwards. This also allows the player to input a predetermined instruction to the game machine. The directional pad 110 is an input means that the player uses to input directional instructions to the game machine, and is provided on the left outer wall surface of the upper ball tray 105.

The method of playing and the control flow in a gaming machine configured as described above will be outlined below. When a player rotates the launch handle 107 by hand, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 are guided one by one onto the rail 82 and launched into the game area 81 with a force corresponding to the angle of rotation. When the player fixes the rotation position of the launch handle 107 by hand, the launch of game balls is repeated at regular time intervals. The game balls launched into the upper part of the game area 81 fall in directions corresponding to how they hit multiple game pins, windmills, center decorations 64, etc. When a game ball falls into one of the prize winning openings, such as the general prize winning opening 33, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, or the large prize winning opening 20, prize balls corresponding to the type of prize winning opening are dispensed into the upper ball tray 105 or the lower ball tray 106. Game balls that fall into the general prize slots 33 and other prize slots are treated as safe balls, while game balls that fall into the out slots 34 are treated as out balls. The discharge of safe balls may be excluded from detection by the out detection device 39, or safe balls may be guided to an area equipped with the out detection device 39, and all of their discharge may be detected by the out detection device 39. Alternatively, the guidance of safe balls and detection of safe balls by the out detection device 39 may be omitted, and the number of detected safe balls may be added to the number of detected out balls to determine the total number of discharged balls.

Furthermore, when a game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, a normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display unit 45 in a variable state, and after the variable display time determined prior to the display has elapsed, it is displayed in a stopped state. If the normal symbol is displayed in the first winning state or the second winning state, the normal electric mechanism 90 is expanded based on the winning state of the displayed symbol and the game state at the time of the display. That is, if the game state at the time the symbol stops is the normal game state, and the normal symbol is displayed in the first winning state, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is performed as the opening of the normal electric mechanism 90. Also, if the normal symbol is displayed in the first winning state during a specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state), or if the normal symbol is displayed in the second winning state during normal play or during a specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state), a long opening of 6 seconds is performed as the opening of the normal electric mechanism 90. Here, the probability of winning with a regular symbol and the probability of executing a long opening are set to differ depending on the game state. Specifically, in the opening lottery in the normal state, there is a 1/100 chance of winning with a regular symbol, and in that case, the probability of executing a short opening (the probability of selecting the winning symbol of the first winning mode) is set to 1/3, and the probability of executing a long opening (the probability of selecting the winning symbol of the second winning mode) is set to 2/3. Furthermore, in the opening lottery in a specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state), there is a 99/100 chance of winning with a regular symbol, and although the selection probabilities of the first and second winning modes are the same as in the normal game state, the setting is such that a long opening is executed regardless of which mode is won. In this state of easy ball entry, the ease of ball entry into the second starting opening 12 is enhanced by a function that changes the probability of winning with normal symbols (from 1/100 to 99/100) and a function that extends the opening time (extending the opening time from 0.1 seconds to 6.0 seconds when the first winning pattern is displayed). Note that the function that extends the operating period of the normal electric mechanism 90 (long opening) is sometimes called "opening extension."

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the specification is such that the probability of a long opening is higher than the probability of a short opening in the normal state, so that a long opening occurs at a certain rate even in the normal state when a normal symbol is won. As variations, the specification may be such that the probability of a short opening is higher than the probability of a long opening in the normal state, or the probabilities of both may be made equal, or it may be such that it always opens short. In addition, when the ball entry is easy, the configuration may be such that the ease of ball entry into the second start opening 12 is enhanced by using three functions, including a function to shorten the variation time of the normal symbol. In that case, the variation time of the normal symbol is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the ball entry is easy state. Furthermore, the probability of winning the opening lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the normal electric mechanism 90 may be expanded only when the opening lottery is performed in the ball entry is easy state. Furthermore, when the standard electric mechanism 90 expands, this may be announced in advance. Alternatively, the system may predict the holding of the standard symbol variation and announce it before the start of the variation, or it may announce it during the variation of the standard symbol.

As a variation of the opening pattern when the ordinary electric mechanism 90 of the second starting opening 12 is opened for a long period, the total opening time may be extended to about 6 seconds by repeating a 2-second opening, which is longer than the short opening, three times. Alternatively, multiple combinations of opening time and number of openings may be provided, and one of them may be selected. For example, in the case of a 2-second opening three times, the total opening time is the same as in the case of a 6-second opening once, but including the interval period, the former is longer than the latter. Therefore, especially in the modified configuration in which the second starting opening 12 is positioned in the direction of right-handed shooting, it can be said that the former offers a longer chance of the ball entering the opening, assuming that the player who notices the opening adjusts the direction of their shot to the second starting opening 12 from that point onward. Furthermore, the system may be configured to have multiple types of winning patterns for the ordinary symbols, and the opening pattern of the expansion mechanism may differ depending on the type of winning pattern. For example, if a regular symbol results in the first win, the opening may be 0.1 seconds once in the normal state and 1 second three times in the easy ball entry state. If a second win occurs, the opening may be 6 seconds once in the normal state and 2 seconds twice in the easy ball entry state.

On the other hand, when a ball enters the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12, the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 are displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display unit 41, the second special symbol display unit 42, and the performance display device 60. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 stops after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable manner according to a predetermined variable pattern, from the start to the stop of their variation. The decorative symbol 61 is displayed in a variable manner according to a predetermined variable performance pattern, from the start to the stop of its variation. Multiple types of variable patterns and variable performance patterns are available, each with varying variable times of different lengths. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable manner according to a variable pattern, the decorative symbol 61 is displayed in a variable performance pattern with the same variable time. Each variation pattern has a defined variation display time as a condition for ending the variation. When this variation display time elapses, the variation of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 stops. Below, examples of the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 according to the variation performance pattern are provided, along with a brief explanation of the variation performance pattern. Details regarding the variation pattern and how the variation performance pattern is determined will be explained separately.

One example of how the decorative symbols 61 are displayed is that, at the start of the variation, all three rows of symbols are changed, similar to the reels of a slot machine. As the variation nears its end, each row is stopped one by one to display the final combination of symbols. Alternatively, the behavior of the decorative symbols 190 when they stop can be controlled to stop multiple rows simultaneously, rather than one row at a time, to draw attention to other visual effects during the variation display, or to display the symbol variation in a shorter variation time. Furthermore, the behavior of the decorative symbols 190 at the start of the variation can be controlled to delay the start of some rows' variation depending on the subsequent developments (type of visual effect pattern, etc.) in that variation, thereby creating a sense of anticipation.

Next, we will briefly explain the variable animation patterns. Variable animation patterns include normal miss animation patterns, reach miss animation patterns, and reach jackpot animation patterns. Normal miss animation patterns are the animation patterns used when displaying a normal losing combination of symbols. Reach miss animation patterns are the animation patterns used when displaying a losing combination of symbols after reaching a state where one more symbol is needed to win a jackpot. Reach jackpot animation patterns are the animation patterns used when displaying a winning combination of symbols after reaching a state. In particular, patterns that go through the reach state include patterns with varying lengths of variation time. Reach patterns with relatively short variation times are called "normal reaches," and reach patterns with long variation times are called "super reaches." Normal miss animation patterns, reach miss animation patterns, and reach jackpot animation patterns each have a normal pattern displayed in the normal state and a time-saving pattern displayed in the time-saving state. However, even in the normal state, if the second symbol variation corresponds to a ball entering the second starting port 12, the probability of a jackpot accompanied by a probability variation or an increase in the number of unit games for special games is higher than the first variation corresponding to a ball entering the first starting port 11, making it a chance state. Therefore, a chance pattern for indicating a relatively advantageous jackpot may be used. Note that in the first premise technology, a time-reduction pattern is used in the time-reduction state, but since the probability variation state involves time reduction, the time-reduction pattern is also used in the probability variation state. However, in the modified version, a different probability variation pattern may be used in the probability variation state than the time-reduction pattern. Alternatively, a common pattern may be used for both time-reduction and probability variation, or a probability variation pattern may be used in the probability variation state without using a separate time-reduction pattern.

Furthermore, when the number of reserved symbols for the win/loss draw reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol change time for a loss is shortened to improve game efficiency (hereinafter also referred to as "shortened change"). Similarly, when the number of reserved symbols for the win/loss draw reaches 4, the symbol change time for a loss is shortened even further than in the case of 3 symbols to further improve game efficiency (hereinafter also referred to as "ultra-shortened change"). After the symbol change described above, if the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 stop in a manner indicating a jackpot, the game transitions to a special game state, which is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay, and the opening and closing operation of the large prize slot 20 begins. The stopping manner of the decorative symbol 61 indicating a jackpot is, for example, a combination in which the types of three symbols match.

There are two types of special games: regular special games and shortened special games, and there is a significant difference in the profit from the number of prize balls won. Regular special games begin with the display of a presentation screen called the start demo time. After the start demo time screen is displayed, the large prize slot 20 opens and remains open for about 30 seconds, or after 9 or more game balls have fallen in, it is closed. This period from opening to closing of the large prize slot 20 is basically called a unit game, but it is possible to repeat short openings multiple times within one unit game. After the opening and closing of the large prize slot 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 or 10 times, the regular special game ends with the display of a presentation screen called the end demo time. In regular special games, it is quite possible to expect 9 or more balls to enter per unit game, and 10 unit games will yield a sufficient number of prize balls (also called "payouts"), resulting in a large profit. A special game consisting of 10 repeated unit games may also be referred to as a "10R jackpot," and a special game consisting of 4 repeated unit games may also be referred to as a "4R jackpot." Although the unit games are repeated 10 times, it is possible to achieve a regular special game (sometimes referred to as an "effective nR jackpot") that is effectively equivalent to a smaller number of repeated unit games by opening the large prize winning slot 20 for a shorter time than usual (for example, 1.6 seconds) during some unit games.

On the other hand, in a shortened special game, the start and end demo times are short or almost nonexistent (e.g., 0.1 seconds), and the large prize slot 20 is opened for only 1.6 seconds in one unit of play. This unit of play is repeated twice to complete the shortened special game. Because the shortened special game only involves two very short openings of the large prize slot 20, very few balls can enter the slot, resulting in virtually zero or very few balls being dispensed (for example, a few to a few dozen balls, or a payout corresponding to 1-2 balls per round). A special game consisting of two repeated unit plays is sometimes referred to as a "2R jackpot." It should be noted that a shortened special game can also be achieved by using the same number of unit plays as a normal special game, but by opening the large prize slot 20 for a shorter time than usual in all unit plays.

Furthermore, after the aforementioned symbol changes, if the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping represent a predetermined minor win pattern, the game transitions to a minor win game consisting of one unit game, and the opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 20 is performed. During one unit game constituting the minor win game, the large prize opening 20 is open for approximately 1.6 seconds, resulting in an operation pattern that visually approximates a 2R major win.

If a special game occurs and the winning symbols at that time are in a specific configuration (for example, "777"), a probability variation mode, which is one of the specific games, will start after the special game ends. During the probability variation mode, a win/loss lottery is conducted with a higher probability of winning than in the normal probability state, and a new special game may occur relatively quickly. It is also possible to keep the outcome of the win/loss lottery a specific jackpot, i.e., a jackpot accompanied by a probability variation mode, without explicitly indicating it through decorative symbols or performance content. In this case, even during a probability variation mode, the performance display device 60 will not explicitly indicate whether it is a probability variation mode or not. However, if certain conditions are met, the performance display device 60 may explicitly indicate whether it is a probability variation mode or not.

After the special game ends, during normal gameplay, one of the specific game states, the "easy ball entry" state, is activated. In the easy ball entry state, the probability of winning the opening lottery is increased compared to normal, and the opening time of the normal electric mechanism 90 is extended. This can increase the number of normal symbol wins per unit of time, and also increases the ease of ball entry into the second starting opening 12, thus increasing the likelihood of balls entering the second starting opening 12. Therefore, the opportunity to win prize balls by entering the second starting opening 12 increases, making it possible to continue playing with almost no decrease in ball count, or even gradually increasing it.

In the "easy ball entry" state, as one of the specific game states, the variation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened compared to the normal state; this is known as "time reduction." The variation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 returns to its original variation time after a predetermined number of variations, for example, 100 variations. However, if a jackpot occurs before reaching that number of variations, the time reduction also ends. Because the variation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened during time reduction, the time until a jackpot occurs can be shortened compared to the normal state where the symbols vary at their normal variation times, thus relatively increasing the ease of winning a jackpot. In a modified example, the time reduction for the special symbols may not be implemented in the "easy ball entry" state.

Figure 2 shows the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko game machine. The power switch 150 is a switch that turns the power of the pachinko game machine 100 on and off. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine 100, and in particular processes all game operations, such as the lottery when a ball enters the first start opening 11 and the second start opening 12. The sub-board 300 is equipped with a liquid crystal unit 151 and controls the display content of the performance display device 60, and in particular changes the performance display content according to the judgment result of the main board 200. The back set mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for prize balls, and a payout device 154 that dispenses prize balls. The payout device 154 dispenses game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball tray 105 in accordance with the entry into each prize opening. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The launching device 156 launches the stored balls from the upper ball tray 105 one at a time into the game area 81. The launching control board 157 controls the launching operation of the launching device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies power to various parts of the pachinko game machine 100. A performance display unit 159 is provided on the main board 200. The performance display unit 159 consists of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number, representing the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launched balls (the sum of safe balls and out balls).

A setting change device 170 is provided on the main board 200. The setting change device 170 is a device for changing the setting to one of several settings (also called game settings) corresponding to multiple game specifications. For example, six game settings (settings 1 to 6) are available, and the probability of winning a jackpot can be varied according to the game setting. Specifically, the higher the numerical value among settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specification becomes for the player. If the jackpot probabilities for settings 1 to 6 are denoted as M1 to M6, the jackpot probabilities for each setting can be determined such that M1 ≤ M2 ≤ M3 ≤ M4 ≤ M5 ≤ M6. It is not mandatory to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings; the jackpot probabilities may be the same across different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 includes a setting key cylinder 171 into which an employee of the amusement parlor inserts a setting key, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to one of several game settings, a setting display unit 173 that illuminates to display the set setting value, and a setting memory for storing the set setting value. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey type switch for transitioning to a state where the setting can be changed (hereinafter referred to as "setting change state") or a state where the setting can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation state"). First, the power switch 150 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 and turned to the ON position, and then the power switch 150 is turned on to transition to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. To transition to the setting change state, the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch (sometimes called the "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, to transition to the setting confirmation state, the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When the system transitions to the setting change state, the setting display unit 173 displays the number "1" as the initial value for the game setting, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172. The setting display unit 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a single digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 changes sequentially from 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→... After changing the setting, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the off state, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory, the setting change is confirmed, and the system becomes playable. On the other hand, when the system transitions to the setting confirmation state, the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 does not change, and the setting cannot be changed. After that, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the off state, the system becomes playable. Furthermore, if the setting key is turned off and the machine is ready for gameplay, the setting display unit 173 will turn off, making it impossible to see the current setting value.

The setting change button 172 may also function as the RAM clear switch. In this case, if the setting key is not turned (setting key off) and the RAM clear switch is pressed while the power is turned on, a RAM clear will be performed. On the other hand, if the setting key is turned (setting key on) and the RAM clear switch is pressed while the power is turned on, the system will transition to the setting change state along with the RAM clear. Furthermore, if the setting key is off and the RAM clear switch is not pressed while the power is turned on, the system will power back on without a RAM clear. On the other hand, if the setting key is on and the RAM clear switch is not pressed while the power is turned on, the system will transition to the setting confirmation state. The setting display unit 173 may also function as the performance display unit 159. In this case, the combined display unit may function as the performance display unit 159 when the game is playable, and as the setting display unit 173 when the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed. Alternatively, the setting change device 170 may be omitted, making it impossible to change the game settings.

<Function Blocks>
Figure 3 shows the functional blocks of the pachinko game machine 100. The functions realized using each component will be explained below, but in this specification, in order to align the physical configuration with the functional configuration, the terms already described as physical components, such as the main board 200, payout control board 155, and launch control board 157, may be used as they are for convenience.

The pachinko game machine 100 is configured with a power supply board 158 that generates power for use within the game machine based on an AC power supply (AC 24V, etc.) supplied from outside the game machine; a main board 200 that acts as a primary control device for controlling the basic operation and progress of the game; a payout control board 155 that acts as a frame control device for controlling the payout of prize balls; a launch control board 157 that controls the launch of game balls into the game area; and a sub-board 300 that acts as a secondary control device for controlling theatrical operations and processing.

The main board 200 is electrically connected to the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the big prize port 20, the first operation port 31, the second operation port 32, the general prize port group (first general prize port 33a, second general prize port 33b), the out port 34, the symbol display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the launch control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 transmits a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on signals transmitted from the main board 200, such as prize ball payout and signals indicating the control status of the main board 200, thereby indirectly controlling the launch control board 157, and also controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154. The payout device 154 includes a payout motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The launch control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launch device 156, and the ball transport device 164. Based on launch permission signals transmitted from the payout control board 155, it controls the ball transport device 164 and the launch device 156 to launch the game balls. The sub-board 300 is electrically connected to the performance display device 60, the movable mechanism 66 (drive motor 67, position detection sensor 68), the speaker 108, the performance input operation device 115 (performance button 109, directional pad 110), and the decorative lamp 111, and transmits and receives various control signals between them.

Data transmission between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is unidirectional, from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300. The components necessary for achieving overall operation through unidirectional data transmission are arranged on both the main board 200 and the sub-board 300. Because the unidirectional nature of data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from components on the sub-board 300 to components on the main board 200, nor can data transmission requests be made. Therefore, the sub-board 300 cannot access information generated by the main board 200 unless that information is transmitted. Furthermore, data transmission and reception between the main board 200 and the dispensing control board 155, and between the dispensing control board 155 and the launch control board 157, are bidirectional. However, similar to the relationship between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300, a configuration of unidirectional data transmission and reception from the main board 200 to the dispensing control board 155, or from the dispensing control board 155 to the launch control board 157, is also possible.

The functional blocks included in the main board 200, dispensing control board 155, firing control board 157, and sub-board 300 described below are merely examples, and some functional blocks may be mounted on other boards as modifications. For example, the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional blocks included in the firing control board 157 may be mounted on the dispensing control board 155. Furthermore, for example, some of the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the main board 200, while the remaining portion is mounted on the dispensing control board 155. In other words, a portion of a functional block may be divided and provided on multiple boards, so that the whole constitutes a single functional block.

<Main board 200>
Figure 4 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination means 201, a performance display unit 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a pre-determination means 235, a general lottery means 213, a hold control means 240, a main display control means 250, a special game control means 260, a small win game control means 265, a specific game control means 270, an opening/closing control means 275, a special symbol adjustment means 276, a main initial processing execution means 280, a main power cut-off processing execution means 282, a main error detection means 284, a setting change means 286, a setting confirmation means 287, and a command communication means 205.

<Ball entry determination means 201>
The ball entry determination means 201 determines whether a game ball has entered each prize entry slot. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives first start prize information, it determines that the game ball has entered the first start slot 11, and when it receives second start prize information, it determines that the game ball has entered the second start slot 12. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives big prize entry information, it determines that the game ball has entered the big prize slot 20, and when it receives general prize information, it determines that the game ball has entered the general prize slot 33. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives passage information, it determines that the game ball has passed through the first operation slot 31 or the second operation slot 32. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives discharge information, it determines that the game ball has passed through the out slot 34. The ball entry determination means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launched balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls, and displays it on the performance display unit 159. The ball entry determination means 201 displays the value of "number of balls dispensed" ÷ "number of balls out" × 100 on the performance display unit 159 when the probability of a jackpot is in the normal probability state and the ball entry state is normal (a so-called low-low state with low probability and low ball entry). Therefore, the performance display unit 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random number generation means 202>
The random number generation means 202 generates random numbers for use in various decisions by the first lottery means 211, the second lottery means 212, and the general pattern lottery means 213. Specifically, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "65535" by predetermined means as random numbers (also called "winning/losing lottery values") used in the winning/losing lottery by the first winning/losing determination means 221 and the second winning/losing determination means 222. In addition, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "255" by predetermined means as random numbers (also called "pattern determination lottery values") used in the pattern determination (pattern lottery) by the first pattern determination means 226 and the second pattern determination means 227. Furthermore, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "255" by predetermined means as random numbers (also called "variation pattern determination lottery values") used in determining the variation pattern by the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232. Furthermore, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "99" by predetermined means as random numbers used in the win/fail lottery by the regular pattern lottery means 213. Furthermore, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "2" by predetermined means as random numbers used when determining the regular pattern. Note that the "random numbers" referred to here may be physical random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit, true random numbers in a mathematical sense, pseudo-random numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter or software random numbers using a random number generation algorithm. Alternatively, random numbers may be generated by combining hardware random numbers and software random numbers. Furthermore, the random numbers obtained by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212 may be random numbers generated by the same generation means, or random numbers generated by different generation means.

<General drawing lottery method 213>
The regular symbol lottery means 213 obtains random numbers used for determining the success or failure of regular symbols and random numbers used for determining the stopping symbols of regular symbols from the random number generation means 202 when a game ball passes through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32, and executes the lottery. The regular symbol lottery means 213 holds a regular symbol success/failure determination table (not shown) which is referenced for determining the success or failure of regular symbols, and a regular symbol determination table which is referenced for determining the stopping symbols of regular symbols to be displayed on the regular symbol display unit 45. The regular symbol success/failure determination table defines the correspondence between lottery values for success/failure and success, and the regular symbol determination table defines the correspondence between lottery values for determining the stopping symbols and regular symbols. Based on the aforementioned success probability and symbol selection probability, the success or failure of regular symbols and the stopping symbols are determined. The regular symbol lottery means 213 determines the stopping symbol for the regular symbol by referring to the regular symbol determination table if the lottery value for determining the win or loss of the regular symbol corresponds to a win, and always determines one losing symbol pattern if the lottery value for determining the win or loss of the regular symbol corresponds to a loss. If the result of the regular symbol win or loss determination corresponds to a win and the regular symbol stops on a predetermined symbol (first winning pattern or second winning pattern), the opening/closing control means 275, described later, expands the regular electric mechanism 90 of the second start opening 12 according to the pattern of the stopped symbol and the game state. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds for short opening and 6 seconds for long opening. The lottery value for the regular symbol is temporarily held by the hold control means 240, described later. However, the lottery value is held only if it does not exceed a predetermined upper limit of holds held by the hold control means 240.

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 includes a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first win/fail determination means 221, a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination means 231, and performs a first win/fail lottery as a win/fail lottery corresponding to the ball entering the first start opening 11. Based on the various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 in the first special symbol display unit 41. In addition, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 60. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second win/fail determination means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and performs a second win/fail lottery as a win/fail lottery corresponding to the ball entering the second start opening 12. Based on the various lottery results from the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 displays a variation of the second special symbol 52 in the second special symbol display unit 42. In addition, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 60.

<First lottery value acquisition means 216 and second lottery value acquisition means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers from the random number generation means 202 for various lotteries and decisions by the first lottery means 211, triggered by the ball entering the first start opening 11. Specifically, it acquires the first win/fail lottery value for win/fail determination by the first win/fail determination means 221, the first symbol lottery value for determining the stopping pattern of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determination means 226, and the first pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the first variation pattern determination means 231, each from the corresponding random number generation means. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires random numbers from the random number generation means 202 for various lotteries and decisions by the second lottery means 212, triggered by the ball entering the second start opening 12. Specifically, the second win/failure lottery value for win/failure determination by the second win/failure determination means 222, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stopping pattern of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determination means 227, and the second pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the second variation pattern determination means 232 are obtained from the corresponding random number generation means.

The first win/fail determination means 221 performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to proceed to a special game based on the first win/fail lottery value. The second win/fail determination means 222 performs a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to proceed to a special game based on the second win/fail lottery value. More specifically, the win/fail determination determines whether the outcome is a "big win," indicating a transition to a special game; a "minor win," indicating a transition to a minor win game; or a "miss," indicating no transition to a special game or minor win game. The first win/fail determination means 221 and the second win/fail determination means 222 maintain a win/fail determination table that is referenced in the win/fail determination. Note that the win/fail determination performed when starting the symbol change will be referred to as the "main win/fail determination" as appropriate, in order to distinguish it from the pre-win/fail determination described later. In this specification, when we refer to "table" or "selection criteria," we mean not only data where the correspondence between a first parameter (such as a lottery value) and a second parameter (such as a value indicating a choice) is defined in a table structure, but also broadly include cases where such a correspondence is implemented using a program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter. Including these, the term "selection criteria" will be used as appropriate, as it is essentially synonymous with "table." Furthermore, when using a table structure, a selection criterion that is essentially one type may be composed of a combination of structurally subdivided tables; however, when we refer to "multiple types of selection criteria," we mean the actual number of table types, not the number of subdivided tables.

The first win/fail determination means 221 and the second win/fail determination means 222 each maintain a table corresponding to their respective win/fail determinations, which is used as a win/fail determination table for the win/fail determination. Specifically, they maintain a win/fail determination table for the win/fail determination by the first win/fail determination means 221 (also called the "first win/fail determination table") and a win/fail determination table for the win/fail determination by the second win/fail determination means 222 (also called the "second win/fail determination table"), and select the table to refer to according to the win/fail determination to be performed. Multiple win/fail determination tables associate the results of big win, small win, and miss determinations with win/fail lottery values, and the win/fail probability is determined according to the range setting of the big wins that are associated. In addition, multiple types of win/fail determination tables are provided to correspond to multiple game settings, for example, for each of the game settings from setting 1 to setting 6, a win/fail determination table is provided that has a different correspondence between the win/fail lottery value and the win/fail determination result. Furthermore, if the probabilities of big wins, small wins, and losses are the same across multiple game settings, a common win/loss determination table may be provided for all game settings.

Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of the win/failure determination table. This figure shows a win/failure determination table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows the win/failure determination table corresponding to setting 6. In the win/failure determination table in this figure, the judgment results of big win, small win, and miss are associated with the win/failure lottery value, and the probability of winning a big win and the probability of winning a small win are determined according to the respective range settings associated. The first win/failure determination means 221 and the second win/failure determination means 222 refer to the win/failure determination table in this figure as the main determination. In both the first win/failure lottery by the first win/failure determination means 221 and the second win/failure lottery by the second win/failure determination means 222, a big win occurs under normal circumstances only when the win/failure lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299. During probability variation, the range of big wins is expanded, and a big win occurs not only when the win/failure lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299, but also when it falls within the range of 300 to 2999. Thus, the range of wins changes depending on the game state. Note that in this diagram, a single win/loss judgment table is used to show the win/loss ranges for both normal and bonus rounds. However, separate win/loss judgment tables may be prepared for normal and bonus rounds, or for the first and second win/loss draws.

In the first premise technology, even if the winning/losing value does not fall within the winning range, it will be considered a minor win if it falls within a predetermined range. In the example shown in this figure, a minor win occurs when the winning/losing value acquired by the first winning/losing determination means 221 falls within the range of 56500 to 65535, and a minor win occurs when the winning/losing value acquired by the second winning/losing determination means 222 falls within the range of 64000 to 65535. In other words, the range for minor wins is wider in the first winning/losing determination means than in the second winning/losing determination means, making minor wins more likely. Thus, if it does not result in a winning jackpot, it is essentially all a "miss," but in the example shown in this figure, the winning/losing value range in cases where it does not result in a winning jackpot and also does not result in a minor win is specifically referred to as a "miss." In other words, if "winning or losing" is considered from the perspective of "whether or not it is a jackpot," then "minor win" can be considered as a broader "miss" meaning "not a jackpot." Furthermore, when considering "win or loss" from the perspective of "whether or not it's a win," "minor wins" can be included in the broader definition of "win" along with "major wins." Note that while this diagram shows an example where the tables for determining whether it's a major win or a minor win are implemented as a single win/loss determination table, they may also be implemented as separate tables. Additionally, "minor wins" may be included in only one of the first or second games, or not in either game. In that case, the corresponding win/loss determination table will not have a value set for minor wins.

Figure 6 schematically shows the range settings for the winning/losing lottery values for each setting value. Figure (a) shows the correspondence between the first winning/losing lottery value acquired by the first winning/losing determination means 221 and the winning/losing determination result. Figure (b) shows the correspondence between the second winning/losing lottery value acquired by the second winning/losing determination means 222 and the winning/losing determination result. The range of the first and second winning/losing lottery values that result in a jackpot during normal play and during probability variation is 0 to 294 for setting value "1", 0 to 295 for setting value "2", 0 to 296 for setting value "3", 0 to 297 for setting value "4", 0 to 298 for setting value "5", and 0 to 299 for setting value "6". Therefore, the larger the setting value, the wider the range of winning/losing lottery values that result in a jackpot during normal play, and the higher the probability of a jackpot during normal play. Furthermore, the range of the first and second win/loss lottery values, which result in a jackpot only during the probability variation mode (i.e., a loss during normal play), is 295 to 2949 for setting "1", 296 to 2959 for setting "2", 297 to 2969 for setting "3", 298 to 2979 for setting "4", 299 to 2989 for setting "5", and 300 to 2999 for setting "6". Therefore, the larger the setting value, the wider the range of win/loss lottery values that result in a jackpot during the probability variation mode, and the higher the probability of winning a jackpot during the probability variation mode. Note that the range of win/loss lottery values is set so that the ratio of the probability of winning a jackpot during normal play to the probability of winning a jackpot during the probability variation mode remains constant regardless of the setting value. In this diagram, the range of the win/loss lottery values is defined so that the probability of winning a jackpot during the bonus round is 10 times higher than the probability of winning a jackpot during normal play, and this range is common to all settings from "1" to "6". Furthermore, the range of the win/loss lottery values is defined so that the probability of a minor win remains constant regardless of the setting. For all settings from "1" to "6", a minor win occurs when the first win/loss lottery value range falls between 56500 and 65535, and a minor win occurs when the second win/loss lottery value range falls between 64000 and 65535. Win/loss lottery values outside the ranges for a jackpot or minor win result in a "miss". While this diagram shows different jackpot probabilities for each setting, the correspondence between the win/loss lottery values and the win/loss judgment results may be defined so that the jackpot probability is the same across different setting values.

<First pattern determination means 226 and second pattern determination means 227>
Returning to Figure 4, the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 determine the stopping symbol at the start of the symbol variation based on the symbol lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202 and the result of the win/failure determination. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 maintain a plurality of symbol determination tables that are referenced in order to determine the stopping symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determination means 226 maintains a plurality of symbol determination tables corresponding to the result of the win/failure determination by the first win/failure determination means 221, and the second symbol determination means 227 maintains a plurality of symbol determination tables corresponding to the result of the win/failure determination by the second win/failure determination means 222. The first win/failure determination means 221 maintains a first symbol determination table for big wins that is referenced when there is a big win, a first symbol determination table for small wins that is referenced when there is a small win, and a first symbol determination table for misses that is referenced when there is a miss. The second win/loss determination means 222 holds a second symbol determination table for big wins, a second symbol determination table for small wins, and a second symbol determination table for misses, which are referenced when a big win occurs. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 select the symbol determination table to reference according to the result of the win/loss determination. The symbol determination performed when starting the symbol variation is to be distinguished from the pre-symbol determination described later, and is also referred to as the "main symbol determination" as appropriate.

Figure 7 schematically shows the symbol determination table. Figure 7(a) is the table referenced when the win/failure determination result is a jackpot, Figure 7(b) is the table referenced when the win/failure determination result is a loss, and Figure 7(c) is the table referenced when the win/failure determination result is a minor win. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the symbol determination table in this figure as the main determination for the symbol determination. Each symbol determination table defines the correspondence between the number "0" to "10" indicating the type of special symbol and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value. Each type of special symbol is associated with the win/failure determination result of jackpot, minor win, or loss, with "0" to "4" corresponding to jackpots, "5" to "9" corresponding to minor wins, and "10" corresponding to losses. Each type is assigned multiple special symbols, i.e., symbols that are generally meaningless and formed by combinations of segments.

As shown in Figure 7(a), the special symbols types "0" to "4" correspond to the presence or absence of a jackpot and probability variation after a jackpot. Specifically, type "0" represents a 10R jackpot with probability variation as a specific jackpot, corresponding to "0 to 99" for the first symbol lottery value and "0 to 144" for the second symbol lottery value. Type "1" represents a 4R jackpot (or "effectively a 4R jackpot") with probability variation as a specific jackpot, corresponding to "100 to 149" for the first symbol lottery value and "145 to 149" for the second symbol lottery value. Type "2" represents a 2R jackpot with probability variation, and type "2" corresponds to "150 to 189" for both the first and second symbol lottery values. Type "3" represents a standard 10R jackpot without a probability variation, and Type "3" is associated with both the first and second symbol lottery values being "150 to 189". Type "4" represents a standard 4R jackpot without a probability variation, and Type "4" is associated with both the first and second symbol lottery values being "230 to 255". In this way, the range of the symbol lottery values determines the selection probability for each jackpot type (i.e., the content of the jackpot and whether or not there is a subsequent probability variation).

Furthermore, it is possible to include a greater number of special symbols. In this case, by configuring the system so that one type of jackpot is determined for each of the multiple special symbols, it is possible to increase the number of symbol types while keeping the number of jackpot types low. Alternatively, it is possible to subdivide the increased number of symbol types into even more jackpot types. Moreover, it is possible to have different symbol types for the first and second draws. In this case, the system is configured so that one type of jackpot is determined for each of the special symbols selected in the first and second draws. However, it is desirable to set the probability variation ratio to be the same for the first and second draws.

As shown in Figure 7(b), type "10" corresponds to the entire range of symbol lottery values when the win/loss judgment result is a loss. Therefore, it is determined that the same special symbol will always be displayed when the result is a loss. It is also possible to have multiple special symbols displayed when the result is a loss.

As shown in Figure 7(c), special symbols types "5" through "9" are associated with minor wins. Type "5" corresponds to the symbol lottery value range "0 to 49," type "6" corresponds to the symbol lottery value range "50 to 99," type "7" corresponds to the symbol lottery value range "100 to 149," type "8" corresponds to the symbol lottery value range "150 to 199," and type "9" corresponds to the symbol lottery value range "200 to 255."

In the first prerequisite technology, in order to save memory space on the main board 200, the table in Figure 7 is also referenced as the prerequisite symbol determination table during the prerequisite symbol determination. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 transmit a value from "0" to "10" indicating the type of special symbol as a result of the prerequisite symbol determination, along with a value indicating whether it is the first or second win/fail lottery and the number of reserved symbols, to the performance determination means 303. Furthermore, the prerequisite symbol determination table may be further subdivided to enable more complex determinations, or a simplified version combining the determination ranges of winning symbols that perform similar special games may be used. Also, in cases where the symbol is uniformly determined upon a loss, as in the first prerequisite technology, a specific symbol may be determined without referring to the acquired symbol lottery value or without preparing a separate symbol determination table for losses.

<First variation pattern determination means 231 and second variation pattern determination means 232>
Returning to Figure 4, the first variation pattern determination means 231 determines a variation pattern from among multiple variation patterns based on a first pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202, which defines the display process of the pattern variation to be displayed on the first special pattern display unit 41 and the performance display device 60. The second variation pattern determination means 232 determines a variation pattern from among multiple variation patterns based on a second pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202, which defines the display process of the pattern variation to be displayed on the second special pattern display unit 42 and the performance display device 60. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 each refer to the variation pattern table when starting a pattern variation to determine the variation pattern of that pattern variation. In addition, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 perform a pre-pattern determination to determine which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232, and the control means of the main board 200 each maintain or share a variation pattern table that is referenced to determine the variation pattern when the variation start condition is met, and a pre-pattern determination table that is used to generate information for determining the execution of the pre-reading process when a ball enters the start opening. The variation pattern has a defined variation time from the start to the stop of the variation when the special symbol is displayed in a variation, and the variation time varies in length depending on the type. In other words, for each variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation is defined, a variation display time is essentially defined for each pattern as the termination condition of the symbol variation, and the variation of the special symbol stops when that variation display time has elapsed. The variation pattern determination performed when starting the symbol variation is also referred to as the "main determination variation pattern determination" as appropriate, in order to distinguish it from the pre-pattern determination. In addition, in order to assist in the selection of the variation performance pattern of the decorative symbol described later, it may be defined as a variation pattern of different types even though the variation time is the same.

Figure 8 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 refer to the table in Figure (a) under normal conditions, and to the table in Figure (b) under time-saving conditions.

As shown in Figure 8(a), if the hit/fail judgment result is a miss in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, "Super 1," a super reach from pattern range number "0," is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "Super 2," a super reach from pattern range number "1," is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, "Normal 1," a normal reach from pattern range number "2," is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, "Normal 2," a normal reach from pattern range number "3," is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, "No Reach Miss," from pattern range number "4," is selected. For "No Reach Miss," different fluctuation patterns are selected depending on the number of reserved balls: a 10-second fluctuation pattern is selected when the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2, a 7-second fluctuation pattern is selected when the number of reserved balls is 3, and a 4-second fluctuation pattern is selected when the number of reserved balls is 4.

This diagram illustrates an example where the fluctuations are mainly classified into five types based on their fluctuation time. However, the sub-board 300 provides multiple fluctuation animation patterns for each of these fluctuation patterns, meaning that a total of several dozen fluctuation animation patterns are associated with the respective lottery value ranges for each classification.

The range of pattern selection values assigned to "Normal 1," "Normal 2," and "No Reach, Miss" also differs depending on the number of reserved balls. When the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, the range is as shown in Figure (a). However, as the number of reserved balls increases, the range of selection values for "Normal 1" and "Normal 2" narrows, while the range of selection value for "No Reach, Miss" widens. The fewer the number of reserved balls, the wider the range of selection values for variation patterns with relatively longer variation times, increasing the probability of selecting variation patterns with longer variation times. Therefore, the average variation time increases with fewer reserved balls and decreases with more reserved balls. By using a variation pattern table where the correspondence between pattern selection value ranges and variation patterns differs for each number of reserved balls, it is possible to implement control that makes it easier to select variation patterns with longer variation times when the number of reserved balls decreases.

In the normal state, if the win/loss result is a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, if the pattern lottery value is between 0 and 123, "Super 1," a super reach from pattern range number "5," is selected. If the pattern lottery value is between 124 and 248, "Super 2," a super reach from pattern range number "6," is selected. If the pattern lottery value is between 249 and 252, "Normal 1," a normal reach from pattern range number "7," is selected. If the pattern lottery value is between 253 and 255, "Normal 2," a normal reach from pattern range number "8," is selected.

In normal gameplay, if the result of the win/loss determination is a 2R jackpot or minor win, if the pattern lottery value is between 0 and 122, the "Super 3" super reach (pattern range number "9") is selected. If the pattern lottery value is between 123 and 255, the "Normal 3" normal reach (pattern range number "10") is selected.

When the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 transmit the pre-determination result as a so-called look-ahead result to the performance determination means 303, they transmit the pattern range number value (0 to 10) along with a value indicating whether it is the first or second win/fail lottery and the number of reserved items. In the first prerequisite technology shown in Figure 8, a table is exemplified for each win/fail judgment result in the pre-pattern determination. However, regardless of the win/fail lottery result, a single pre-pattern determination table may be used to derive only information regarding the approximate range of the random value, and the control means on the sub-board 300 may be controlled to determine what kind of variation will be executed along with the pre-win/fail judgment result.

In the time-saving state, the variation pattern table in Figure 8(b) is referenced, and all variation patterns for time-saving are assigned pattern lottery values. However, the correspondence between the range of pattern lottery values and variation time is the same as in Figure 8(a), except for "No-Reach Loss Shortening," which is selected when a loss occurs. "No-Reach Loss Shortening" is a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time that corresponds to the same lottery value range and pattern range number as "No-Reach Loss" in Figure 8(a). "No-Reach Loss Shortening" also selects different variation patterns depending on the number of reserved balls; a 10-second variation pattern is selected when the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, and a 1-second variation pattern is selected when the number of reserved balls is 2 to 4. Note that the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or they may refer to different variation pattern tables depending on the game state. For example, in a gaming machine where the second lottery is set to be more favorable than the first lottery, and the second lottery is processed with priority over the first, a situation where the reserves for the second lottery run out despite the easy ball entry state due to the time reduction, resulting in the first lottery being executed repeatedly, is undesirable for the player. Therefore, in the case of a losing variation in the first lottery during the easy ball entry state, it may be possible to refer to a variation pattern table that uniformly selects a variation pattern with a long duration (e.g., 10 seconds) that does not shorten the variation time, regardless of the number of reserves.

<Hold control means 240>
Returning to Figure 4, the hold control means 240 includes a special symbol hold means 241 and a regular symbol hold means 242. When a new first win/fail lottery value or second win/fail lottery value is acquired, if a symbol variation corresponding to the previously acquired first win/fail lottery value or second win/fail lottery value is displayed, the special symbol hold means 241 holds the start of the symbol variation corresponding to the newly acquired first win/fail lottery value or second win/fail lottery value and stores that win/fail lottery value until the start of the corresponding symbol variation display. Here, for the first special symbol, the first win/fail lottery value, the first symbol lottery value and the first pattern lottery value are stored, up to a maximum of four each. For the second special symbol, the second win/fail lottery value, the second symbol lottery value and the second pattern lottery value are stored, up to a maximum of four each. The regular symbol hold means 242 stores the regular symbol lottery value acquired by the regular symbol lottery means 213 as a hold ball. These reserved numbers are represented by the number of lights or flashes on the first special feature reserved display unit 71, the second special feature reserved display unit 72, and the general feature reserved display unit 75, respectively. The number of reserved numbers by the special feature reserved means 241 is also displayed on the performance display device 60.

The lottery value for the second win/loss lottery, held in the special symbol holding means 241, is processed preferentially over the lottery value for the first win/loss lottery, and the symbol changes are displayed accordingly. Therefore, even if a winning lottery value is held for the first win/loss lottery, as long as there is a lottery value held for the second win/loss lottery, the symbol changes corresponding to the winning lottery value of the first win/loss lottery will not be displayed. Consequently, even if a winning lottery value is held for the first win/loss lottery, continuing to play until another winning lottery value is held for the second win/loss lottery may result in multiple consecutive wins.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special symbol control means 251, a second special symbol control means 252, and a general symbol control means 254. The first special symbol control means 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41 according to the variation pattern determined in accordance with the judgment result of the first win/fail lottery by the first lottery means 211. The first special symbol control means 251 uses the completion of the display of the variation of the symbols corresponding to the previously performed first win/fail lottery or second win/fail lottery as the starting condition for a new symbol variation. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42 according to the variation pattern determined in accordance with the judgment result of the second win/fail lottery by the second lottery means 212. The second special symbol control means 252 also sets the completion of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first or second win/fail lottery that was performed earlier as the start condition for a new symbol variation.

The first special symbol control means 251 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first win/fail lottery if the win/fail lottery value for the second win/fail lottery is stored by the special symbol holding means 241. On the other hand, the second special symbol control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second win/fail lottery regardless of whether the win/fail lottery value for the first win/fail lottery is stored by the special symbol holding means 241. As a result, if lottery values are held for both the first and second win/fail lotteries, the lottery value held for the second win/fail lottery is preferentially read out and the symbol variation is displayed. In such cases, the lottery value held for the first win/fail lottery is not read out and the symbol variation does not start until the number of held values for the second win/fail lottery becomes zero.

The first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 transmit a variation start command and a variation stop command to the performance determination means 303 (sub-main) via the command communication means 205, described later, at the timing when the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 starts and stops. When transmitting a variation start command, values indicating the hit/fail judgment result, the stopped symbol, and the variation pattern determined as the main judgment, as well as a value indicating whether it is the first hit/fail lottery or the second hit/fail lottery, are transmitted to the performance determination means 303 along with the variation start command. When transmitting a variation stop command, a value indicating the stopped symbol is transmitted again to the performance determination means 303 along with the variation stop command. In addition, the performance determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits variation start commands, variation stop commands, etc. to the performance control means 304 (sub-sub) in order to control the variation display of decorative symbols by the performance control means 304 (sub-sub). This synchronizes the variable display controlled by the main display control means 250 and the performance control means 304 (sub-sub), maintaining their interlock. The regular symbol control means 254 displays the result of the lottery conducted by the regular symbol lottery means 213 as a variable display of regular symbols on the regular symbol display unit 45.

<Special figure adjustment means 276>
The special symbol adjustment means 276 keeps the display of the other special symbol 52 on hold while one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is being displayed. Regardless of the order in which the game ball enters the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12, the special symbol adjustment means 276 prioritizes the display of the second special symbol 52 based on the ball entering the second start opening 12 over the display of the first special symbol 51 based on the ball entering the first start opening 11. For example, when both the first and second win/loss lottery values are pending, the second win/loss lottery value is always prioritized, and the second special symbol 52 is continuously displayed.

In the modified example, the special symbol adjustment means 276 may selectively change the display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 according to the order in which the balls enter the first start port 11 and the second start port 12. For example, when the balls enter in the order of first start port 11, first start port 11, and second start port 12, the special symbols will be displayed in the order of first special symbol 51, first special symbol 51, and second special symbol 52. In this case, the special symbol adjustment means 276 monitors the hold control means 240 and stores the hold order of the win/loss lottery values. Since which special symbol should change is determined according to the order in which the game balls enter, i.e., the hold order of the win/loss lottery values in the hold control means 240, the player can easily visually grasp the order of the changes.

In another modified example, the special symbol adjustment means 276 may display the fluctuations of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined order, regardless of the order in which the balls enter the machine. For example, priority may be given to displaying the fluctuations of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 alternately. For instance, when both the first and second win/loss lottery values are pending, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed alternately. Since which special symbol should fluctuate simply alternates regardless of the order in which the game balls enter the machine, the player can easily grasp the order of fluctuations intuitively.

The special symbol adjustment means 276 also waits for the start of the variation display of the other special symbol when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 stops in a winning state. In this case, since the variation display of the special symbols does not start while the special game is being played, the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Pre-determination means 235>
The pre-determination means 235 includes a first lottery pre-determination means 236 and a second lottery pre-determination means 237. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 pre-determines information regarding the variation of the first special symbol before the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol control means 251 begins, using various random numbers acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216, before the execution of various determinations by the first win/fail determination means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, and the first variation pattern determination means 231. The second lottery pre-determination means 237 pre-determines information regarding the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol control means 252 before the execution of various determinations by the second win/fail determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232, using various random numbers acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217, before the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol control means 252 begins.

The first lottery pre-determination means 236 maintains a first pre-win/fail lottery value determination table, a first pre-symbol lottery value determination table, and a first pre-variation pattern random value determination table as determination tables for pre-determination related to the first lottery means 211. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-win/fail lottery value determination table to determine the random number group to which the first win/fail lottery value stored in the special symbol holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-symbol lottery value determination table to determine the random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special symbol holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-variation pattern determination table to determine the random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special symbol holding means 241 belongs. These determination results are then temporarily stored as pre-determination results, and information regarding the pre-determination results is transmitted to the sub-board 300 via the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), described later.

Figure 9 is a schematic diagram showing the pre-win/failure determination table referenced in the pre-win/failure determination. The first lottery pre-win/failure determination means 236 (pre-win/failure determination for the first game) refers to the first pre-win/failure lottery value determination table in Figure 9(a) when a ball enters the first start opening 11, and sets the value "1" to indicate that if the win/failure lottery value is "0 to 299", as the pre-win/failure determination result. If the win/failure lottery value is "300 to 2999", sets the value "2" to indicate that as the pre-win/failure determination result. If the win/failure lottery value is "3000 to 56499", sets the value "3" to indicate that as the pre-win/failure determination result. If the win/failure lottery value is "56500 to 65535", sets the value "4" to indicate that as the pre-win/failure determination result. Next, refer to the first pre-symbol lottery value determination table (not shown) and set the value "0" as the pre-symbol determination result if the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99". If the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", set the value "1" as the pre-symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", set the value "2" as the pre-symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", set the value "3" as the pre-symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", set the value "4" as the pre-symbol determination result. Furthermore, refer to the first pre-variation pattern random value determination table (not shown) and set the value "A" as the pre-pattern determination result if the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9". If the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value "B" indicating this is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value "C" indicating this is set as the pre-pattern determination result. The pre-determination information set by the first lottery pre-determination means 236 (pre-win/loss determination for the first game) is transmitted to the performance determination means 303 via the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), described later, in accordance with the transmission timing of information indicating ball entry into the first start opening 11 (indicating the first win/loss lottery), information indicating the number of held balls, etc.

The second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-win/loss determination for the second game) refers to the second pre-win/loss lottery value determination table in Figure 9(b) when a ball enters the second start opening 12. If the win/loss lottery value is "0 to 299", it sets the value "1" to indicate this as the pre-win/loss determination result. If the win/loss lottery value is "300 to 2999", it sets the value "2" to indicate this as the pre-win/loss determination result. If the win/loss lottery value is "3000 to 63999", it sets the value "3" to indicate this as the pre-win/loss determination result. If the win/loss lottery value is "64000 to 65535", it sets the value "4" to indicate this as the pre-win/loss determination result. Next, it refers to the second pre-symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), and if the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", it sets the value "0" to indicate this as the pre-symbol determination result. If the second symbol lottery value is "145 to 149", the value "1" indicating this is set as the pre-symbol determination result. If the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", the value "2" indicating this is set as the pre-symbol determination result. If the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", the value "3" indicating this is set as the pre-symbol determination result. If the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", the value "4" indicating this is set as the pre-symbol determination result. Furthermore, referring to the second pre-variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value "A" indicating this is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value "B" indicating this is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value "C" indicating this is set as the pre-pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-determination of win/loss regarding the second game) is transmitted to the performance determination means 303 via the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), described later, in accordance with the transmission timing of information indicating ball entry into the second start opening 12 (indicating that it is the second win/loss lottery), information indicating the number of reserved balls, etc.

Furthermore, the various pieces of information temporarily stored as pre-determination results by the pre-determination means 235 are stored in a predetermined pre-determination result storage area, with a maximum of four items each, similar to the number of reserved items. Alternatively, the pre-determination results may be stored using the reserved storage area stored by the reserved control means 240. The information may also be erased based on the transmission of the pre-determination results by the pre-determination means 235 to the performance determination means 303 via the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), which will be described later. In this way, by sharing with other areas or erasing information based on the completion of transmission, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected. Also, instead of providing a separate table for pre-determination, a judgment table for this judgment may be used, and a pre-determination table may be shared in part or entirely between the pre-win/loss judgment for the first game and the pre-determination for the second game. In this way, by sharing with other judgment tables, a reduction in data capacity in the main board 200 can be expected. Furthermore, the content transmitted as the result of the pre-determination means 235 can be appropriately selected, for example, by transmitting only the result of whether the result is correct or incorrect. Alternatively, the system may be configured to transmit the random numbers obtained by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 to the sub-board 300 via the command communication means 205, without performing a determination by the pre-determination means 235, and for the sub-board 300 to determine the content of the pre-determination.

The pre-determination means 235 may refer to a pre-win/loss lottery value determination table where the correspondence between the win/loss lottery value and the pre-win/loss determination result differs depending on the setting value set by the setting change device 170. Similar to the win/loss determination table described above, multiple types of pre-win/loss lottery value determination tables corresponding to multiple game settings may be prepared, and the pre-win/loss lottery value determination table referenced may be switched according to the setting value of the game setting. Alternatively, a pre-win/loss lottery value determination table that can be used in common across multiple game settings may be used. In this case, the win/loss may be determined in advance based on the combination of the setting value of the game setting and the value of the pre-win/loss determination result.

Figure 10 schematically shows a pre-win/loss determination table corresponding to the game settings. Figure (a) is the pre-win/loss determination table referenced by the first pre-win/loss determination means 236, and Figure (b) is the pre-win/loss determination table referenced by the second pre-win/loss determination means 237. When the win/loss lottery value is "0 to 294", the pre-win/loss determination result is "11", indicating that a jackpot will be won in all settings 1 to 6. When the win/loss lottery value is "295", the pre-win/loss determination result is "12", indicating that a jackpot will be won in normal settings 2 or higher or in all settings during probability variation. When the win/loss lottery value is "296", the pre-win/loss determination result is "13", indicating that a jackpot will be won in normal settings 3 or higher or in all settings during probability variation. When the win/loss lottery value is "297", the pre-win/loss determination result is "14", indicating that a jackpot will be won in normal settings 4 or higher or in all settings during probability variation. If the winning/losing lottery value is "298", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "15", indicating a jackpot in normal mode with setting 5 or higher, or in all settings during the bonus round. If the winning/losing lottery value is "299", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "16", indicating a jackpot in normal mode with setting 6, or in all settings during the bonus round. Furthermore, if the winning/losing lottery value is "300 to 2949", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "21", indicating a jackpot in all settings during the bonus round. If the winning/losing lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "22", indicating a jackpot in the bonus round with setting 2 or higher. If the winning/losing lottery value is "2960 to 2969", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "23", indicating a jackpot in the bonus round with setting 3 or higher. If the winning/losing lottery value is "2970 to 2979", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "23", indicating that a jackpot will occur in settings 4 or higher during the probability variation mode. If the winning/losing lottery value is "2980 to 2989", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "25", indicating that a jackpot will occur in settings 5 or higher during the probability variation mode. If the winning/losing lottery value is "2990 to 2999", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "26", indicating that a jackpot will occur in setting 6 during the probability variation mode. Furthermore, if the first winning/losing lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499", and if the second winning/losing lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the pre-win/losing judgment result will be "30", indicating that a minor win will occur in all settings. Furthermore, if the first win/loss lottery value shown in (a) is "56500 to 65535", and if the second win/loss lottery value shown in (b) is "64000 to 65535", the pre-win/loss judgment result will be "40", indicating a loss for all settings. By using such a pre-win/loss judgment table, it is possible to show the appropriate pre-win/loss judgment result for each setting value of the game.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control means 260, when the first win/fail lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a transition to a special game, determines that the conditions for activating the special game have been met when the first special symbol 51 stops in a predetermined jackpot configuration, and executes the special game by opening the jackpot opening 20. Similarly, the special game control means 260, when the second win/fail lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a transition to a special game, determines that the conditions for activating the special game have been met when the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined jackpot configuration, and executes the special game by opening the jackpot opening 20.

The special game is a game in which the opening and closing operation of the large prize slot 20 is continued multiple times in a row, and is composed of multiple unit games. The special game includes a 10R jackpot which repeats the unit game 10 times, a 4R jackpot which repeats the unit game 4 times, and a 2R jackpot which repeats a unit game with a shorter opening time than the 10R jackpot and 4R jackpot only twice. The 10R jackpot is a jackpot in the second win/loss lottery, and the 4R jackpot is a jackpot in the first win/loss lottery. In the 10R jackpot and 4R jackpot, the large prize slot 20 is kept open for approximately 30 seconds in a single unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the large prize slot 20 is kept open for only approximately 1.6 seconds in a single unit game. The special game control means 260 terminates the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game has been consumed. Furthermore, even in the case of a 2R jackpot, if the predetermined conditions are met, the large prize winning slot 20 may be opened in the same manner as for a 10R jackpot and a 4R jackpot.

<Small win game control means 265>
The minor win game control means 265 determines that the minor win game activation condition has been met when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a minor win and the first special symbol 51 stops in a predetermined minor win pattern, and executes the minor win game by having the opening/closing control means 275 open the big prize opening 20. Similarly, the minor win game control means 265 determines that the minor win game activation condition has been met when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a minor win and the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined minor win pattern, and executes the minor win game by having the opening/closing control means 275 open the big prize opening 20.

In a minor win game, one unit game is executed, and the large prize slot 20 is opened and closed twice during each unit game. The minor win game control means 265 opens the large prize slot 20 for approximately 0.8 seconds per opening and closing, then closes the large prize slot 20 to end the minor win game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls normal gameplay in the probability variation state, time reduction state, and easy ball entry state. If the special symbol is a symbol of a specific jackpot that leads to a transition to probability variation, the specific game control means 270 transitions the game state to the probability variation state, time reduction state, and easy ball entry state after the special game ends. The probability variation state, time reduction state, and easy ball entry state continue until the next jackpot occurs. In the time reduction state, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 select variation patterns with short variation times so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is generally short. However, in the normal state, the variation pattern table corresponding to the number of winning/losing lottery values held by the hold control means 240 is referred to, and the fewer the number of holds by the hold control means 240, the more likely it is that variation patterns with long variation times will appear. In the easy ball entry state, at least one of three functions is implemented: probability variation for normal symbols, time reduction for normal symbols, and extension of the opening of the second start opening 12, thereby improving the frequency of balls entering the second start opening 12 (ease of ball entry). During the probability variation state, the probability of the win/loss determination result by the first win/loss determination means 221 and the second win/loss determination means 222 being a jackpot remains at a high value. In addition, the specific game control means 270 extends the opening of the second start opening 12 when a specific jackpot is achieved, and only if the win/loss lottery is the second win/loss lottery, it further shifts the probability of winning the opening lottery to a probability variation state that is higher than the normal probability state.

<Opening/closing control means 275>
The opening/closing control means 275 controls the opening and closing of the ordinary electric mechanism 90 and the large prize opening 20 of the second start opening 12. When the ordinary symbols stop in a specific manner, the opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the ordinary electric mechanism solenoid 91, causing the ordinary electric mechanism 90 of the second start opening 12 to open. In the normal state, the opening/closing control means 275 opens the second start opening 12 with a short or long opening time depending on the result of the opening lottery, and in the easy ball entry state, it opens the second start opening 12 with a long opening time. This increases the ease of ball entry into the second start opening 12, allowing players to continue playing without reducing their ball count. In special games, the opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the large prize opening solenoid 92, causing the large prize opening 20 to open.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial processing execution means 280 executes the control start processing of the main board 200 when the pachinko game machine 100 is powered on or when power is restored after an outage. The main power outage processing execution means 282 executes abnormality response processing, such as power outage processing, on the main board 200 when a power abnormality such as a power outage occurs. The main error detection means 284 executes abnormality detection processing on the main board 200. The control start processing, abnormality response processing, and abnormality detection processing of the main board 200 will be described later.

<Means for changing settings 286, means for confirming settings 287>
The setting change means 286 executes a "setting change process" to change the game settings. When the setting key cylinder 171 is ON and the power switch 150 is turned ON while the RAM clear switch is pressed, the setting change means 286 transitions to the setting change state described above. When the setting change state is entered, the setting change means 286 displays the setting value stored in the setting memory on the setting display unit 173. The setting change means 286 changes the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 sequentially in the order of 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→... in response to the pressing of the setting change button 172, and updates the setting value stored in the setting memory to the same value as displayed on the setting display unit 173. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned OFF, the setting change means 286 terminates the setting change state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The setting confirmation means 287 performs a "setting confirmation process" to confirm the game settings. If the setting key cylinder 171 is ON and the RAM clear switch is not pressed, the setting confirmation means 287 transitions to the setting confirmation state described above. When the setting confirmation state is reached, the setting confirmation means 287 displays the setting value stored in the setting memory on the setting display unit 173. Unlike the setting change means 286 described above, the setting confirmation means 287 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173, nor does it update the setting value stored in the setting memory, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned OFF, the setting confirmation means 287 terminates the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

Furthermore, the setting value data managed in the setting memory may use numbers from "0" to "5" instead of the numbers "1" to "6". In this case, setting value "0" may correspond to setting 1, setting value "1" to setting 2, setting value "2" to setting 3, setting value "3" to setting 4, setting value "4" to setting 5, and setting value "5" to setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value for the setting value data, when a RAM error occurs and the RAM is cleared to reset the setting value data to the initial value "0", the system will no longer detect an error, thus simplifying the RAM clearing process in case of an error. In addition, when performing some kind of lottery using the setting value data, for example, when selecting different tables or data for each setting value in a pre-fetch process, there is the advantage of simplifying the offset processing for that selection. For example, when using "1" to "6" as the setting value data, additional processing such as subtracting 1 from the starting address is required when using these values as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when using "0" to "5" as the setting value data, the numerical value of the setting value data can be used directly as the offset data. Furthermore, when using numerical values from "0" to "5" as the setting value data, the setting change means 286 and the setting confirmation means 287 may either display the numerical value of the setting value data directly on the setting display unit 173, or they may display a value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the setting value data on the setting display unit 173. In the latter case, the numerical data from "0" to "5" is converted to the numerical values of settings 1 to 6 in the game settings and displayed, making the display easier for the administrator of the gaming machine to understand.

<Command transmission method>
The command communication means 205 includes a payout control command communication means 206 that transmits control commands necessary for executing payouts, etc., to the payout control board 155, and a sub-control command transmission means 207 that transmits control commands necessary for executing performance control, etc., to the sub-board 300. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command that instructs the payout of a number of prize balls corresponding to each prize slot based on the ball entry determination means 201's determination of ball entry into each prize slot, and transmits a command indicating the status of an error that occurred on the main board 200. When a symbol change is started, the sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits the result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol change to the performance determination means 303 along with the control command for the symbol change.

The sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits a variation start command and a variation stop command to the performance determination means 303 (sub-main) at the timing when the first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 start and stop the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. When transmitting a variation start command, values indicating the hit/fail judgment result, the stopped symbol, and the variation pattern determined as the main judgment, as well as a value indicating whether it is the first hit/fail lottery or the second hit/fail lottery, are transmitted to the performance determination means 303 along with the variation start command. When transmitting a variation stop command, a value indicating the stopped symbol is transmitted again to the performance determination means 303 along with the variation stop command. Furthermore, the performance determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits variation start commands, variation stop commands, etc. to the performance control means 304 (sub-sub) in order to control the variation display of decorative symbols by the performance control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the fluctuation displays by the main display control means 250 and the performance control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and their coordination is maintained. The sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits the pre-determination result from the pre-determination means 235 to the performance determination means 303. The pre-determination result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer and then transmitted to the performance determination means 303 along with information on the type of winning slot (first starting slot 11, second starting slot 12) corresponding to the lottery, the number of reserved items, the game state, etc., regardless of whether the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to that lottery starts immediately or not. It is then deleted from the transmission buffer or later overwritten. As a result, the sub-board 300 can predict the outcome of the symbol fluctuation before it is its turn to start, based on the received pre-determination result, a process known as "prediction." The processing performed by the sub-board 300 based on the pre-determination information will be described later. The sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits to the sub-board 300 information regarding special games by the special game control means 260, information regarding minor win games by the minor win game control means 265, information regarding the lottery results by the general drawing lottery means 213, and setting value information for game settings set by the setting change means 286. Furthermore, the sub-control command transmission means 207 appropriately transmits to the sub-board 300 information regarding initial processing by the main initial processing execution means 280 and the main error detection means 284, information regarding errors, and information regarding various controls on the main board 200, or various signals transmitted to the main board 200.

Figure 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub-board 300 includes a pattern determination means 301, a pattern storage means 302, a performance determination means 303, a performance control means 304, a timing means 307, a performance setting means 308, a sub-initial processing execution means 360, a sub-power-off processing execution means 362, a sub-error detection means 364, a command receiving means 370, and a sub-side pre-determination means 371.

The pattern storage means 302 stores multiple performance patterns, each containing a defined image content and display process for the decorative symbol 61 during its variation. These performance patterns include multiple variation performance patterns, each defining the variation process and performance process from the start to the stop of the variation display of the decorative symbol 61, as well as multiple preview performance patterns, which are displayed separately from the variation display of the decorative symbol and preemptively suggest the high probability of a jackpot before the variation display stops.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the sub-side pre-determination means 371 holds the pre-determination results transmitted from the command communication means 205. The performance determination means 303 includes a normal performance determination means 373 and a pre-read performance determination means 374. The normal performance determination means 373 determines the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device 60 and output to the speaker 108, decorative lamps 111, etc., by the performance control means 304, according to the information of the first win/failure lottery judgment result or the second win/failure lottery judgment result transmitted from the command communication means 205. The performance determination means 303 determines the performance content according to the game setting value transmitted from the command communication means 205. The pre-read performance determination means 374 determines the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device 60 and output to the speaker 108, decorative lamps 111, etc., by the performance control means 304, according to the pre-determination results transmitted from the command communication means 205. The normal performance determination means 373 selects one of a plurality of variation performance patterns corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232 and transmitted from the command communication means 205, and reads it from the pattern storage means 302. The normal performance determination means 373 sends the information of the read variation performance pattern to the performance control means 304. The normal performance determination means 373 holds a pattern table to be referenced in order to select a variation performance pattern. In addition, the normal performance determination means 373 may determine the variation performance pattern by referring to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, or it may determine the variation performance pattern in conjunction with the content of the pre-read performance by the pre-read performance determination means 374. The pre-read performance determination means 374 more accurately identifies the result of the main determination based on the pre-determination result from the command communication means 205 and past pre-determination results and game state information held in the sub-board 300, and based on the identified result, it decides whether or not to execute the pre-read performance before the main determination, and what the content of the execution is. Specifically, the pre-announcement effect determination means 374 determines whether the current game state is in a probability variation game, and then determines whether to transition to a normal game state based on pre-announcement results prior to the currently received pre-announcement result. Based on this determination, it identifies the success or failure of the main determination related to the currently received pre-announcement result, the selected variation pattern, etc., and then determines whether a pre-announcement effect can be executed and the content of the pre-announcement effect based on these identified results. Note that since the effect determination means 303 largely cooperates with the normal effect determination means 373 and the pre-announcement effect determination means 374, it will be described as an effect determination means 303 encompassing both, except for particularly necessary parts.

Each variation animation pattern has a predetermined variation time as a condition for ending the pattern's variation, and the pattern variation stops when that variation time has elapsed. The animation determination means 303 selects a variation animation pattern of an animation image with the same variation time, according to the variation pattern of the special symbol.

The pattern configuration determination means 301 determines the combination and arrangement of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 61 according to the result of the lottery by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbols of the special symbols, the variation pattern of the special symbols, and the variation performance pattern of the decorative symbols. The pattern configuration determination means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of stop symbols to the performance control means 304. The pattern configuration determination means 301 maintains a pattern range table to be referenced in determining the stop symbols of the decorative symbols.

The stopping symbols of the decorative symbols 61 are formed as a combination of three symbols. For example, if the win/failure determination result by the first win/failure determination means 221 and the second win/failure determination means 222 indicates a transition to a special game of a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, a specific combination, such as "777" or "111," in which three symbols are aligned, is selected. If the win/failure determination result is a 2R jackpot or a minor win, a specific combination, such as "357," is also selected, but these specific combinations do not necessarily have to be combinations in which three symbols are aligned. If the win/failure determination result is neither a jackpot nor a minor win, a combination in which three symbols are not aligned, such as "312" or "946," and which does not correspond to the specific combinations selected in the case of a 2R jackpot or a minor win, is selected. If the result of the win/loss judgment is not a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, and a variation pattern indicating a loss with a near-miss is selected, then a combination with one missing symbol, such as "191" or "727," will be selected.

The decorative symbol variation performance patterns define the manner in which the decorative symbols are displayed, that is, the performance process from the start to the stop of the variation. These variation performance patterns include patterns for displaying normal losing symbols, patterns for displaying losing symbols after a near-win state where one more symbol is needed to win, and patterns for displaying winning symbols after a near-win state. In particular, patterns for the near-win state include patterns with varying variation times. Each variation performance pattern has a defined variation time as a termination condition for its symbol variation, and the symbol variation stops when that time has elapsed. The performance determination means 303 selects a decorative symbol variation performance pattern with a variation time equal to that of the special symbol, according to the special symbol variation pattern.

In the time-saving state, if the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232 is a time-saving pattern, the performance determination means 303 selects a variation performance pattern with a predetermined time-saving performance content. The time-saving performance content is a performance that outputs background images and sounds that give the impression to the player that they are in a favorable state due to the time-saving or probability-changing state.

The pre-announcement animation patterns include patterns that temporarily display images, animations, or videos of specific characters or motifs on the screen, patterns that activate mechanical parts, and patterns that output specific sounds. These pre-announcement animation patterns are executed in parallel with the reel spinning, and they preemptively suggest that the reel spinning is likely to stop in a winning pattern. For example, there are standard pre-announcement animations that simply display a single character image on the screen, and group pre-announcement animations that display a group of characters passing from one end of the screen to the other. Furthermore, there are step-up pre-announcement animations that divide the display process into multiple stages, with the number of stages varying, so that a higher number of stages indicates a higher probability of a win.

There are two types of pre-announcement patterns: one that executes after the decorative symbols 61 have entered a "reach" state, foreshadowing the final stopping position of the symbols (post-reach announcement); and another that executes before any of the decorative symbols 61 have stopped, simultaneously announcing that the game will enter a "reach" state (pre-reach announcement).

The performance determination means 303 determines whether or not to display a pre-announcement performance on the performance display device 60 based on the result of the win/fail lottery or the pre-determination result, using a predetermined pre-announcement lottery, and sets the pre-announcement performance, as well as determining the pre-announcement performance pattern to be displayed. The performance determination means 303 maintains a pre-announcement determination table to be referenced to determine whether or not to display a pre-announcement performance, and a pre-announcement type table to be referenced when selecting the type of pre-announcement performance pattern. The pre-announcement determination table is configured so that different columns are referenced depending on the result of the win/fail lottery or the pre-determination result. The correspondence between the win/fail lottery result and whether or not to display a pre-announcement performance is defined such that the pre-announcement performance is displayed with a higher probability when the win/fail lottery result is a win than when it is a loss. This allows the display of a pre-announcement performance itself to suggest a high expectation of a big win.

The performance control means 304 causes the performance display device 60 to display a performance image including the decorative symbols 61 in a variable manner according to the selected variable performance pattern data. The performance control means 304 uses the receipt of a command to start the variation of the decorative symbols 61 as the condition for starting the variation display of a new decorative symbol. If the performance determination means 303 determines that a pre-announcement performance should be displayed, the performance control means 304 displays a pre-announcement performance according to the selected pre-announcement performance pattern on the performance display device 60, superimposed on the variation of the symbols.

The performance control means 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first win/fail lottery if the win/fail lottery value for the second win/fail lottery is stored, and starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second win/fail lottery regardless of whether the win/fail lottery value for the first win/fail lottery is stored or not. As a result, if lottery values are reserved for both the first and second win/fail lotteries, the reserved lottery value from the second win/fail lottery is preferentially read out, and the variation of the decorative symbols is displayed. In such cases, the reserved lottery value from the first win/fail lottery is not read out, and the variation of those decorative symbols does not start until the number of reserved values for the second win/fail lottery becomes zero. In this way, the performance control means 304 causes the symbol variation performance, including the variation of the decorative symbols 61, to be displayed on the performance display device 60.

The performance control means 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamps 111 and the operation of the movable parts 66. The performance control means 304 includes a performance display control means 305, an audio control means 306, and a lamp control means 309. The performance display control means 305 controls the display on the performance display device 60, and the audio control means 306 controls the audio output from the speaker 108. The lamp control means 309 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamps 111.

During the variation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, the display device 60 must display an image indicating that the symbols are changing. Normally, a standard-sized decorative symbol 61 of a certain size is displayed during variation. However, a special effect, where the main content is something other than the variation of the decorative symbol 61, may be displayed in a manner that obstructs the visibility of the variation of the standard-sized decorative symbol 61. In this case, the player is informed that the symbols are changing by displaying a substitute symbol, which is a smaller decorative symbol than the standard-sized decorative symbol. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative symbol, it means a standard-sized decorative symbol. However, to distinguish it from the substitute symbol, the standard-sized decorative symbol may also be called a "standard decorative symbol" or "main decorative symbol."

Alternative symbols are displayed while the visibility of the regular decorative symbols is impaired, for example, when the regular decorative symbols are not displayed. Alternative symbols are a form of decorative symbol used to visually suggest the outcome of the win/loss judgment. They have a simplified (in other words, simplified, streamlined) display form compared to regular decorative symbols and are displayed through a simplified variation process. Alternative symbols have an external display form corresponding to the part of the regular decorative symbol that indicates the symbol type, for example, a display form representing numbers, letters, or symbols indicating the symbol type. Furthermore, alternative symbols are displayed in a narrower area than the area where the regular decorative symbols are displayed, and are typically displayed in a position that does not easily interfere with the main performance by elements other than the symbols, for example, in the corner of the screen of the performance display device 60. Alternative symbols are displayed relatively smaller than regular decorative symbols, but have a display form that at least allows the symbol type to be visually identified. Note that alternative symbols may be simply scaled-down versions of regular decorative symbols, and may be identical to regular decorative symbols except for size.

Multiple substitute symbols displayed in place of multiple regular decorative symbols suggest a high probability of a favorable outcome for the player in the win/loss lottery, depending on the combination of stopping patterns at the end of the spin. For example, multiple substitute symbols suggest a high probability of a win in that spin when two of the three substitute symbols form a "reach" state. Alternatively, the left and right symbols forming a reach state may be specific symbols that suggest a relatively high probability, such as "3" or "7," or symbols that suggest a relatively low probability, such as "1" or "2," to indicate the level of expectation in that reach state. Note that substitute symbols do not appear to be in a definitive stop state, but rather in a temporary stop state where slight shaking is maintained. After the temporary stop of the substitute symbols, a regular decorative symbol may be displayed in place of the substitute symbols, and that regular decorative symbol may be displayed in a definitive stop state. Furthermore, regular decorative symbols and substitute symbols do not need to be displayed exclusively; there may be an overlap in their display periods. Furthermore, during certain performances where the visibility of the normal decorative symbols is impaired, the display of the normal decorative symbols may be continued while the display of the alternative symbols is shown. Unlike the alternative symbols, during the variation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, a simplified symbol may be displayed in a predetermined area of the performance display device 60, using an image of the same size as or smaller than the alternative symbol, to indicate that the special symbols are changing. The simplified symbol may consist of a variation display of a combination of three symbols, similar to the normal decorative symbols, or it may consist of a variation display of a single symbol, or it may consist of a sequence of simple symbols ("○", "×", etc.). The simplified symbol may not be related to the variation display patterns of the normal decorative symbols or the alternative symbols, and may display a constant variation from the start to the end of the variation of the special symbols, and when it stops, it may display a display related to the stop display pattern of the normal decorative symbols. The simplified symbols only need to indicate that the special symbols are currently changing and to at least notify the result of the special symbols; they can be changed as appropriate, such as by displaying a combination of two symbols. The simplified symbols may also be called "simplified decorative symbols," "sub-decorative symbols," "sub-decoration diagrams," "mini decorative symbols," or "mini-decoration diagrams." Separately from the performance display device 60, a fourth decorative symbol, which displays a similar information to the simplified symbols using the light emission patterns of LEDs, may also be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display of special symbol changes, display of results) in cases such as when the performance display device 60 malfunctions. As an example of the display patterns for the fourth symbol, the LEDs may sequentially light up (including flashing and turning off) in "white," "blue," "green," "yellow," "orange," and "red" to indicate the change, or they may flash in a single color depending on the type of special symbol to indicate the change, and the color of the light emission when stopped may indicate whether it is a miss or a win.

The timing means 307 is a timing circuit that outputs time information used for gameplay. The timing means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time since power-on using a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit with a built-in battery that can continue measuring the date and time even when the pachinko machine 100 is powered off or during a power outage may also be used. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, slight differences in time may occur between game machines due to individual differences or time drift, whereas with a timer circuit, as long as the power is turned on simultaneously, the possibility of time differences occurring between multiple game machines is small.

The performance determination means 303 executes a synchronized performance that begins at a predetermined timing triggered by the time information output by the timing means 307 indicating a predetermined time. The synchronized performance is a performance displayed on the performance display device 60 during a synchronized performance period, which is substantially asynchronous to the pattern variation period and game state. The synchronized performance period lasts for several minutes, longer than the duration of one pattern variation, and can encompass multiple pattern variation periods. The performance pattern for the synchronized performance is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and the performance pattern specifies the playback of a predetermined song and video. Multiple types of synchronized performance patterns are available, and different types of performance patterns may be selected depending on the date, time, month, day of the week, and time of day.

The synchronization effect is executed regardless of whether it is during normal gameplay or special gameplay. Here, "normal gameplay" includes the period when the so-called standby demo screen is displayed. Specifically, "normal gameplay" includes (1) "normal gameplay with changing symbols displayed," (2) "normal gameplay with stopped changing symbols," where neither the symbols are changing nor the standby demo screen is displayed, and (3) "normal gameplay with the standby demo screen displayed," where neither the symbols are changing nor the standby demo screen is displayed. The synchronization effect can be executed during any of periods (1) to (3), but in periods (2) and (3), the output method for controlling volume reduction, brightness reduction, etc., in the synchronization effect may differ from that in period (1). Furthermore, while the standby demo screen is displayed, the player can input information related to the mobile phone linkage system (described later) by operating the effect button 109 or the directional pad 110. When such input is received, the video and audio output of the synchronization effect is suppressed, and screen displays such as effect customization via the mobile phone linkage system take priority.

Synchronized performance is a performance that, for example, plays a predetermined song or video at a predetermined time (referred to as the "synchronized performance start time"). The time that triggers the playback of the synchronized performance may be the time reached after a predetermined time interval from the power-on of the pachinko game machine 100, or it may be every hour or half on the hour based on standard time. Alternatively, a time that may vary depending on the date or day of the week may be set, and the interval may differ, such as one hour later first, then three hours later, or the interval may differ depending on the date or day of the week. It may also be a variable setting that allows the time to be specified by the staff of each game store. However, it is pre-set so that the same synchronized performance is executed at least at the same time among multiple identical machines installed in the same game store. For example, in the case of a specification that is triggered by the time reached after a predetermined time interval from the power-on, the game store powers on multiple machines simultaneously. As a result, when the predetermined time is reached, the same synchronized performance is executed simultaneously on all of those machines. As a result, the effects are displayed simultaneously as if multiple devices were synchronized, and the simultaneous playback of the same music and video creates a synergistic effect that creates a sense of realism, as if a live performance or movie screening were taking place on the spot.

The synchronized performance function is also built into other gaming machines of the same model, and multiple gaming machines on the same gaming island are powered on simultaneously by the arcade staff every day. As a result, all multiple gaming machines powered on simultaneously will reach the synchronized performance start time almost at the same time, allowing them to execute the synchronized performance simultaneously. This is called multi-machine synchronized performance. In this case, not only are the video displays synchronized across multiple machines, but the sound effects and background music are also synchronized across multiple machines, and the more machines that are synchronized, the greater the synergistic effect from executing the performance simultaneously.

The performance setting means 308 stores the player's game history. The game history includes the history of game results and the history of performance results. The history of game results is the game results that lead to the payout the player receives as a result of playing, such as the number of balls hit, the number of prize balls, the number of big wins, the number of probability changes, and the number of time reductions. The history of performance results is different from the benefits of playing the game, and is information such as performance scores that are recorded in order to obtain benefits such as the right to change the content and type of performance or the right to make certain types of performances appear more frequently. For example, in order to score the number of times a predetermined performance appears or the results of a mini-game and award it to the player, encoded information indicating the score and game history, such as a two-dimensional code, is displayed on the screen. When the player reads and decodes the two-dimensional code with the camera of their mobile terminal, the score and game history information obtained through decoded data is stored on the player's mobile terminal. The system for linking the gaming machine and the player's mobile terminal via the two-dimensional code will be described later. The points mentioned here are necessary to expand the range of customization options for the presentation, as described later. The system is designed so that the number of customizable items increases as the score reaches a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, or every 100 points reached).

The performance setting means 308 stores settings for which of several types of performance content to select as a performance customization, based on the player's selection instructions and game history. For example, as performance patterns to be displayed during special gameplay, multiple types of performance patterns with different displayed motifs, characters, and music are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is asked to select which performance to display. Alternatively, as design elements for the decorative symbols that change the symbols, multiple types of motifs or character images are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is asked to select which image to display. In these cases, the performance setting means 308 receives input from the player using the performance button 109 or the directional pad 110 while the standby demo screen is displayed, and when a performance pattern is selected through that input, it stores the selected content. The performance determination means 303 selects the type of performance pattern during special gameplay according to the settings stored by the performance setting means 308.

The sub-initial processing execution means 360 executes the control start processing of the sub-board 300 when the pachinko game machine 100 is powered on or when power is restored after an interruption. The sub-power interruption processing execution means 362 executes abnormal response processing, such as power interruption processing, on the sub-board 300 when a power abnormality such as a power interruption occurs. The sub-error detection means 364 executes abnormality detection processing on the sub-board 300. When the sub-error detection means 364 detects a power interruption, the sub-power interruption processing execution means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to the backup RAM as part of the power interruption processing.

Figure 12 is a schematic diagram illustrating the outline of the mobile-linked system. As a prerequisite for the mobile-linked system, players register as users in advance by setting an account and password on a dedicated site, the game history server 358, using their mobile terminal 354. When the player presses the performance button 109 at the start of the game, the performance display control means 305 displays a two-dimensional code 350 on the screen of the performance display device 60, which encodes the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358. The player then reads this code with the camera on their mobile terminal to access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. From that dedicated site, character information (also called "password information") encoding the player's identification information and performance score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal and displayed on the mobile terminal's screen. The performance display control means 305 displays a password information input screen on the performance display device 60, and the player inputs it via button operations such as the directional keys 110. The input password information is decrypted by the performance setting means 308 and registered as the player's identification information and performance score history, allowing the player's previous gameplay and performance score status to be carried over. Entering this password information signals the start of recording the player's game history and the start of performance customization by selecting various performance elements. Subsequently, in the pachinko machine 100, as the game and performances progress, the performance setting means 308 continuously adds points awarded to the player as performance benefits, accumulating them as a performance score history. The player can also customize the performance at any time, selecting and setting their preferred elements as various performance elements. Performance points are awarded primarily with each symbol change, with higher points awarded for performance types that have a higher probability of transitioning to a special game, and high points are also awarded when transitioning to a special game.

As a feature for customizing the game's presentation, players can use a portion of their accumulated points to change the presentation elements such as color, background, shape, characters, and music that make up the presentation content displayed on the presentation display device 60, according to the number of points used. The presentation setting means 308 receives instructions from the player to change presentation elements via button operation and changes various presentation elements according to those instructions. For each customizable presentation element, multiple types of items are available, and different values are set for the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated points reach a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or players are given an opportunity to increase the number of customizable items. When the player operates a button to signal the end of the game or presentation customization, the presentation setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as presentation benefits and presentation score history, and the presentation display control means 305 displays this on the presentation display device 60. The player can read the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of their mobile terminal, and by decoding the read two-dimensional code 352, they can acquire the information and store it on their mobile terminal 354. Furthermore, this information is transmitted from the mobile terminal 354 to the game history server 358, which has a dedicated website, via the network 356, and is managed in conjunction with the user's account information. In this way, information such as performance bonuses and performance score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via the display and reading of the two-dimensional code 350, and managed by the game history server 358, allowing the user to carry over the game and performance details to the next game. Also, by continuing to play for a longer period, the number of symbol changes and performances increases, allowing the user to earn points.

Figure 13 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and sub-board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as the main CPU 290, main RAM 291, and main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 stores the main control program and data for controlling the overall game operation. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291, and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. Each electronic component is connected by buses such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). Ball entry signals from each ball entry point and payout signals from the payout control board 155 are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as each prize entry point solenoid, the first special symbol display unit 41, and the second special symbol display unit 42 using various drive circuits (not shown). Furthermore, the main CPU 290 transmits commands necessary for performance control to the sub-board 300, along with information such as the results of the win/loss lottery, the result of the symbol selection, and the result of the variation pattern selection. Signals are transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 via one-way communication.

The instruction data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 consists of two bytes: a one-byte instruction type data, known as MODE data, and a one-byte instruction content data, known as EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one instruction by associating the instruction type data and instruction content data and transmitting them to the sub-board 300. The instruction type data is a bit sequence indicating the type of instruction, and a unique type code is assigned to each instruction type during the development phase. The instruction content data is a bit sequence indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of both the instruction type data and the instruction content data is an identification bit indicating whether it is instruction type data or instruction content data; a value of 1 indicates instruction type data, and a value of 0 indicates instruction content data.

The communication between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is designed to transmit one byte of data per transmission. Therefore, to transmit two bytes of command data, two separate transmissions of one byte each are required. The first transmission sends the upper byte, the MODE data, and the second transmission sends the lower byte, the EVENT data. To account for the possibility of communication failure due to noise or other factors, the main board 200 transmits the same data repeatedly. The sub-board 300 confirms the completion of data transmission when it has read the same data twice consecutively. The main board 200 continues to transmit the same data repeatedly until it has been read twice consecutively, up to a maximum of five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, sub-ROM 312, and performance control device 313. The sub-ROM 312 is one of the data storage means that holds a sub-control program, which includes performance pattern data defining the performance process and display pattern data defining the performance display process. The sub-control program, including performance pattern data, display pattern data, and sound pattern data, is read from the sub-ROM 312 into the sub-RAM 311, and the performance control based on this sub-control program is executed by the sub-CPU 310. Each electronic component is connected by buses such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). Signals from external devices such as performance buttons 109 are acquired by the sub-CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). According to the performance pattern data, the sub-CPU 310 drives external devices such as the performance display device 60, speaker 108, decorative lamp 111, and movable mechanism 66 using the performance control device 313 and various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) to control performances through display output, sound output, lamp lighting, and mechanism operation. The sub-CPU 310 transmits display pattern data and audio pattern data to the performance control device 313. While the first prerequisite describes an example where the sub-board 300 contains the performance control device 313, the sub-board 300 and the performance control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a single board; they may be formed as separate boards connected to each other.

Figure 14 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the performance control device 313. The performance control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, control RAM 322, data ROM 324, display control circuit 326, and audio control circuit 314. The data ROM 324 is one of the data storage means that holds material data such as performance image data and motion data used for performance display, and audio data used for audio output, in a data-compressed state. Performance image data are images used for fluctuation display and performance display as performance objects indicating the results of the win/loss lottery, etc., such as sprite images of decorative symbols used for decorative symbol fluctuations, sprite images used for予告 (preview) effects, and video images used for various effects. Motion data is data that defines the actions to be added to images used for various effects at predetermined timings. Audio data is audio data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and character dialogue output during the performance.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub-CPU 310, the specified performance image data and motion data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and the performance display using that performance image data and motion data is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, commands, performance image data, and motion data related to the performance display are sent from the control CPU 320 to the display control circuit 326, and the display control circuit 326 performs display control. Similarly, commands and audio data related to audio output are sent from the control CPU 320 to the audio control circuit 314, and the audio output control circuit 314 performs audio output control.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, a drawing memory 334, a drawing circuit 336, a frame buffer 338, and a display circuit 340, each connected via a bus 330. For convenience, the bus 330 in this diagram comprehensively represents buses such as the system bus, data bus, and address bus.

The performance image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and the compressed data from this data is decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is a VRAM (VideoRAM) used as a work area when the performance image data and motion data are decoded by the decoder 332, and also as a work area when drawing and image processing are performed by the drawing circuit 336.

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to sequentially execute commands sent from the control CPU 320 to generate display images, and stores these generated display images as frames of a moving image in the frame buffer 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores frames of the moving image to be output to the display device 60.

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the display device 60 in the form of video signals, in the order they were stored. The frame buffer 338 has, for example, a memory area for two frames. While the display circuit 340 outputs a display image from one frame's memory area, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image and stores it in the other frame's memory area.

The data ROM 324 stores "detailed display pattern data" that defines the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326. In this case, the display pattern data sent from the sub-CPU 310 can be described as "outline display pattern data" that defines the general outline of the performance display process. For example, the outline display pattern data defines the general flow of a series of performance display processes, such as the start and stop timings of the decorative pattern's variation, the playback order of multiple moving images, and the start and stop timings of playback. On the other hand, the detailed display pattern data defines the finer display control processes, such as the display order of sprite images for realizing the variation of the decorative pattern, and the frame-by-frame display processing order for displaying moving images based on motion data.

When the performance control device 313 performs display control based on the "outline display pattern data" sent from the sub-CPU 310, it reads the "detailed display pattern data" necessary for that processing from the data ROM 324 and executes the display processing using both display pattern data. Therefore, it can be said that the performance control device 313 executes display control processing based on display pattern data that includes "outline display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". Thus, in this specification, unless explicitly mentioned, the "outline display pattern data" stored in the sub-ROM 312 and the "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished and are simply referred to as "display pattern data". For example, when the performance control means performs a specific process based on display pattern data held in the data storage means, this display pattern data includes "outline display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". In the modified example, the display pattern data is not divided into "outline display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data", and display pattern data that serves both purposes may be held in the sub-ROM 312 or the data ROM 324.

In the first prerequisite technology, the hardware configuration of the performance control device 313 is shown to include a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, and a display control circuit 326. In the modified example, the control CPU 320, control RAM 322, data ROM 324, and display control circuit 326 may be integrated rather than being configured as separate electronic components. Also, the processing that is said to be performed by the display control circuit 326 may be performed by the control CPU 320, control RAM 322, or data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the performance control device 313 may perform the processing that is said to be performed by the decoder 332, drawing circuit 336, and display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. Furthermore, the control RAM 322 included in the performance control device 313 may also function as a drawing memory 334 or a frame buffer 338. Furthermore, the hardware configuration may not include a display control circuit 326 in the performance control device 313. In this case, the processing that would normally be performed by the display control circuit 326 may be performed by the control CPU 320, control RAM 322, or data ROM 324.

Furthermore, in the first premise technology, the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300 is shown to include a sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, sub-ROM 312, and a performance control device 313. In the modified example, the sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, ROM 312, and performance control device 313 may be integrated rather than being configured as separate electronic components. Also, the processing that is said to be performed by the performance control device 313 may be performed by the sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, or sub-ROM 312. For example, the sub-CPU 310 may perform the processing of the control CPU 320, the sub-RAM 311 may also perform the function of the control RAM 322, or the sub-ROM 312 may also perform the function of the data ROM 324. In addition, the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300 may not include the performance control device 313, in which case the processing that is said to be performed by the performance control device 313 may be performed by the sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, or sub-ROM 312.

Figure 15 is a flowchart showing the control start process of the main board 200 in a pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the main initial processing execution means 280, but from here on, it will be described as being executed by the main CPU 290, which functions as the main initial processing execution means 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets the stack pointer (S100), allows access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and performs initial hardware settings such as setting the main CPU 290's internal registers (S104).

The main CPU 290 checks the status of the setting key. If the setting key is ON (Y in S105), it checks the status of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y in S122), it executes the setting change process (S124). On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is OFF (N in S122), it executes the setting confirmation process (S126). Note that if the setting key is OFF at S105 (N in S105), processes S122-S126 are skipped.

Next, depending on the operation status of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power outage information flag, and the state of the data stored in the main RAM 291, the system executes either a power outage recovery process or a main RAM 291 initialization process. Specifically, if the RAM clear switch is not ON, and both the value of the power outage information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the power outage recovery process is executed. In all other cases, i.e., if the RAM clear switch is ON, or if either the power outage information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal even if the RAM clear switch is not ON, the main RAM 291 initialization process is executed.

The main CPU 290 checks the operation status of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y in S106), it initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the RAM clear switch is not ON (N in S106), the main CPU 290 checks the value of the power failure information flag (S108). If the value of the power failure information flag does not match the normal power failure data (N in S108), it initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the value of the power failure information flag matches the normal power failure data (Y in S108), it checks the data stored in the main RAM 291 (S110). As described later, if the process completed normally during the previous power failure, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291, so the main CPU 290 checks the data in the main RAM 291 using the checksum. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), it initializes the data in the main RAM 291 (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), the process to restore the state to what it was before the power was cut off is executed (S114).

In the power-off recovery process (S114), power-on success data indicating that the power was turned on successfully is stored in the power-off information flag, and initial settings for various errors and communication with the payout control board 155 are performed. Next, unsent command requests from before the power-off are cleared, and commands indicating the game state are requested. Then, performance commands corresponding to the number of balls held for the operation of the first and second special symbols are requested. Next, the open/closed states of the second start port 12 and the large prize port 20 are restored to their state before the power-off. Finally, processing is performed to notify the operating status of the probability variation function of the special symbols.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), the power-on success data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared with zeros, and the initial settings of the main RAM 291 and the initialization of the display unit are performed. Note that in the initialization process of S116, the setting values stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 are not cleared, and the setting values set in the setting change process of S124 are retained as they were.

Once the power-off recovery process (S114) or RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to start the interrupt process described later, and the interrupt timer starts operating (S118). As a result, a timer interrupt occurs every predetermined time (e.g., 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt process described later is executed. Subsequently, the main CPU 290 executes the main process for managing the gaming machine (S120).

Figure 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process in S124 in Figure 15. The value of the setting memory where the game setting value should be stored is checked, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N in S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). If "1" to "6" is used as the setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and if "0" to "5" is used as the setting value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the setting memory value is normal (Y in S132), the process in S134 is skipped. Next, the system moves to the setting change state (S136), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S138). If a change operation is performed using the setting change button 172 (Y in S140), the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is updated, and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N in S140), the process in S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N in S144), the process from S138 to S142 is repeated. When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original position and turned OFF (Y in S144), the setting display unit 173 is hidden so that the setting value cannot be seen (S146), and the process returns.

Figure 17 is a flowchart detailing the setting confirmation process in S126 of Figure 15. The system checks the value in the setting memory where the game setting value should be stored. If the setting memory value is not normal (N in S152), the setting value is initialized to its initial value (S154). If the setting memory value is normal (Y in S152), the process in S154 is skipped. The system then transitions to the setting confirmation state (S156), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N in S160), the process in S158 is repeated to continue displaying the setting value. If the setting key is turned OFF (Y in S160), the setting display unit 173 is hidden so the setting value cannot be seen (S162), and the system returns.

Figure 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in Figure 15. The main CPU 290 temporarily disables timer interrupts (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors for power failure (S204). When a decrease in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158 is detected in a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown), an unconditional interrupt request signal is input from the power supply voltage monitoring circuit to the main CPU 290, and in the power failure storage processing that is executed, power failure confirmation data is stored in the power failure confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power failure confirmation flag (S204), and if the value of the power failure confirmation flag matches the power failure confirmation data (Y in S206), it proceeds to S212 to execute processing for power failure. If the value of the power-off confirmation flag does not match the power-off confirmation data (N in S206), the initial random number update process is executed to update the initial random number for normal symbol wins, the initial random number for special symbol wins, and the software initial random number for special symbol wins (S208), timer interrupts are enabled (S210), and the process returns to S200. Steps S200 to S210 are then repeated. If a timer interrupt occurs while timer interrupts are disabled (S202 to S208), the interrupt processing described later is executed after timer interrupts are enabled in S210.

If a power outage is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and checks the contents of the power outage information flag (S214). If the contents of the power outage information flag do not match the normal power-on data (N in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on was not saved correctly, and the abnormal power outage data is stored in the power outage information flag (S216), and the process proceeds to S222. If the contents of the power outage information flag match the normal power-on data (Y in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on was saved correctly, and the normal power outage data is stored in the power outage information flag (S218). Next, in order to check the data in the backed-up main RAM 291 at the next power-on, a checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Subsequently, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and the process loops until the power goes out. The above-mentioned power outage processing is performed by the main power outage processing execution means 282, which is implemented by the main CPU 290.

Figure 19 is a flowchart detailing the interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main processing (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt processing. First, it sets the interrupt operation conditions (S300) and restarts the watchdog timer (S302). Next, in order to manage the gaming machine, it performs input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312), second start gate valid period setting processing (S314), prize entry monitoring processing (S316), prize ball control processing (S318), normal symbol operation gate monitoring processing (S320), normal symbol control processing (S322), normal symbol variation start monitoring processing (S324), start gate monitoring control processing (S326), special symbol control processing (S328), and special electric mechanism control processing (S330) The following processes are executed in order: setting the validity period of the main prize slot (S332), monitoring and controlling the start of special symbol variation (S334), detecting abnormalities (S336), detecting abnormalities in ball entry time (S338), displaying the game state (S340), checking the handle state signal (S342), outputting the LED (S344), outputting the launch control signal (S346), outputting the test signal (S348), outputting the solenoid (S350), sending the performance control command (S352), and outputting external information (S354). The next timer interrupt is then permitted (S356), and the program returns.

In the input processing (S304), data from the input ports of switches, open/short circuit power supply abnormality detection signals, door/frame open signals, magnetic detection signals, radio wave detection signals, and touch status signals mounted on the game board are monitored, and data indicating the input status is created and stored in the main RAM 291. This data indicating the input status consists of level data (data from the input port at the time of the current interrupt) and rising or falling edge data (data indicating the switch that was switched by comparing the input port data at the time of the current interrupt with the input port data at the previous interrupt using exclusive OR).

In the various random number update processes (S306), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291. If the value is less than a predetermined maximum value, the value is incremented and stored; if the value is greater than or equal to the predetermined maximum value, 0 is stored. Similarly, the variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291. If the result of subtracting a predetermined value from the value is greater than or equal to 0, the subtracted result is stored; if it is less than 0, the predetermined maximum value is stored. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random numbers for normal symbol wins, special symbol wins, and special symbol wins (soft random numbers) are updated. The value, maximum value, and initial value of each random number are read from the main RAM 291, and the random number value is incremented. If the increment result exceeds the maximum value, the random number value is set to 0. If the increment result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291, and the initial value is updated. As a result, the random numbers for normal symbol wins, special symbol wins, and special symbol wins (soft random numbers) are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs. When the random number value returns to its initial value, i.e., when the random number range completes a cycle, the initial value is reset and a new random number is generated.

In the initial random number update process (S310), the initial random numbers for normal symbol wins, special symbol wins, and special symbol wins (software initial random numbers) are updated. The initial random numbers are read from the initial random number update table in the main RAM 291, and their values are incremented. If the incremented value exceeds the upper limit, the initial random number value is set to 0. A similar process is performed in the initial random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120).

In the timer decrement process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of the various control timers are read from the main RAM 291 according to the table. If the timer value is not 0, the value is sequentially decremented and stored. If the timer value is 0, the timer update is not performed.

In the second start port validity period setting process (S314), the validity period of the second start port 12 is set. The second start port 12 is set with a validity period during which the payout of prize balls and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed when a game ball enters it, and an invalid period during which the payout of prize balls and the lottery for the second special symbol are not executed even if a game ball enters it. As will be described later, in the start port monitoring control process (S326), the monitoring process for entry into the second start port is not executed during the invalid period of the second start port 12, so even if a game ball enters the second start port 12, the payout of prize balls and the lottery for the second special symbol are not executed. The same applies when validity periods and invalid periods are set for the first start port 11, the big prize port 20, the first operation port 31, the second operation port 32, the general prize port 33, etc. If the normal symbol state is "Normal Electric Mechanism Activated," data indicating that the second start port 12 is in its valid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag. If the normal symbol state is not "Normal Electric Mechanism Activated," and the value of the second start port valid extension timer is not 0, data indicating that the second start port 12 is in its valid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag. If the value of the second start port valid extension timer is 0, data indicating that the second start port is in its invalid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag.

In the prize winning monitoring process (S316), the system checks for the game ball passing through the switch. If the game ball passes through the switch, and the switch is not in an invalid period or is currently in an valid period, and a prize ball is paid out, the prize winning counter is updated. Furthermore, a request is made to create a security output request and send a command to the external information output terminal 160.

In the prize ball control process (S318), the following steps are performed in order: monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 155, requesting command transmission to the payout control board 155, transmitting the command to the payout control board 155, and inspecting the received data from the payout control board 155.

In the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the game ball through the first activation opening 31 and the second activation opening 32 is monitored. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through either the first activation opening 31 or the second activation opening 32, if the number of reserved normal symbol variations is less than the upper limit of 4, the number of reserved normal symbols is updated, and the random number related to the normal symbol is stored in the main RAM 291.

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbols is monitored, and if it is determined that normal symbol control is in progress, processing related to the normal symbol display unit 45 or the normal electric mechanism 90 is executed. If the state of the normal symbols is "normal symbol changing," the normal symbol changing process is executed. If it is "normal symbol stopped displaying," the normal symbol stopped displaying process is executed. If it is "normal electric mechanism operating," the normal electric mechanism operating process is executed. If it is "normal electric mechanism operation completion demo in progress," the normal electric mechanism operation completion demo process is executed. In the normal symbol changing process, after the normal symbols have changed, the change time is monitored, and if it is determined that the normal symbol change time has ended, the normal symbol change stop setting is executed, and the state of the normal symbols is set to "normal symbol stopped displaying." In the normal symbol stopped displaying process, the display time of the normal symbol's stopped symbol is monitored, and if it is determined that the display time of the normal symbol's stopped symbol has ended, the normal symbol operation termination setting corresponding to the hit determination result is executed. If it is a win, the state of the normal symbols is set to "Normal Electric Mechanism in Operation", the operation state of the normal electric mechanism opening extension function at the start of normal electric mechanism operation is saved, and the operation setting of the normal electric mechanism solenoid 91 corresponding to the operation state of the normal electric mechanism opening extension function at the start of normal electric mechanism operation is executed. If it is a loss, the state of the normal symbols is set to "Normal Symbol Fluctuation Standby". During the normal electric mechanism operation process, the entry of game balls into the prize slots related to the normal electric mechanism 90 is monitored, and if it is determined that the number of entries into the prize slots related to the normal electric mechanism 90 has reached the maximum number of entries, the operation termination setting of the normal electric mechanism 90 and the setting of the effective extension time of the second start slot are executed. If it is determined that the number of winning entries in the prize slot for the standard electric mechanism 90 has not reached the maximum number of winning entries, the system monitors the opening/closing time of the prize slot entrance for the standard electric mechanism 90 and sets the opening/closing of the prize slot entrance for the standard electric mechanism 90. If it is determined that the opening of the entrance for the standard electric mechanism 90 has finished, the system executes the operation termination setting for the standard electric mechanism 90 and the extension time for the second start slot. If it is determined that the opening/closing time for the prize slot entrance for the standard electric mechanism 90 has not ended, the system does not execute the opening/closing setting for the prize slot entrance for the standard electric mechanism 90. During the standard electric mechanism operation termination demonstration process, the system monitors the operation termination demonstration time for the standard electric mechanism 90. If it is determined that the operation termination demonstration time for the standard electric mechanism 90 has ended, the state of the standard symbols is set to "Standard Symbol Fluctuation Waiting."

In the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324), the state of the normal symbols is monitored. If it is in the "waiting for normal symbol variation" state and the value of the normal symbol activation reserve ball count is not 0, it is determined to start the normal symbol variation. If it is determined to start the normal symbol variation, the normal symbol activation reserve ball count is decremented, and the hit detection, stop symbol determination, normal symbol variation pattern number setting, and normal symbol variation time setting are performed. Afterward, the state of the normal symbols is set to "normal symbol variation in progress," and the area of the main RAM 291 used for normal symbol state setting, hit detection, and variation pattern determination is cleared.

In the start-up gate monitoring and control process (S326), the machine monitors for game balls entering the first start-up gate 11 and the second start-up gate 12. When a game ball is confirmed to have entered the gate when the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is less than 4, a built-in random number is acquired, and the value obtained by adding the value of the special symbol winning software random number to the acquired built-in random number is stored in the buffer as the special symbol winning random number used for determining a jackpot. In addition, a symbol random number and a variable pattern random number are acquired and stored as random numbers related to the special symbols. If the reserved balls for the second special symbol are consumed with priority over the reserved balls for the first special symbol, only the update of the reserved balls related to that entry is performed. However, if the order in which the reserved balls for the special symbols are consumed is the order in which they enter, in addition to updating the reserved balls related to that entry, the total number of reserved balls is updated and the order in which they enter is stored. Subsequently, in order to request a notification effect command corresponding to the random number stored when a ball enters the start-up gate, the machine checks the state of the game machine, and if it is determined that it is time to send a command, the jackpot notification effect request, the jackpot symbol notification effect request, and the pattern notification effect request are executed in order. Here, the system determines that it is a command transmission period if any of the following conditions are met: (1) when waiting for a win and the probability variation function for the regular symbols is not activated, a random number related to the first special symbol is stored; (2) when waiting for a win and the probability variation function for the regular symbols is not activated, a random number related to the second special symbol is stored; or (3) when a random number related to the second special symbol is stored during a big win or a small win. Subsequently, a performance command corresponding to the number of balls held for the special symbol's operation is requested. This notifies the sub-board 300 that the number of balls held for the special symbol's operation has been updated. As described above, in the pre-read function, four pieces of information—pre-determination information (pre-win/loss determination information, pre-symbol determination information, pre-pattern determination information), and the number of balls held—are sent to the sub-board 300 as a set. In the above example, the main CPU 290 controlled the transmission of commands for pre-determination processing, but in another example, transmission may be performed uniformly when there is a ball entering the start slot, and the sub-CPU 310 may perform various situational judgments, such as whether or not it is a pre-read period. Next, the value of the second start gate validity period flag is checked. If the value of the second start gate validity period flag indicates that the second start gate 12 is in its valid period, the monitoring process for the second start gate entry is executed, similar to the case of a ball entering the first start gate. If the value of the second start gate validity period flag indicates that the second start gate 12 is in its invalid period, the monitoring process for the second start gate entry is not executed. Furthermore, if a game ball entry is confirmed when the number of held balls was 0, the number of held balls is temporarily changed from 0 to 1, and then the control process related to the start of the variation, described later, is executed.

In the special symbol control process (S328), the system checks for the waiting state for a win. If the special electric mechanism is in operation, i.e., during a big win or a small win, the special symbol control process is terminated. If the special electric mechanism is not in operation, the state of the special symbols is checked. If it is "waiting for special symbol variation," the general special symbol control process is terminated. If it is "variation started," the special symbol variation start process is executed. If it is "special symbol variation in progress," the special symbol variation in progress process is executed. If it is "special symbol stopped symbol display in progress," the special symbol stopped symbol display in progress process is executed. In the special symbol variation start process, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is obtained based on the variation pattern random number. The variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined. Commands for variation additional symbol information, variation pattern, and character information are requested on the sub-board 300 to start displaying the effects. The state of the special symbols is set to "special symbol variation in progress," and the variation pattern determination area used to determine the special symbol variation pattern is cleared to 0. During the special symbol variation process, after the special symbol variation has occurred, the variation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the variation time for the special symbol has ended, the special symbol variation stop setting is performed, and the status of the special symbol is set to "Special symbol stopped, displaying symbol". During the special symbol stopped, displaying symbol time is monitored, and if it is determined that the display time for the special symbol stopped, the special symbol operation termination setting corresponding to the hit determination result is executed. In the event of a jackpot, the special symbols are turned off to terminate their operation. The special symbols are set to "waiting for special symbol variation," the number of times the special electric mechanism will operate consecutively is set, the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function, the normal symbol probability variation function, the normal symbol variation time reduction function, and the normal electric mechanism opening extension function are deactivated, the game machine is set to "preparing to open the jackpot," the jackpot start demo display time is set, a jackpot start demo command request is made, and a launch position specification command request (a command request to execute a performance that suggests a recommended launch position, such as "shoot to the right") is made. If the hit detection result is a minor win, the system checks the termination of the special symbol variation time reduction function and the normal symbol probability variation function, updates the variation pattern selection state, requests a command for the game state, and terminates the operation of the special symbol by setting the special symbol state to "Special symbol variation standby," setting the game machine state to minor win start demo, setting the win start demo display time, requesting a command for the win start demo effect, and requesting a command for the launch position specification effect. If the hit detection result is a miss, the system checks the termination of the special symbol variation time reduction function and the normal symbol probability variation function, updates the variation pattern selection state, requests a command for the game state, and terminates the operation of the special symbol by setting the special symbol state to "Special symbol variation standby," and requests a command for the launch position specification effect.

In the special electric mechanism control processing (S330), the operating status of the condition device and the special electric mechanism is inspected in order to execute processing related to the special electric mechanism. If it is determined that the condition device is operating or the special electric mechanism is operating, processing related to the special electric mechanism is executed. Depending on the operating status of the special electric mechanism, the following processes are executed: preparation for opening the large prize slot, special electric mechanism operation, closing the large prize slot, big win end demo, small win start demo, small win special electric mechanism operation, small win large prize slot closing, and small win end demo.

In the process of setting the validity period of the grand prize slot (S332), in order to save the result of the validity period determination of the grand prize slot 20, if the value of the grand prize slot validity time is 0, the grand prize slot invalidation period data is stored in the grand prize slot validity period flag; if it is not 0, the grand prize slot validity period data is stored in the grand prize slot validity period flag.

In the special symbol variation start monitoring and control process (S334), the operating status of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is ready to begin variation. If the order of consumption of the special symbol's reserved balls is priority consumption of the second special symbol, the special symbol is determined to be ready to begin variation when all of the following conditions are met: (1) it is not during a big win or a minor win; (2) the first special symbol is in variation standby mode; (3) the second special symbol is in variation standby mode; and (4) the number of reserved balls for that special symbol is not zero. If the order of consumption of the special symbol's reserved balls is based on the order of winning, in addition to (1) to (3) above, the special symbol is determined to be ready to begin variation when all of the following conditions are met: (5) the total number of reserved balls for the special symbols is not zero; and (6) this determination matches the consumption order, i.e., the order of winning.

If it is determined that a special symbol is ready to begin spinning, the number of reserved balls for that special symbol is deducted, and a performance command corresponding to the number of reserved balls for the first and second special symbols is requested. This notifies the sub-board 300 that the number of reserved balls for the special symbols has been updated.

Next, the special symbol win determination is performed. In the win determination, a special symbol win random number is used to determine whether it is a big win, a small win, or a miss, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, the symbol is determined. In determining the symbol, if the win determination was a big win, the big win symbol is determined based on the special symbol win random number; if it was a small win, the small win symbol is determined; and if it was a miss, the losing symbol is determined.

If the hit detection result is a jackpot, the system determines the operation of the special symbol's probability variation function based on the group determination number value indicating the type of winning symbol determined in the symbol determination process. It then sets the game state after the jackpot, including the operation of the special symbol's variation time reduction function and the setting of the normal symbol's easy entry state. Next, it executes settings for during the jackpot, such as the number of times the special electric mechanism operates consecutively and the opening time of the large prize slot. Then, based on the hit detection result and the operation state of the normal symbol's probability variation function, it selects a variation pattern table to be referenced after the jackpot, thereby setting the variation pattern selection state. Next, it refers to the table selected based on the game state and the group determination number value indicating the type of winning symbol to set the start demo time and end demo time. Finally, it clears the area of the main RAM 291 used for hit detection and symbol determination, and sets the special symbol state to "Variation Start".

If the result of the win determination is a minor win, the system selects the variation pattern table to be referenced after the minor win ends, sets the content of the variation pattern selection state, sets the start and end demo times, clears the area of the main RAM 291 used for win determination and symbol determination, and sets the state of the special symbol to "Variation Start". If the result of the win determination is a miss, the system clears the area of the main RAM 291 used for win determination and symbol determination, and sets the state of the special symbol to "Variation Start".

In the anomaly detection process (S336), the main CPU 290, functioning as the main error detection means 284, inspects the magnetic detection signal, the open/closed/short-circuit power supply anomaly detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the door/frame opening signal. If there is a change in the error state, it stores the error state and requests the sub-board 300 to display the game machine's error state animation. At this time, the illumination pattern of light-emitting means such as LEDs mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the storage of the error state and the request to display the error state animation are not performed.

In the ball entry time anomaly detection process (S338), the main CPU 290, functioning as the main error detection means 284, monitors the continuous ON time of each switch level to detect an anomaly in the ball entry time. If it determines that the continuous ON time (for example, the value of a counter incremented with each interrupt when a switch is ON) is abnormal, it sequentially executes the following: setting the ball entry time anomaly, requesting the transmission of a command, and creating a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160. At this time, the light emission mode of light-emitting means such as LEDs mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the ball entry time anomaly. If it is determined that the continuous ON time is not abnormal, the creation of the security output request is not executed.

In the game status display processing (S340), the system requests the display of the number of times the special electric mechanism operates consecutively, the error status, the number of reserved balls for the regular symbols, and the number of reserved balls for the special symbols. Therefore, display data for each of these is created.

In the steering wheel status signal inspection process (S342), the steering wheel status is inspected to monitor the steering wheel's touch state. If the inspection determines that there is a change in the steering wheel status, the steering wheel status monitoring timer is decremented, the steering wheel status is updated, the steering wheel status monitoring timer is set, and a command transmission request for steering wheel status effects is executed. If the inspection determines that there is no change in the steering wheel status, the steering wheel status monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the steering wheel status monitoring timer value is not 0, it is determined that the timer is being decremented, and subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output processing (S344), the following steps are performed in order to display the special symbols, the regular symbols, the number of balls held for special symbol activation, the number of balls held for regular symbol activation, the game status, the number of times the special electric mechanism operates consecutively, the operating status of the special electric mechanism when the mechanism continuous activation device is not operating, the ball distribution, the error display, and the payout ratio: display initialization, acquisition of display data, and output.

In the launch control signal output processing (S346), in order to output a signal to prohibit/permit the launch of the game ball, the system sets the launch prohibit/permit status corresponding to the communication status with the payout control board 155 and the power supply abnormality, and after acquiring the launch prohibit/permit data, it outputs the launch prohibit/permit signal.

In the test signal output processing (S348), a signal to be output to the test device is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output processing (S350), in order to output the output data for the standard electric mechanism solenoid 91 and the large prize slot solenoid 92, the system acquires the output data for the standard electric mechanism solenoid 91, acquires the output data for the large prize slot solenoid 92, and outputs the output data. The operation flags and operation timers for each solenoid are acquired, and output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flags and solenoid operation timers is obtained. Subsequently, the solenoid operation timers are updated, and the output data is output to the solenoid output ports.

In the performance control command transmission process (S352), the system checks whether there is a request to send a command to the sub-board 300. If a request is found, the system acquires the requested command data, clears the used command buffer with zeros, and then sequentially executes the following: acquiring MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, outputting the MODE data, retaining the MODE data, acquiring EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and outputting the EVENT data.

In the external information output processing (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

The random numbers used in the operation of the main board 200 described above will be explained in more detail. The random numbers used in the main board 200 mainly include: random numbers related to normal symbols, such as normal symbol win random numbers and normal symbol variation pattern random numbers; and random numbers related to special symbols, such as special symbol win random numbers (hardware random numbers), special symbol win software random numbers, special symbol win symbol random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers. Furthermore, there are initial value update type random numbers, such as normal symbol win initial value random numbers, special symbol win symbol initial value random numbers, and special symbol win software initial value random numbers, which are used to provide the initial values for the normal symbol win random numbers, special symbol win symbol random numbers, and special symbol win software random numbers.

The random number for normal symbol wins is updated in the interrupt processing's initial value update type random number update process (S308) and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. In the interrupt processing's normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), when it is determined that a game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32, and the number of normal symbol variation reserves is less than the upper limit of 4, the normal symbol win random number is retrieved from the predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. In the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324), when it is determined that the normal symbol variation should begin, the normal symbol random number is used for determining the win and the stopping symbol.

The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes a value between 0 and 232, for example, and is updated in the various random number update processes of the interrupt processing (S306) and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process of the interrupt processing (S320), when it is determined that a game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32, and the number of reserved normal symbol variations is less than the upper limit of 4, the normal symbol variation pattern random number is retrieved from the predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. In the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324), when it is determined that the normal symbol variation should start, the normal symbol variation pattern random number is used to determine the normal symbol variation pattern.

The special symbol winning random number is generated in the interrupt processing's start gate monitoring control process (S326) when a game ball is confirmed to have entered the game while the number of balls held for the first or second special symbol is less than four. The value of the built-in random number and the special symbol winning software random number are obtained and added together, and the generated number is stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. The special symbol winning random number is used in the interrupt processing's special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) to perform jackpot and minor win determinations.

The special symbol winning software random number is updated in the interrupt processing initial value update type random number update process (S308) and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. In the start gate monitoring control process (S326), when the number of reserved balls for the first or second special symbol is less than 4 and a game ball entry is confirmed, the special symbol winning software random number is retrieved from the predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and used to generate the special symbol winning random number as described above.

The special symbol winning symbol random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example in Figure 7), is updated in the interrupt processing's initial value update type random number update process (S308), and is stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. The special symbol winning symbol random number is retrieved from the predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 when the entry of a game ball is confirmed in the start gate monitoring control process (S326) when the number of balls held for the operation of the first or second special symbol is less than 4. The special symbol winning symbol random number is used in the interrupt processing's special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) to determine the jackpot symbol when the win determination is a jackpot.

The variable pattern random number takes values from, for example, 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example in Figure 8), is updated in the various random number update processes of the interrupt processing (S306), and is stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. The variable pattern random number is retrieved from the predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 when the entry of a game ball is confirmed in the start gate monitoring control process (S326) when the number of balls held for activation of the first or second special symbol is less than 4. The variable pattern random number is used in the special symbol control process of the interrupt processing (S328) to determine the special symbol variation pattern.

The initial random numbers for normal symbol wins, special symbol wins, and special symbol wins are each within the same range as the normal symbol win random numbers, special symbol wins, and special symbol wins. They are updated in the initial random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the interrupt process's initial random number update process (S310), and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. The initial random numbers for normal symbol wins, special symbol wins, and special symbol wins are used as initial values for each random number when updating the normal symbol win random numbers, special symbol wins, and special symbol wins in the initial value update type random number update process (S308).

Since interrupt processing is executed at regular intervals by timer interrupts, the various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update processes (S308) included in the interrupt processing are also executed at regular intervals. That is, the random numbers for normal symbol wins, normal symbol variation pattern random numbers, special symbol wins, special symbol win software random numbers, special symbol win symbol random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers are updated at regular intervals. In contrast, the main process (S120) is repeated for the period from when the interrupt processing ends until the next timer interrupt occurs, that is, for a period of time equal to the time measured by the timer minus the time required for the interrupt processing. Since the time required for interrupt processing varies depending on the game state, the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) is not executed at regular intervals, unlike the various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update process (S308). This allows the initial random number obtained when setting the initial value in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) to be random each time.

Figure 20 is a flowchart showing the control start process for the sub-board 300 in a pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the sub-initial processing execution means 360, but from here on, it will be described as being executed by the sub-CPU 310, which functions as the sub-initial processing execution means 360. When control of the sub-board 300 is started, the sub-CPU 310 sets the stack pointer (S500), disables all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and performs hardware initial settings such as register settings and port initialization of the sub-CPU 310 (S504). The control program is read from the sub-ROM 312 and placed in the sub-RAM 311, and the sub-RAM 311 is initialized by setting initial values for variables in the control program that have initial values, and setting zero-clear data for variables that do not have initial values (S506). The interrupt processing in the sub-board 300 includes power-up processing and reset processing when various abnormalities occur when the watchdog function is enabled, which are executed as the highest priority interrupt processing. Next, as a priority level 7 interrupt process with the highest execution priority, there is command processing received from the main board 200. Following that, as a priority level 3 interrupt process, there is reset processing when a CPU malfunction is detected by the watchdog timer. Next in priority level 2 interrupt processes are those related to commands sent and received between the control CPU 320 and the control CPU 320. Finally, as the lowest priority level 1 interrupt processes, there are processes such as communication with the real-time clock and control of various devices such as lamps, solenoids, and motors. If interrupts related to these various processes occur simultaneously, they are executed in order of priority, starting with the highest priority set for each interrupt type. Note that the processes shown in this diagram include the highest priority interrupts: power-up processing and reset processing in the event of various abnormalities, and the priority level 3 interrupt: CPU malfunction detection reset processing.

Interrupts other than commands received from the main board 200 (priority level 7) are disabled (S510), and various error information used by this model is set from all error information for all models that has been stored in advance (S512). All lamps, such as the decorative lamps 111, are turned off (S514), the watchdog timer starts operating (S516), and the main process is executed (S518). Normally, the main process in S518 does not return to this flow, but if it does, it transitions to sleep (low power consumption mode) (S520).

Figure 21 is a flowchart detailing the main processing of S518 in Figure 20. In S506 of Figure 20, the starting address for checking whether the control program placed in the sub-RAM 311 is correctly positioned is obtained (S530). Subsequent processing enables all interrupts (S532), and initialization operations for devices such as motors and solenoids are performed (S534).

If the watchdog timer is set to be used, the watchdog timer is cleared (S536), the counter for decorative symbols is updated so that the losing combinations of decorative symbols are random (S540), and the input port of the sub-CPU 310 is monitored (S542). Note that S540 is the process for the method of determining the losing decorative symbols using a counter, so if the method of determining the losing decorative symbols uses a lottery sheet that incorporates all symbol combinations that result in losing symbols, the process of S540 is not executed. The process of determining the losing decorative symbols using that lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating the stop symbol for the special symbols is received from the main board 200, as will be described later in S552. The sub-CPU 310, which functions as a sub-error detection means 364, monitors the error state and, when various errors are detected, notifies the error (S544), executes processing according to the input state of the performance button 109 (S546), and executes the prediction lottery (S548). Furthermore, in the notification lottery in S548, in order to send the command for the notification effect that will appear immediately after the start of symbol variation to the effect control device 313 as early as possible, the lottery process is divided into multiple loops rather than being processed in a single loop, and the notification effect that will appear immediately after the start of symbol variation is selected in the earlier loops. If there is an operation request for devices such as the real-time clock, lamps, motors, solenoids, etc., the operation is executed (S550), the command stored in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if it is immediately after the command analysis, the process returns to S536 (Y in S554), and if it is not immediately after the command analysis (N in S554), the software random number for the lottery is updated as a low-priority process that can be performed in idle time (S556), and the process returns to S536. Furthermore, in S552, if the command to be analyzed indicates a variation pattern for special symbols, the variation pattern for decorative symbols is determined in this S552 process. If the command to be analyzed indicates a stopping symbol for special symbols, and the system uses a lottery sheet to determine the losing symbols for decorative symbols, then the stopping symbol for decorative symbols is determined in this S552 process.

Figure 22 is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is a priority level 7 interrupt instruction, which has a priority level second only to reset interrupts and error interrupts. The data received from the main board 200 is read to the input port. When the same data is read twice in a row, that data is confirmed as a new command (S600, Y). If the confirmed command is the first command (MODE data) (S602, Y), that first command is saved to the temporary memory area (S604). A hardware random number is obtained for subsequent processing (S606), and the process returns to the original routine. By obtaining a hardware random number each time a main command interrupt is received from the main board 200 in this way, periodicity in the timing of random number acquisition is avoided, and the randomness of the value is increased. If the data read in S600 does not match twice in a row (up to 5 reads are possible), S602 is skipped and the process returns to the original routine (S600, N).

In S602, if the confirmed command is the second command and not the first command (N in S602), and it is confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), the command write pointer, which is the read position in the command buffer (ring buffer for command data), is obtained (S610), and both the first and second commands are saved in the command buffer (S612). The command data saved in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 in Figure 21. The command write pointer is updated (S614), the first command that was stored in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the original routine is returned. If the first command has not been received in S608, steps S610 onwards are skipped (N in S608), and the original routine is returned.

Figure 23 is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for performance display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for sending a command related to performance display from the sub-CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and occurs at a period of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data to send in the buffer (Y in S622), the command data is read (S624) and sent to the control CPU 320 (S626). The command data to the control CPU 320 is attempted up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub-CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320 indicating successful reception. After transmission, the buffer read address setting is updated (S628), and the original routine returns. If there is no data to send in the buffer (N in S622), steps S624 onwards are skipped, and the original routine returns.

Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the interrupt handling when the sub-CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command that the sub-CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command sent from the sub-CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been successfully received. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), saved to the command buffer (S634), and the original routine is returned.

Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing when a timer interrupt occurs for the control of various devices. This timer interrupt is for the control of lamps such as decorative lamps 111, the control of solenoids and motors that drive movable parts 66, and the management control of various timers, and occurs with a period of 1 ms. Since it is an interrupt with the lowest priority, priority level 1, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S640), and the input and output of ports that input and output signals indicating input from the performance button 109, signals indicating error detection, signals indicating power outage, and drive signals to controlled devices such as motors and solenoids are processed (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating power outage is input, the system immediately proceeds to backup processing. The system updates data related to device control, such as counting based on the control patterns of devices like motors and solenoids, and controlling the on/off state of buffers for writing data to ports (S642) (S644). It also updates timers for timing the effects (S646), updates timers for managing the input validity period of the effect button 109 (S648), and updates task control counters for controlling the switching of the decorative lamps 111 and monitoring runaway behavior of the control CPU 320 to create a 16ms cycle (S650).

Furthermore, the minimum unit for controlling the switching of the decorative lamps 111 is 16 ms. Since one frame of the image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, setting the minimum unit for controlling the switching of the decorative lamps 111 to an integer multiple of these values makes it easier to synchronize the lamp control and the image display control. Also, when counting a relatively long period, such as a 30-second error notification, using a 1-interrupt (1 ms) cycle would result in an unnecessarily long count value. However, by using a 16 ms cycle, the count value can be shortened.

The task control system has 16 tasks, numbered 0 through 15. One of these tasks controls the switching of the decorative lamp 111, and two tasks control the runaway monitoring of the control CPU 320. The switching of the decorative lamp 111 is executed once every 16 interrupts, according to the count value of the task control counter, achieving a 16ms cycle. The runaway monitoring of the control CPU 320 is assigned, for example, to processes 0 and 8. When the count values of the task control counter are 0 and 8, i.e., once every 8 interrupts, the system monitors the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 (S652), achieving an 8ms cycle.

The control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that inverts between on and off every frame. If this toggle signal remains unchanged for 1600ms, the control CPU 320 is deemed to be malfunctioning. The sub-CPU 310 then sends a reset signal to the control CPU 320, and upon receiving the reset signal, the control CPU 320 performs a reset. Since the control CPU 320 receives the toggle signal at a cycle of one frame (16ms or 32ms), monitoring is performed at a shorter cycle of 8ms. Finally, a timer managing relatively long error notification periods, such as the 30-second error notification mentioned above, is decremented (S654), and the error notification ends when the timer times out.

Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying the special symbol variation. If the second win/fail lottery value is held in reserve (Y in S700), the second win/fail determination means 222 reads the second win/fail lottery value and determines whether the second special symbol 52 is a win or a miss (S702). The second win/fail determination means 222 then determines the stopping symbol for the second special symbol 52 (S704). The second variation pattern determination means 232 determines the variation pattern for the second special symbol 52 (S706). Finally, the determination result is sent to the sub-board 300 along with a variation start command to begin the variation of the second special symbol 52 (S716).

If the second win/failure lottery value is not reserved (N in S700), and the first win/failure lottery value is reserved (Y in S708), the first win/failure determination means 221 reads the first win/failure lottery value and re-determines the win/failure of the first special symbol 51 (S710). The first win/failure determination means 221 then determines the stopping symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712). The first variation pattern determination means 231 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 (S714). The determination result is then sent to the sub-board 300 along with a variation start command to begin the variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first win/failure lottery value is not reserved, the processes from S710 to S722 are skipped (N in S708).

The system processes the display of the special symbol's variation (S718), repeats S718 until a predetermined variation time has elapsed and the timing for stopping the symbol display has been reached (S720-N), and when the predetermined variation time has elapsed and the timing for stopping the symbol display has been reached (S720-Y), a variation stop command is sent to the sub-board 300 to stop the displayed symbol variation at a predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the display of the special symbol's variation ends.

Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying the variation of decorative symbols. The performance determination means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command from the main board 200 indicating the start of variation and the content of the performance display (S750), and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative symbols according to the received special symbol stop symbol, variation pattern, and win/fail judgment result (S752), and determines the variation performance pattern corresponding to the variation pattern (S754). Here, if the premonition setting is turned on by prior determination (Y in S756), and if the already determined variation performance pattern is not a pattern that includes specific performance content that should be avoided in superimposed display with the予告 performance (N in S758), and if it is not the symbol variation that triggered the premonition setting to be turned on (N in S760), then the setting to display a predetermined予告 performance is executed (S764), and if it is the symbol variation that triggered the premonition setting to be turned on (Y in S760), then the premonition setting is turned off (S762). If the premonition setting is not enabled (N in S756), or if the variation animation pattern includes a specific animation (Y in S758), the processing from S760 to S764 is skipped.

Subsequently, the display of the decorative pattern's variation effect is started (S766), the display processing of the decorative pattern's variation effect is performed (S768), and the display processing of the予告演出 (pre-announcement effect) is performed (S770). S768 and S770 are repeated until a variation stop command is received from the main board 200 (N in S772). Upon receiving the variation stop command (Y in S772), the pattern variation display is stopped by stopping the decorative pattern in the manner determined in S752 (S774), and the decorative pattern's variation effect ends (S776).

Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the process of the special game. First, the performance display control means 305 starts the performance processing for the special game (S800), and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the large prize slot 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not elapsed (N in S804) and the number of balls entering the large prize slot 20 has not reached 9 or more, the process returns to S804 (N in S806). If the predetermined opening time has elapsed (Y in S804), or if the opening time has not elapsed (N in S804) but the number of balls entering the large prize slot 20 has reached 9 or more (Y in S806), the opening/closing control means 275 closes the large prize slot 20 (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), 1 is added to the round count and the process returns to S802 (S812). If the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the performance display control means 305 terminates the performance processing for the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 terminates the special game (S816), and the execution of the specific game, namely the probability variation, time reduction, or easy ball entry state, begins (S818).

Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the process of a minor prize game. In a minor prize game, a single-play unit game is initiated (S819), the large prize slot 20 is opened (S820), and the opening is maintained until a predetermined time has elapsed (N in S822). If the opening time has elapsed (Y in S822), the large prize slot 20 is closed (S824). If the set number of openings and closings has not been completed (N in S826), 1 is added to the number of openings and closings, and the process returns to S820 (S828). If the set number of openings and closings has been completed (Y in S826), the minor prize game ends.

In the first premise technology, the payout for a jackpot in the second game is generally greater than the payout for a jackpot in the first game; that is, the expected value of prize balls won per jackpot is greater in the second game than in the first game. However, in another example, the first game may be designed to have a higher expected value of prize balls won than the second game, or the expected values of prize balls won in the first and second games may be designed to be roughly equal. In the latter case, the average number of unit games included in the special game performed in the first game and the special game performed in the second game may be designed to be equal. For example, in the first game, a special game in which unit games are performed 7 times with 100% probability may be performed, and in the second game, a special game in which unit games are performed 4 times with 50% probability may be performed, and a special game in which unit games are performed 10 times with 50% probability may be performed. Furthermore, in either case, a specific area may be provided in the large prize winning slot, and if a game ball that enters the large prize winning slot enters or passes through the specific area, a special game such as a probability variation state may be implemented during the normal game after the special game ends. In this case, the special game implemented when a jackpot is won in the second game may be configured such that it is easier for the ball to enter the specific area, and the probability of the normal game being implemented in a probability variation state after the special game ends is higher than the special game implemented when a jackpot is won in the first game. For example, a first win may be implemented where a special game in which it is relatively difficult for the ball to enter the specific area is implemented, and a second win may be implemented where a special game in which it is relatively easy for the ball to enter the specific area is implemented, and the probability of the second win is higher in the second game than in the first game. Alternatively, the probability of the second win in the first game may be less than 100%, but the probability of the second win in the second game may be 100%.

(Second prerequisite technology)
The second prerequisite technology proposes suitable control and presentation for a pachinko game machine equipped with a screen transformation effect as a special effect. Hereafter, elements that are the same as or corresponding to the elements constituting the pachinko game machine 100 of the first prerequisite technology will be denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, content already explained in the first prerequisite technology will be omitted as appropriate, and the content that differs from the pachinko game machine 100 of the first prerequisite technology will be explained mainly.

<Special performance>
The second prerequisite technology explains screen transformation effects as a special effect. Screen transformation effects, as referred to here, are effects that apply transformations such as enlargement, reduction, movement, distortion, oscillation, color inversion, and color conversion to the frame images contained in the displayed video, along with the frame images placed around them. There are two types of frame image transformations: one in which the transformation is applied sequentially to a single frame image contained in the original video (also called "frame-in-frame still effect"), and another in which the transformation is applied sequentially to each of the multiple frame images contained in the original video (also called "frame-in-frame moving effect"). Frame-in-frame still effect is an effect that freezes the original video that was being displayed and applies a transformation to the frame image at the time it was frozen, so that a so-called screen capture image is fitted into the frame image as a still image and transformed. Frame-in-frame moving effect is an effect that applies a transformation to each frame image of the video that was being displayed, so that the original video is fitted into the frame image as a moving image and transformed. The original video frame images are temporarily stored in a frame buffer, and new frame images are sequentially generated and stored in the frame buffer by applying transformations such as scaling, moving, distorting, shaking, color inversion, and color conversion to those frame images, thereby displaying new moving images as a screen transformation effect. In this way, by dynamically generating the transformed image for each scene of a moving image, it is not necessary to prepare transformed frame images in advance for numerous scenes in multiple moving images, and it is possible to diversify the effects while suppressing an increase in data volume and processing load.

First, let's explain the screen before the screen transformation effect is executed.
Figure 30 shows an example of the screen of the performance display device 60. Figure 30(a) shows the state when the variation is stopped. In the performance screen 500 of the performance display device 60, the normal decorative pattern 502 is displayed as a decorative pattern 61, which varies vertically, using most of the area approximately in the center, and the simplified decorative pattern 504 is displayed as a decorative pattern 61, which varies vertically, in the upper right corner. Thus, the decorative pattern 61 of the second prerequisite technology is composed of the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simplified decorative pattern 504. The normal decorative pattern 502 is composed of the first normal decorative pattern 502a, which is the left pattern, the second normal decorative pattern 502b, which is the middle pattern, and the third normal decorative pattern 502c, which is the right pattern.

As pending images, a normal pending image 506 and a simplified pending image 507 are displayed. At the bottom of the performance screen 500, a normal pending image 506 is displayed indicating the number of pending lottery values, with a maximum of four. In the diagram, the first normal pending image 506a, the second normal pending image 506b, the third normal pending image 506c, and the fourth normal pending image 506d are displayed horizontally from left to right in the order of ball entry (i.e., the order in which the variation starts). The first normal pending image 506a, the second normal pending image 506b, the third normal pending image 506c, and the fourth normal pending image 506d are normally displayed as images resembling balls that light up in a predetermined color (for example, blue). Each pending image displays an image resembling a ball that lights up in a color corresponding to the level of the expected jackpot if it is determined that the probability of winning is high based on the so-called pre-reading at the time of ball entry, that is, the pre-determination information of the lottery value corresponding to each pending. In the example shown in Figure 30(a), only the third normal hold image 506c is displayed as an image resembling a ball, lit in a color different from blue (for example, red). This effect of lit in a color different from blue due to pre-reading is the pre-reading notification effect in the second premise technology. For example, the effect determination means 303 determines the color of the normal hold image 506 so that the probability of a big win is lowest with the normal color "blue," and increases in the order of "green," "red," and "rainbow." The number and color (or pattern) of these hold images indicate the number of hold images and the probability of a big win to the player. The symbol variation corresponding to the third normal hold image 506c, which is scheduled to start third, is the symbol variation that became the target of the pre-reading (the trigger for the execution of the pre-reading notification effect), and is hereinafter also referred to as the "target variation."

In the lower right corner of the presentation screen 500, a simplified hold image 507 is displayed. This simplified hold image is a smaller and more simplified version of the normal hold image 506. The simplified hold image 507 shows the number of normal hold images 506 displayed; in Figure 30(a), the number "4" is displayed.

Figure 30(b) shows the state during symbol variation display. Figure 30(b) shows the state during variation display after the start of symbol variation, following the state in Figure 30(a). The four normal reserve images 506 from the first normal reserve image 506a to the fourth normal reserve image 506d in Figure 30(a) are moved to the left by one reserve image width from their respective positions. The first normal reserve image 506a in Figure 30(a) is moved to the left and displayed as the variation image 508. The variation image 508 is an image that shows the lottery value for which the symbols are currently changing. It has a larger diameter than the normal reserve image 506, and a background pattern is displayed around it, distinguishing it from the normal reserve image 506 and emphasizing that the symbols are changing. Note that the variation image 508 and the normal reserve image 506 are not separate image data, but common image data. Specifically, only the image data of the variation image 508 is contained, and the normal reserve image 506 is displayed by reducing the image data of the variation image 508. In Figure 30(a), the second normal hold image 506b, the third normal hold image 506c, and the fourth normal hold image 506d are moved one position to the left to become the first normal hold image 506a, the second normal hold image 506b, and the third normal hold image 506c. The first normal decorative symbol 502a is displayed having already finished its fluctuation display and in a state of temporary stop, that is, essentially stopped but fluctuating slightly and not yet stopped. The second normal decorative symbol 502b is fluctuating at high speed rotation. The third normal decorative symbol 502c is in a state after high-speed rotation, fluctuating at a low speed as it approaches a stop. The simplified decorative symbol 504 is rotating at high speed, and when all of the first normal decorative symbols 502a, the second normal decorative symbol 502b, and the third normal decorative symbol 502c stop (final stop), the simplified decorative symbol 504 also stops (final stop). Furthermore, a "confirmed stop," unlike a "temporary stop," refers to a stopping state in which there is no fine oscillation and the object remains completely still. However, if the normal decorative pattern 502 consists of numbers (or letters or symbols) and images depicting human or animal characters, and the simplified decorative pattern 504 consists only of numbers (or letters or symbols), then the numbers (or letters or symbols) in the simplified decorative pattern 504 will not undergo a temporary stop but only a confirmed stop, and during a confirmed stop, there is no fine oscillation and the object remains completely still. On the other hand, the normal decorative pattern 502 can undergo a temporary stop, and during a temporary stop, both the numbers (or letters or symbols) and the images undergo fine oscillation. During a confirmed stop, neither the numbers (or letters or symbols) nor the images undergo fine oscillation and remain completely still. However, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the confirmed stop (for example, 5 seconds), at least one of the numbers (or letters or symbols) or images will undergo fine oscillation even during a confirmed stop.

The simplified hold image 507 displayed in the lower right corner of the presentation screen 500 is an image that shows the number of normal hold images 506 being displayed numerically; in Figure 30(b), the number "3" is displayed. The movable mechanism 520 is a movable decorative lamp shaped like the logo of the game machine's title, and its operation at predetermined timings visually suggests a high probability of a jackpot. As will be explained in detail later, the second prerequisite technology includes multiple movable mechanisms in addition to the movable mechanism 520.

Figure 31 schematically shows an example of frame image contraction in a screen transformation effect. Figure 31(a) shows a state in which the enemy character 512 appears at a predetermined timing in a predetermined symbol variation effect, such as a super reach effect, which is based on a story in which the player fights the enemy character 512. During the execution of such a predetermined symbol variation effect (super reach effect), it is preferable to hide the normal hold image 506 and the variation image 508 as shown in Figure 31, however, the variation image 508 may continue to be displayed even when the normal hold image 506 is hidden. For example, if the effect develops into a super reach effect, the normal hold image 506 is hidden, but the variation image 508 may be configured to be displayed for at least a portion of the execution period of the super reach effect (for example, the first half or the period until the display of the result effect that notifies whether or not it is a jackpot). Furthermore, during the execution of such a predetermined symbol variation effect (such as a super reach effect), the decorative symbols 502 are normally hidden as shown in Figure 31, but they may be displayed in a smaller size (or, if the decorative symbols 502 consist of numbers and symbols, only the numbers) and continue to be displayed. For example, if the game develops into a super reach effect, the decorative symbols 502 may be configured to be displayed in a reach effect, in a smaller size and/or as numbers only, for at least a portion of the execution period of the super reach effect (for example, the first half). Here, when a frame-freezing effect is executed as a screen transformation effect, as shown in Figure 31(b), the image of the enemy character 512 that was previously displayed on the screen as shown in Figure 31(a) is frozen, the frozen frame image is reduced to a slightly smaller size, and a frame image 510, which was not previously displayed, is displayed around the reduced frame image. When a framed video effect is performed as a screen transformation effect, although not specifically illustrated, transformation processing such as sequential reduction is applied to each of the multiple frame images included in the original video, similar to a framed still effect, and such multiple frame images are also included in the transformation unless otherwise specified. Note that at least a part of this framed image 510 may be displayed in advance (for example, a part of the inner area of the framed image 510 may be displayed at the edge of the display area). The area inside the framed image 510 will be referred to as the framed image 514 from now on. Here, the framed image 510, which was not displayed on the effect screen 500 in the state of Figure 31(a), is displayed around the framed image 514 in the state of Figure 31(b). This part of the framed image 510 is actually an image portion that was not displayed and was not visible on the effect screen 500 because it is located in a position corresponding to the outside of the frame of the effect screen 500, even at the time of Figure 31(a), although the display control processing itself is executed by the effect display control means 305. As shown in the illustration, in the second prerequisite technology, the entire frame image 510 is visible. However, it is also possible to make only the upper part of the frame image 510 visible (i.e., the rest of the frame image invisible), or to make only the left and right parts of the frame image 510 visible (i.e., the top and bottom parts invisible).

Here, the frame image 514, which is a scaled-down version of the frame image in Figure 31(a), does not include the simplified decorative pattern 504 and the simplified held image 507. In other words, the simplified decorative pattern 504 and the simplified held image 507 are not subject to the screen transformation effect and are displayed on a layer in front of the layer on which the screen transformation effect is displayed. The normal decorative pattern 502, normal held image 506, and changing image 508, which were displayed at the stage of Figure 30, are switched to a hidden state, are not included in the transformation, and are not included in the frame image 514. In other words, the display of the decorative pattern is ensured by hiding the normal decorative pattern 502 while continuing to display the simplified decorative pattern 504 (making it possible to recognize whether or not it is changing), and the display of the held image is ensured by hiding the normal held image 506 and changing image 508 while continuing to display the simplified held image 507 (making it possible to recognize whether or not a hold exists and how many holds exist). In the modified version, the decorative symbols 502 and the image in motion 508 may also be included in the framed image 514 and subjected to transformation. In other words, as described above, if the decorative symbols 502 and the image in motion 508 are configured to continue displaying even in a predetermined symbol variation effect (such as a super reach effect), the decorative symbols 502 and the image in motion 508 may be included in the framed image 514 and subjected to the screen transformation effect. Similarly, the regular hold image 506 may also be configured to continue displaying in a predetermined symbol variation effect (such as a super reach effect), and may be included in the framed image 514 and subjected to the screen transformation effect, just like the decorative symbols 502 and the image in motion 508. The framed image 514 is an image obtained by reducing the frame image in Figure 31(a) as described above, and in addition, by inverting the colors (also known as "negative-positive inversion"). As a variation, the fluctuating image 508 may not be included in the frame image 514, but rather displayed outside (or in front of) the frame image, similar to the simple decorative pattern 504. This configuration prevents any changes to the display (such as color inversion) of the fluctuating image 508, thus ensuring that the notification of the expected jackpot probability based on the fluctuating image 508 remains unchanged. The frame image 514 and the frame image 510 are objects to be subjected to subsequent transformation processing and are therefore referred to as target objects 516.

Figure 32 schematically shows an example of frame image oscillation in a screen transformation effect. The target object 516 is further reduced in size from the state shown in Figure 31(b), and then the transformation, which had been two-dimensional until then, is further changed in the depth direction, resulting in a three-dimensional transformation. As a result, the target object 516 becomes an image that appears as if the frame image of the moving image that was displayed immediately before (if it is a still image within a frame effect, it is an image like a captured image of the moving image of the effect frozen in time; if it is a moving image within a frame effect, it is a frame image that switches sequentially) is pasted or projected onto one face of a three-dimensional object. As shown in the figure, the target object 516 has a shape in which the image within the frame 514 is placed inside the curved frame image 510, and although it is not strictly a rectangle, for the sake of explanation from here on we will assume that it is a rectangle, and will refer to its left end as the left edge, its right end as the right edge, its top end as the top edge, and its bottom end as the bottom edge. In Figure 32(a), a four-vertex deformation is performed to make it appear as if the left edge of the target object 516 is moving towards the foreground and the right edge is moving towards the background. Specifically, the left edge is lengthened, the right edge is shortened, the interior angles on the top and bottom of the left edge are smaller than right angles, and the interior angles on the top and bottom of the right edge are larger than right angles, resulting in a trapezoidal shape. In Figure 32(b), a four-vertex deformation is performed to make it appear as if the right edge of the target object 516 is moving towards the foreground and the left edge is moving towards the background. Specifically, the right edge is lengthened, the left edge is shortened, the interior angles on the top and bottom of the right edge are smaller than right angles, and the interior angles on the top and bottom of the left edge are larger than right angles, resulting in a trapezoidal shape. By rapidly and alternately repeating the states in Figure 32(a) and Figure 32(b), it is possible to make the target object 516 appear to sway by alternately rotating the left and right edges back and forth.

<First aspect>
The performance determination means 303 determines whether or not to perform a screen transformation performance according to the variation pattern as the performance content to be displayed on the performance screen 500 of the performance display device 60. The screen transformation performance is displayed as a moving image by sequentially generating a new frame image by combining at least the image of the target object 516, which is a transformed version of the frame image stored in the frame buffer 338 at a predetermined timing, the background image 518, and an image showing the game status, and storing it in the frame buffer 338. Here, the background image 518 is solid black (blacked out), but the display is not limited to this form. For example, it may also be a display form in which a moving image of the word "CHANCE" scrolling like a ticker is played in a loop.

Figure 33 schematically shows the layer structure of the animation screen 500 in the screen transformation animation. The layer structure of the animation screen 500 consists of the following layers, from the frontmost to the backmost: error display layer 521, volume/brightness display layer 522, game status layer 523, animation layer 524, and background layer 525. The frontmost error display layer 521 displays an error warning image 536 indicating that an error has occurred and the type of error. The next layer, the volume/brightness display layer 522, displays a volume setting image 532 showing an interface for the player to adjust the volume, and a brightness setting image 534 showing an interface for the player to adjust the brightness.

The next layer, the game status layer 523, displays images such as the simple decorative symbols 504, the simple hold image 507, the in-spin image 508, and the guidance display 530 that guides the player to shoot to the right. The displayed content is constantly updated. As an example, the in-spin image 508 may be displayed in the performance layer 524 instead of the game status layer 523. The next layer, the performance layer 524, is a layer that mainly displays the in-spin of the normal decorative symbols 502, the normal hold image 506, and the target object 516. The shape, color, and display position of the target object 516 are constantly updated, but the content of the framed image 514 included in the target object 516 remains fixed unless changes such as deformation or movement are added in the case of a static performance like a screen capture, and in the case of a performance where a video is embedded in the framed image 514, the frame images included in the original video are sequentially embedded. The normal decorative symbols 502 and the normal hold image 506 may also be subject to deformation as part of the target object 516 in a screen deformation performance. Furthermore, as mentioned above, if the fluctuating image 508 is displayed on the performance layer 524 instead of the game status layer 523, the fluctuating image 508 may also be subject to transformation as part of the target object 516 in the screen transformation effect. The background layer 525 on the last page is a black background image 518. By displaying the background image 518 on the background layer 525, it is possible to make it appear as a three-dimensional space with a sense of depth, and the target object 516 displayed on the performance layer 524 can also be made to appear three-dimensional. The performance display device 60 has at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group as performance images that can be displayed, and in the screen transformation effect, a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined form and a second image obtained by not transforming the first image into a predetermined form are displayed. The first image group refers to a collection of images categorized as images that constitute the transformation target effect described later, that is, images that are subject to transformation processing. The second image group refers to a collection of images other than those that constitute the transformation target effect described later, that is, images that are not subject to transformation processing. The first image is an image that may be subject to transformation in the screen transformation effect and may be displayed on the effect layer 524. The first image group may include, for example, the target object 516 as the first image, and may further include the normal decorative pattern 502 and the normal hold image 506. The second image is an image that is not subject to transformation in the screen transformation effect and is an image that is displayed on a layer other than the effect layer 524. The second image group may include, for example, the simple decorative pattern 504, the simple hold image 507, the changing image 508, and the guidance display 530 as the second image. The special first image is, for example, the transformed target object 516. If the normal decorative pattern 502 or the normal hold image 506 is the target of transformation in the screen transformation effect, the transformed normal decorative pattern 502 or the transformed normal hold image 506 may also be included.

The performance determination means 303 selects one of several types of variable performance patterns as the variable performance pattern. These multiple types of variable performance patterns include those that are subject to screen transformation during the performance process and those that are not subject to screen transformation. Variable performance patterns subject to screen transformation may be defined such that the screen transformation may or may not be executed depending on the results of a separate lottery, or they may be defined so that the screen transformation is always executed. This allows for different presentation styles even with the same variable performance pattern, or even with the same performance progression up to a certain point, depending on whether or not the screen transformation is executed midway through. For example, in the case of a performance sequence leading to a super reach, the sequence can be either "start of variation → formation of reach state → development of super reach performance → no screen transformation during super reach performance → end of super reach performance → end of variation" or "start of variation → formation of reach state → development of super reach performance → screen transformation occurs during super reach performance → end of super reach performance → end of variation."

The performance determination means 303 selects one of several types of pre-announcement performance patterns as the pre-announcement performance pattern. The several types of pre-announcement performance patterns include pre-announcement performances that are subject to screen transformation performance during the performance process (for example, in addition to the performance that freezes the enemy character during the super reach performance described above, there is also the step-up pre-announcement performance which is part of the pre-announcement performance before the reach state) and pre-announcement performances that are not subject to screen transformation performance (for example, a pre-announcement performance pattern in which a special normal decorative symbol 502 (for example, a normal decorative symbol 502 with the word "NEXT" attached) is displayed during a pseudo-consecutive performance which is part of the pre-announcement performance before the reach state and the normal decorative symbol 502 is temporarily stopped and then changes again, and a pre-announcement performance pattern in which the movable mechanism 520 is driven after the performance that freezes the enemy character during the super reach performance described above has finished, and in conjunction with this, the screen is displayed in rainbow colors). Pre-announcement performances that are subject to screen transformation performance may be defined such that the screen transformation performance is executed or not executed depending on the result of a separate lottery, or they may be defined so that the screen transformation performance is always executed. This allows for different presentation styles depending on whether or not the screen transformation effect is executed, even with the same preview animation pattern. The animations that are subject to the screen transformation effect—that is, the symbol change animations and preview animations in which the screen transformation effect can be executed during the animation process—will be hereinafter referred to as "transformation-targeted animations."

The performance determination means 303 determines whether or not to execute a so-called pre-announcement performance that suggests in advance the high probability that the result of the win/loss lottery will be a win, triggered by the occurrence of a hold corresponding to a new ball entering the start gate, according to the pre-determination information (pre-information transmitted from the main board 200 as the main control device when a new ball enters). Furthermore, the probability of the screen transformation performance being executed differs depending on the type of pre-announcement performance (pre-announcement). In other words, if the hold related to the target change is a hold related to a change in which the execution of the screen transformation performance is scheduled, or a hold related to a change in which the execution of the screen transformation performance is highly likely (more precisely, if it is a hold related to a change in which a pre-announcement performance that is the target of the screen transformation performance is executed), then a pre-announcement with a higher expectation level will be executed than in the case of a hold that is not such a hold (in the case of the hold change performance described later, the red normal hold image 506 is a pre-announcement with a higher expectation level than the blue normal hold image 506). In this configuration, even with the same presentation pattern, it is preferable to configure the system so that the probability of a big win is higher when the screen transformation presentation is performed than when it is not. For example, it is preferable to configure the system so that the probability of a big win is higher when the presentation that freezes the enemy character is performed during the super reach presentation (the screen transformation presentation is performed) than when the presentation that freezes the enemy character is not performed during the super reach presentation (the screen transformation presentation is not performed and the enemy character does not freeze). The pre-read notification presentation is, for example, the presentation shown in Figure 30, which indicates the probability of a big win or the probability of the screen transformation presentation being performed by the lighting color of the normal reserve image 506 corresponding to the target change that has been pre-read (reserve change presentation). This makes it possible to make the likelihood of the screen transformation presentation being performed different depending on the type of notification presentation, i.e., the lighting color of the normal reserve image 506. For example, the screen transformation presentation is more likely to be performed in the target change that has been pre-read when a red normal reserve image 506 (for example, a 50% probability of winning) is displayed than when a blue normal reserve image 506 (for example, a 10% probability of winning) is displayed. Such a hold change effect may be performed not only for the normal hold image 506 but also for the in-spin image 508. For example, when the first normal hold image 506a moves to become the in-spin image 508, (1) the first normal hold image 506a displays a blue normal hold image 506, and the in-spin image 508 also displays a blue normal hold image 506 (more precisely, a blue in-spin image 508), allowing the viewer to understand that the probability of winning a jackpot in the current spin is 10%. (2) The first normal hold image 506a displays a blue normal hold image 506, and the in-spin image 508 displays a red normal hold image 506 (more precisely, a red in-spin image 508), allowing the viewer to understand that the probability of winning a jackpot in the current spin has increased from 10% to 50%. Furthermore, when a variation pattern for which a screen transformation effect is to be executed is selected, whether or not the screen transformation effect is executed is determined at the start of the symbol variation due to that variation pattern, and the probability of the screen transformation effect being executed differs depending on the type of pre-announcement performed up to the start of that variation. As a variation, the decision on whether or not to execute the screen transformation effect may be made at the time the pre-announcement is executed (when the execution of the pre-announcement is decided), based on the variation (target variation) that triggered the execution of that pre-announcement.

The likelihood of the screen transformation animation being executed varies depending on the type of pre-announcement animation for the relevant spin. Note that "relevant spin" here refers to the current spin; if a pre-announcement is being performed, it refers to the spin that triggered the pre-announcement (the target spin), not the spin in which the pre-announcement is being performed (the spin before the target). Furthermore, the type of pre-announcement animation for the relevant spin refers to the type of pre-announcement animation (excluding the screen transformation animation) performed in the spin in which the pre-announcement animation that is the target of the screen transformation animation is performed, and not the type of pre-announcement animation; in other words, it does not refer to the type of pre-announcement animation in a spin prior to the spin in which the pre-announcement animation that is the target of the screen transformation animation is performed. Note that the execution and type of pre-announcement animation for the relevant spin, the execution and type of pre-announcement animation that is the target of the screen transformation animation, and the execution and type of screen transformation animation are all determined by separate draws at the start of the relevant spin. Thus, even if a spin animation pattern that is the target of the screen transformation animation is selected, the screen transformation animation is not guaranteed to be performed. For example, as a form of the pre-announcement effect for the fluctuation, a dialogue pre-announcement effect (this dialogue pre-announcement effect is performed before the pre-announcement effect that is the target of the screen transformation effect is performed in the fluctuation) may be configured such that a giraffe pattern (a display pattern that has a higher probability of a big win than blue) is more likely to result in the execution of the screen transformation effect than a blue speech bubble. As a variation, the execution or non-execution of the pre-announcement effect for the fluctuation, its form, the execution or non-execution of the pre-announcement effect that is the target of the screen transformation effect, and the execution or non-execution of the screen transformation effect may all be determined at once by the same lottery at the start of the fluctuation.

The way the effects are presented can differ even if the content of the effects is the same, depending on whether or not the screen transformation effect is executed. Furthermore, the combination of the content of the pre-announcement effect and the target change effect can create a gradual increase in the sense of anticipation regarding the differences in how the effects are presented. The aforementioned hold change effect and dialogue announcement effect can be executed in both the target change and the change before the target. For example, by displaying a red normal hold image 506 in the pre-announcement, it can be made to appear that the expectation of the screen transformation effect is high, and then by displaying a blue dialogue bubble in the target change effect, it can be made to appear that the expectation of the screen transformation effect is low. Alternatively, for example, by displaying a blue normal hold image 506 in the pre-announcement, it can be made to appear that the expectation of the screen transformation effect is low, and then by displaying a giraffe-patterned dialogue bubble in the target change effect, it can be made to appear that the expectation of the screen transformation effect is high. In the modified example, if the system is designed to determine the entire process from the start of the pre-announcement (change before the target) to the target change, or the entire process from the pre-announcement to the timing of the screen transformation effect during the target change, it is possible to prevent the expected execution of the screen transformation effect from being interrupted midway.

<Second aspect>
Figure 34 schematically shows the process of a movable mechanism effect that is executed simultaneously with the screen transformation effect. Figure 34(a) shows the initial stage of the operation of the movable mechanism 520, and Figure 34(b) shows the state in which the movable mechanism 520 has been operated. The movable mechanism 520 in the second prerequisite technology includes the first movable mechanism 520a, the second movable mechanism 520b, the third movable mechanism 520c, and the fourth movable mechanism 520d. The first movable mechanism 520a is a movable decorative lamp shaped like the logo of the game machine's title, and at a predetermined timing during a predetermined effect, it moves significantly downwards as shown in Figure 34(b), thereby visually suggesting a high probability of a big win. The second movable part 520b and the third movable part 520c are scissor-arm type decorative members, and as shown in Figure 34(b), the second movable part 520b extends from the left side of the performance screen 500 to the center of the performance screen 500, and the third movable part 520c extends from the right side of the performance screen 500 to the center of the performance screen 500, thereby visually suggesting a high probability of winning a jackpot. The fourth movable part 520d is a mountain-shaped decorative lamp resembling a saw blade, and as shown in Figure 34(b), it moves significantly upward at a predetermined timing during a predetermined performance, thereby visually suggesting a high probability of winning a jackpot. As shown in Figure 34(b), the simplified decorative pattern 504 and the simplified hold image 507 are displayed in a position that does not obstruct visibility even when all of the first movable mechanism 520a, second movable mechanism 520b, third movable mechanism 520c, and fourth movable mechanism 520d are in operation. Furthermore, by configuring the mechanism so that none of the movable mechanisms operate, i.e., remain in their initial positions, when the reel stops moving and for a predetermined time leading up to the stop (for example, the period from 2 seconds before the reel stops moving until the reel stops moving), it is possible to ensure more reliable visibility, at least at the boundary of the game (i.e., when the game progresses temporarily stop). As a modification, the simplified decorative pattern 504 and the simplified hold image 507 may be configured to be displayed in a position that does not obstruct visibility when at least one of the movable mechanisms among the first movable mechanism 520a, second movable mechanism 520b, third movable mechanism 520c, and fourth movable mechanism 520d is in operation. For example, the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple hold image 507 may be displayed in a position where their visibility is obstructed when the third movable mechanism 520c is operating, but not obstructed when other movable mechanisms are operating. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the frequency of operation of the third movable mechanism 520c is lower than the frequency of operation of any of the first movable mechanism 520a, second movable mechanism 520b, or fourth movable mechanism 520d. It is also preferable that the time during which the third movable mechanism 520c operates within a single variation is shorter than the time during which the third movable mechanism 520c does not operate. In such a configuration, it is even more preferable that, in all variation patterns (variation times), the time during which the third movable mechanism 520c operates within a single variation is shorter than the time during which the third movable mechanism 520c does not operate.

The movable mechanism 520 is located near the performance display device 60 and operates in conjunction with the performance displayed on the performance display device 60. The operation of the movable mechanism 520 and the execution of the screen transformation performance are associated with each other so that the display of the screen transformation performance and the operation of the movable mechanism 520 are executed relatively often simultaneously. For example, the movable mechanism 520 is executed more often simultaneously with the screen transformation performance than with other types of performances that do not involve the screen transformation performance (for example, capture performances, inversion performances, step-up announcements, dialogue announcements, hold change performances, and group announcements). Also, for example, the screen transformation performance is more often accompanied by the operation of the movable mechanism 520 than without. The performance control means 304 operates the movable mechanism 520 according to the operation status of the movable mechanism 520 determined by the performance determination means 303. By linking the screen transformation effect with the operation of the movable mechanism 520 in this way, the three-dimensionality and dynamism of the effect content displayed on the effect display device 60 when the screen transformation effect is executed can be further enhanced. That is, not only is a sense of three-dimensionality and dynamism expressed in the displayed effect content, but a sense of three-dimensionality and dynamism is also created around the effect display device 60. Conversely, in screen transformation effects that do not involve the operation of the movable mechanism 520, the content of the screen transformation effect itself can be made more prominent by refraining from the operation of the movable mechanism 520. Furthermore, when the movable mechanism 520 is in operation and viewed from the front, as shown in Figure 34, the first movable mechanism 520a, the second movable mechanism 520b, the third movable mechanism 520c, and the fourth movable mechanism 520d operate in a position and shape that does not obstruct the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504.

The decorative symbols include a normal decorative symbol 502, which is displayed as the main symbol on the performance display device 60 at least when a special symbol stops, and a simplified decorative symbol 504, which is displayed in a simplified form than the normal decorative symbol 502 when the normal decorative symbol 502 is difficult to see. The normal decorative symbol 502 is a symbol that is displayed in a larger size than the simplified decorative symbol 504. The normal decorative symbol 502 consists of three symbols, and in principle, they are stopped one by one in order after the variation display. The simplified decorative symbol 504 also consists of three symbols, but all three are stopped simultaneously after the variation display. The combination of symbols that the simplified decorative symbol 504 stops with is the same as the combination of symbols that the normal decorative symbol 502 stops with.
Furthermore, during the execution of the Super Reach performance, the system may be configured to display the normal decorative symbols 502 in a smaller size (displaying alternative symbols) for at least a portion of the time, or the normal decorative symbols 502 may be hidden (the system may be configured not to display alternative symbols either). In such situations, the simplified decorative symbols 504 are always displayed in a fluctuating state. These simplified decorative symbols 504 are displayed in a small size in the upper right corner of the performance display device 60, displaying a fluctuating state while the special symbols are fluctuating and a stopped state while the special symbols are stopped. Similar to the normal decorative symbols 502, three symbols are displayed in a fluctuating and stopped state. By providing these simplified decorative symbols 504, even in situations where it is desirable to make the normal decorative symbols 502 smaller or to hide them (for example, when the Super Reach performance is being executed, or when the center of the performance display device 60 is obscured by a performance using a movable mechanism), it is possible to inform the player that the symbols are fluctuating (in other words, that the win/loss result has not yet been determined). In other words, this simplified decorative symbol 504 can be said to be a symbol for display guarantee (to compensate for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 502). When this simplified decorative symbol 504 is displayed in a variable state, it is preferable that it continues to display in a variable state from the start of the variable state of the special symbol until it stops. In other words, even if the normal decorative symbol 502 temporarily stops midway (for example, when a special normal decorative symbol 502 that displays text such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped when executing a pseudo-consecutive display), it is preferable that the simplified decorative symbol 504 is configured not to temporarily stop midway (therefore, the simplified decorative symbol 504 does not have a special symbol that displays text such as "NEXT", and is simple The simple decorative symbols 504 only perform confirmed stops), and furthermore, in order to prevent players from mistakenly believing that a losing spin is a jackpot, and in order to prevent players from sensing that a jackpot is coming in advance, it is preferable to display the spins in a way that maintains a combination of symbols that indicates a loss, regardless of whether it is a losing spin or a jackpot spin (for example, if the types of simple decorative symbols 504 are "1" to "7", the spins are displayed as "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ...). Furthermore, when the spinning starts from a state where the regular decorative symbols 502 and the simplified decorative symbols 504 are fixed in place, the starting symbol combination (the first symbol combination immediately after the start of the spinning) is one symbol combination that has progressed from the symbol combination at the time of the fixed stop. However, when the spinning starts from a state where the simplified decorative symbols 504 are fixed in place, the starting symbol combination will be a predetermined symbol combination, regardless of the combination at the time of the fixed stop. For example, when both the regular decorative symbol 502 and the simplified decorative symbol 504 are fixed at "243" and begin to change, the starting symbol combination for the regular decorative symbol 502 will be "354", but the starting symbol combination for the simplified decorative symbol 504 will be fixed at "123". Similarly, when both the regular decorative symbol 502 and the simplified decorative symbol 504 are fixed at "333" and begin to change, the starting symbol combination for the regular decorative symbol 502 will be "444", but the starting symbol combination for the simplified decorative symbol 504 will be fixed at "123". In addition to this, the simplified decorative symbol 504 has the following characteristics, which clearly differentiate its role from the regular decorative symbol 502.
(1) The display area of the regular decorative symbol 502, which is easily recognizable by the player, is larger than the display area of the simplified decorative symbol 504, which is used to guarantee the display (to compensate for the display state of the regular decorative symbol 502). This configuration is preferable not only when the regular decorative symbol 502 and the simplified decorative symbol 504 are in a fixed stop state, when the regular decorative symbol 502 has just formed a reach state (a reach state before it has developed into a super reach performance) and the simplified decorative symbol 504 is in a variable display state, but also when the regular decorative symbol 502 is a small symbol during a super reach performance and the simplified decorative symbol 504 is in a variable display state.
(2) The display position of the regular decorative symbol 502 can be set to a different position depending on whether it is in the first performance mode (for example, normal mode, or stage A in normal mode) or the second performance mode (for example, rush mode, or stage B in normal mode), thereby enabling diversity in the performance of the regular decorative symbol 502 depending on the performance mode. On the other hand, the simplified decorative symbol 504 only needs to play the role of compensating for the display state of the regular decorative symbol 502, so it is preferable to set it to the same display position regardless of whether it is in the first or second performance mode, thus avoiding unnecessary development and design. Details of the performance modes will be described later.
(3) The display mode of the regular decorative symbols 502 can be changed depending on whether it is the first performance mode (for example, normal mode, or stage A in normal mode) or the second performance mode (for example, rush mode, or stage B in normal mode), thereby enabling diversity in the performance of the regular decorative symbols 502 according to the performance mode. For example, in the first performance mode, the regular decorative symbols 502 are composed only of number regular decorative symbols 502 (regular decorative symbols 502 such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second performance mode, the regular decorative symbols 502 are composed of a combination of number regular decorative symbols 502 and ally character regular decorative symbols 502 (regular decorative symbols 502 such as "1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g"). On the other hand, since the simplified decorative pattern 504 only needs to play the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is preferable to construct the simplified decorative pattern 504 using only the same display pattern, for example, only the normal decorative pattern 502 of numbers, regardless of whether it is the first or second performance mode, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design work.
(4) The display area of the normal decorative symbol 502 can be varied (moved, made into a small symbol) according to the changing conditions (for example, whether or not it is in a normal reach, whether or not it is in a super reach performance, etc.), thereby allowing for diversity in the performance of the normal decorative symbol 502. On the other hand, the simplified decorative symbol 504 only needs to play the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 502, so it is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design by making the display area of the simplified decorative symbol 504 not variable (not moving, not made into a small symbol).
(5) The normal decorative pattern 502 can be made more varied in its presentation by varying its movement speed to low, medium, high, or very high depending on the movement situation (for example, whether it is the start of the movement, in the middle of the movement, or just before the end of the movement). On the other hand, the simplified decorative pattern 504 only needs to play the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, so it is preferable not to vary the movement speed of the simplified decorative pattern 504, or to reduce the number of stages in which it is varied (for example, to only have low and high speeds), in order to avoid unnecessary development and design work. Furthermore, regarding the direction of movement, it is preferable that the normal decorative pattern 502 can move not only from top to bottom but also from bottom to top (allowing movement in multiple directions), while the simplified decorative pattern 504 can only move from top to bottom.
(6) The regular decorative symbols 502 perform a temporary stop (a temporary stop during the variation of the special symbols, accompanied by slight fluctuations) before a definitive stop (a stop at the timing when the special symbols stop), and by temporarily stopping a specific symbol that is a regular decorative symbol 502 other than a number (for example, a regular decorative symbol 502 with the word "Super" written on it that foreshadows development to a Super Reach effect), a relationship can be established between the effect of the regular decorative symbols 502 and other effects. On the other hand, the simplified decorative symbols 504 only need to play the role of compensating for the display state of the regular decorative symbols 502, so it is preferable that the simplified decorative symbols 504 do not perform a temporary stop or temporarily stop a specific symbol, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design work.
(7) Normally, the decorative symbols 502 overlap with the display area of other pre-announcement effects (for example, comment pre-announcement effects, step-up pre-announcement effects, etc.), meaning they are displayed in superimposition. Such superimposition is permitted in order to create powerful effects using as much of the area on the performance display device 60 as possible. However, in the case of the simplified decorative symbols 504, since they serve to compensate for the display state of the normal decorative symbols 502, it is desirable that the display area of the simplified decorative symbols 504 not overlap with the display area of the other pre-announcement effects (they are not displayed in superimposition). However, in relation to special pre-announcement effects that inevitably overlap (for example, group pre-announcement effects displayed on the entire performance display device 60, background pre-announcement effects, etc.), it is preferable to set the display priority of the simplified decorative symbols 504 higher than the display priority of the special pre-announcement effects (setting the simplified decorative symbols 504 to be displayed in front of the special pre-announcement effects). Furthermore, it is desirable that the right-hand shooting notification image (unlike the image displayed during special gameplay, this is a special right-hand shooting notification image displayed during high-base state, although it may be the same image as the one displayed during special gameplay) be visible to the player at all times. Therefore, it is desirable to design the display area of the simple decorative symbol 504 and the display area of the right-hand shooting notification image so that they do not overlap (are not displayed superimposed). However, if the display area of the normal decorative symbol 502 is moved or enlarged, the display area of the normal decorative symbol 502 and the display area of the right-hand shooting notification image may overlap (are displayed superimposed). In that case, it is preferable to set the display priority of the normal decorative symbol 502 lower than the display priority of the right-hand shooting notification image (setting the normal decorative symbol 502 to be displayed behind the right-hand shooting notification image).
(8) During special gameplay, the regular decorative symbols 502 may be displayed individually rather than in combination. For example, if "777" is confirmed to stop and then special gameplay is performed, "7" will be displayed during special gameplay, and if "222" is confirmed to stop and then special gameplay is performed, "2" will be displayed during special gameplay. This allows players to recognize which regular decorative symbol 502 resulted in a jackpot during special gameplay. As an alternative, only the regular decorative symbols 502 corresponding to jackpots with a high degree of advantage (for example, "333", "555", "777", etc., which indicate a jackpot of 7R or more or a jackpot of 10R) may be displayed during special gameplay. In this way, the display area for one regular decorative symbol 502 displayed during special gameplay should not overlap with other display areas during special gameplay, such as the round display area, right-hand play display area, prize ball acquisition display area, and cumulative prize ball count display area; in other words, it should not be displayed in superimposition (however, it may overlap with the highlighting display, in which case the highlighting display has a higher display priority). Furthermore, while it is preferable to not display the simple decorative symbol 504 during special gameplay (because no variation display is performed during special gameplay), it may be displayed during special gameplay. If configured in this way, it is preferable that it does not overlap with other display areas during special gameplay, such as the round display area, right-hand play display area, prize ball acquisition display area, and cumulative prize ball count display area; in other words, it should not be displayed in superimposition, and it is also preferable that it does not overlap with the highlighting display.
(9) In addition to the movement of the regular decorative symbols 502 (for example, movement from top to bottom), the symbols may also be displayed with predetermined actions at the start of the movement, immediately after a temporary stop, after a reach is established, during a temporary stop, etc. (The actions in each situation may be called the movement at the start of the movement, the movement at the temporary stop, the movement when a reach is established, and the shaking movement). For example, in the case of a non-reach (when the regular decorative symbol 502 and the simplified decorative symbol 504 display "624" at the time of the confirmed stop), at the start of the spin, the left, middle, and right symbols of the regular decorative symbol 502 all enlarge before the spin begins. Then, when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, then the "6" temporarily stops and continues to shake. Then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, then the "4" temporarily stops and continues to shake. Then, when the middle symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops and shakes slightly. Finally, at the time of the confirmed stop, all movements of the left, middle, and right symbols are terminated. In this case, the simplified decorative symbol 504 does not perform any of the movements. Furthermore, in the case of a normal reach (when the regular decorative symbol 502 and the simplified decorative symbol 504 display "212" at the time of confirmed stop), at the start of the spin, the left, middle, and right symbols of the regular decorative symbol 502 all perform an action as if to enlarge before the spin begins. Then, when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops and the shaking motion continues. Then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops and the shaking motion continues. After that, to indicate that it is a reach, the left and right symbols rotate and the shaking motion continues again. Then, when the middle symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, then the "1" temporarily stops and shakes slightly. Finally, at the time of confirmed stop, all actions of the left, middle, and right symbols are terminated (the middle symbol does not rotate). In this case, the simplified decorative symbol 504 does not perform any actions. Furthermore, when the game progresses to a Super Reach sequence (when the normal decorative symbol 502 and the simplified decorative symbol 504 display "232" at the time of a confirmed stop), at the start of the spin, the left, middle, and right symbols of the normal decorative symbol 502 all enlarge before the spin begins. Then, when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and after the "2" temporarily stops, the shaking motion continues. Then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing motion, and after the "2" temporarily stops, the shaking motion continues. After that, to indicate that it is a reach, the left and right symbols rotate and then the shaking motion continues again. While the symbols are shaking, the middle symbol changes (at this time, the middle symbol moves from top to bottom in an enlarged state, and it overlaps with or has a higher overlap rate with the left and right symbols which previously did not overlap or had a low overlap rate), then the background changes from the normal background to the reach background in order to execute the super reach effect, and if the result is announced as a loss in the super reach effect, the background changes from the reach background to the normal background, after which the left, middle, and right symbols continue to shake for a predetermined time, and then, at the confirmed stop timing, all movements of the left, middle, and right symbols end (the middle symbol does not bounce or rotate). In this case, the simplified decorative symbol 504 does not perform any of the movements. This configuration allows for greater variety in the presentation of the regular decorative symbols 502, while the simplified decorative symbols 504 only need to compensate for the display state of the regular decorative symbols 502. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the simplified decorative symbols 504 to not perform any particular actions, thus avoiding unnecessary development and design work. Furthermore, even during the period between the stop of movement and the display of the standby demo animation, the regular decorative symbols 502 may perform a shaking motion after a predetermined time has elapsed since the stop of movement (for example, 10 seconds later). However, even in this situation, it is preferable that the simplified decorative symbols 504 do not perform any actions at all. This configuration stimulates the desire to play even during the game standby period (when the symbols are stopped), and the absence of shaking motion by the simplified decorative symbols 504 ensures that the player is notified that the game is in standby mode. Additionally, when the standby demo animation is displayed, the regular decorative symbols 502 are hidden, but it is preferable that the simplified decorative symbols 504 remain displayed. This allows for the display of the standby demo screen to be emphasized while still ensuring that the display of which symbols are stopped is maintained. However, since no game is being played during the standby demo, the simple decorative symbols 504 may also be hidden. Furthermore, among the regular decorative symbols 502, certain symbols (for example, the middle symbol "7") may be configured to not perform a predetermined action or to have a lower probability of performing it compared to other symbols. This predetermined action may be, for example, the temporary stop action (a bouncing action) mentioned above (especially for the middle symbol "7" after a reach is established). By configuring it in this way, the rarity of the action for certain symbols can be increased. Furthermore, when a standard decorative pattern 502 is formed by combining a standard decorative pattern 502 of a number and a standard decorative pattern 502 of an ally character (such as a standard decorative pattern 502 of "1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g"), both the standard decorative pattern 502 of the number and the standard decorative pattern 502 of the ally character will perform a swaying motion. However, by making the amplitude of the sway (the swaying distance, for example, if it sways up and down, the distance between the state in which the standard decorative pattern 502 is displayed at the top and the state in which it is displayed at the bottom during the swaying motion) different, a more dynamic swaying motion can be achieved. In such a configuration, the amplitude of the standard decorative pattern 502 of the number may be made smaller than the amplitude of the standard decorative pattern 502 of the ally character, or the standard decorative pattern 502 of the number may not perform a swaying motion at all, and only the standard decorative pattern 502 of the ally character may perform a swaying motion.

The regular decorative pattern 502 is included in the image of the target object 516 in the screen transformation effect and can be subject to transformation; that is, it can be included in the first image belonging to the first image group, and is displayed on the effect layer 524. On the other hand, the simplified decorative pattern 504 is not included in the image of the target object 516 in the screen transformation effect and is not subject to transformation; that is, it is included in the second image belonging to the second image group, while in the screen transformation effect it can be included in the image showing the game status, and is displayed on the game status layer 523. The movable mechanism 520 can also be operated in a predetermined situation in which the screen transformation effect processing is performed with the regular decorative pattern 502 as the target (for example, a situation in which the screen transformation effect processing is performed while the regular decorative pattern 502 is changing, temporarily stopped, or in a state where a reach is formed; in this situation, the image transformation is performed while continuously playing and displaying the scrolling movement of the regular decorative pattern 502 and the shaking movement when it is temporarily stopped and when a reach is formed, rather than a static screen). When the movable parts 520 are viewed from the front while in operation, the visibility of the normal decorative symbols 502 during the screen transformation effect is obstructed by at least one of the first movable parts 520a, second movable parts 520b, third movable parts 520c, and fourth movable parts 520d while they are in operation. However, as shown in Figure 34, the visibility of the simplified decorative symbols 504 during the screen transformation effect is not obstructed by any of the first movable parts 520a, second movable parts 520b, third movable parts 520c, and fourth movable parts 520d while they are in operation. As mentioned above, the display may be configured to be in a position where visibility is not obstructed when at least one of the movable parts is in operation. In order to create a sense of unity in the screen transformation effect, the symbol change effect without the screen transformation effect and the normal decorative symbols 502 are configured to move in the same dynamic way. On the other hand, in order to make it easier to understand whether or not the symbols are currently changing, and if the symbols are temporarily stopped, which symbols are temporarily stopped, the simplified decorative symbols 504 are excluded from the transformation caused by the screen transformation effect to ensure the visibility of the simplified decorative symbols 504. In this case, the operation of the linked movable mechanism 520 is set to an operation mode that does not obstruct the visibility of the simplified decorative symbols 504, thereby more reliably ensuring the visibility of the simplified decorative symbols 504. The relationship between the normal decorative symbols 502 and the simplified decorative symbols 504 may also be applied to the relationship between the normal hold image 506 (changing image 508) and the simplified hold image 507. In other words, the movable mechanism 520 can also be operated in a predetermined situation in which the screen transformation effect processing is performed, including the normally held image 506 (the image in motion 508) as the target (for example, a situation in which the screen transformation effect processing is performed while the normally held image 506 (the image in motion 508) is being displayed; in this situation, if the normally held image 506 (the image in motion 508) is being displayed with a rotation animation or a light-up animation, the image will be transformed while the animation is continuously played and displayed). When the movable mechanism 520 is viewed from the front during its operation, the visibility of the normal hold image 506 (image in motion 508) during the screen transformation effect is obstructed by at least one of the first movable mechanism 520a, second movable mechanism 520b, third movable mechanism 520c, and fourth movable mechanism 520d during operation. However, as shown in Figure 34, the visibility of the simplified hold image 507 during the screen transformation effect is not obstructed by any of the first movable mechanism 520a, second movable mechanism 520b, third movable mechanism 520c, and fourth movable mechanism 520d during operation. As mentioned above, the mechanism may be configured to display the image in a position where visibility is not obstructed during the operation of at least one of the movable mechanisms. In order to create a sense of unity with the screen transformation effect, the symbol change effect without the screen transformation effect and the normal hold image 506 (image in motion 508) are configured to move in the same dynamic way. On the other hand, to make it easier to determine whether the symbols are currently changing, and if so, which symbols are temporarily stopped, the simplified hold image 507 is excluded from the transformation caused by the screen transformation effect to ensure its visibility. In this case, the operation of the linked movable mechanism 520 is designed so as not to obstruct the visibility of the simplified hold image 507, thereby more reliably ensuring its visibility.

<Third aspect>
In a screen transformation effect, regardless of the content of the frame image, which is the first image to be transformed, the background image 518, which is the second image, has the same content as the background image 518 in other screen transformation effects that use other images as the target of transformation. For example, the common background image 518 in the second premise technology is an image that is entirely black and is displayed on the background layer 525 in each screen transformation effect. By standardizing the background image of each screen transformation effect to an image that is entirely black, it is possible to suppress an increase in the display processing burden and an increase in image capacity. As mentioned above, the background image 518 may also be displayed in a manner such as looping a moving image in which the word "CHANCE" scrolls like a ticker.

<Fourth aspect>
If a predetermined error occurs in the performance display device 60 (for example, a door opening error or frame opening error that occurs when a door/frame opening signal is detected, or a prize ball payout error that stops prize ball payout due to insufficient game balls or the upper and lower ball trays 105 and 106 being full), an error warning image 536 indicating the error (showing the occurrence and type of error) is displayed. Furthermore, if an error occurs before the execution of the screen transformation performance and the error warning image 536 is displayed when the screen transformation performance is executed, the display of the error warning image 536 will continue. In this case, as shown in Figure 33, the error warning image 536 is displayed on the foremost error display layer 521 and not on the performance layer 524, so it is not included in the target object 516, which is the frame image that is subject to transformation, and no transformation processing is performed. This not only makes it possible to configure the system so as not to hinder the execution of the screen transformation performance even when an error occurs, but also so as not to hinder the visibility of the error warning image 536 by excluding it from the target of the screen transformation performance. Even if the player has adjusted the volume of the error warning sound to a value other than the maximum, the error warning sound will still be output at the maximum volume, which is the standard volume for the error warning sound. However, even if the error warning sound is being output, the player can simultaneously adjust the volume level of the sound effects related to the reel spinning animation (for example, the sound effects for the予告演出, the background music during spinning, and various sound effects) through their own operation, and the player can display the volume setting image 532 on the volume light display layer 522 in Figure 33 through their operation. Depending on the type of error that occurs during gameplay (the type of error warning sound), the sound effects associated with gameplay (for example, the background music for the super reach animation and the sound effects that occur with the screen transformation animation) may not be output due to the priority output of the error warning sound. For example, if an error occurs during a screen transformation animation, and that error is a prize payout error, both the error warning sound and the animation sound will be output (however, the error warning sound will be output at the maximum volume specified, and the animation sound will be output at a volume corresponding to the currently set volume level). However, if it is a door opening error, only the error warning sound will be output, and the animation sound will not be output (or the animation sound will be output at a lower volume than when a prize payout error occurs). Note that the types of errors are just examples, and depending on the type of error, the animation sound may be prioritized. For example, for errors such as the upper ball tray being full, which are likely to occur during a jackpot, the volume of the audio notification for the full tray error may be reduced or the audio notification may not be output at all during a jackpot to avoid a decrease in enjoyment due to the playback of music during the jackpot, and the notification for the full tray error may be started after the jackpot ends). In the event of such an error occurring during gameplay, even if the screen transformation animation is executed, the volume setting image 532 is not displayed on the animation layer 524, so it is not included in the target object 516, which is the frame image that is subject to transformation, and no transformation processing is performed. This configuration not only ensures that volume adjustment is not hindered even when an error occurs, but also ensures that the visibility of the volume setting image 532 is not hindered by excluding it from the screen transformation effect. The volume setting image 532 can display what the currently set volume level is (for example, it can display "Volume level is 1" or "Volume level is 5"), and when the volume level is adjusted by the player, the display changes (for example, when the volume level is changed from 1 to 2, the display switches from "Volume level is 1" to "Volume level is 5"). In this case, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player during the execution of the screen transformation effect, and the player performs further operations during the execution of the screen transformation effect and while the volume setting image 532 is displayed, resulting in volume adjustment and a change in the display of the volume setting image 532, then both the volume setting image 532 during the execution of the screen transformation effect and before the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 during the execution of the screen transformation effect and after the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 2") will be displayed in a non-transformed display mode. Furthermore, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player immediately before the execution of the screen transformation effect, and the screen transformation effect is executed immediately afterward (while the volume setting image 532 is displayed), and the player performs an operation while the volume setting image 532 is displayed and the screen transformation effect is being executed, thereby adjusting the volume and changing the display of the volume setting image 532, then both the volume setting image 532 before the execution of the screen transformation effect and before the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 after the execution of the screen transformation effect and after the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 2") will be displayed in a non-transformed display mode. In addition, to ensure visibility, it is preferable to configure the error warning image 536 and the volume setting image so that they are not displayed in overlapping areas (displayed in different display areas).

<Fifth aspect>
As shown in Figure 30, the display device 60 shows a normal hold image 506 indicating the number of holds when a hold is stored. Furthermore, when a hold corresponding to a new ball entry occurs, the normal hold image 506 is not displayed immediately to indicate that a hold has occurred, but is displayed with an animation (details will be described later) that gradually displays it. The animation display of the normal hold image 506 is not interrupted even if a screen transformation effect is executed during the animation display of the normal hold image 506, that is, from the start to the completion of the animation of the normal hold image 506 (until the display of the normal hold image 506 is complete). The animation display of the normal hold image 506 referred to here includes not only the animation display when a hold occurs normally (when a hold occurs without a pre-read notification), but also the animation display that is executed when the color or pattern of the normal hold image 506 is changed as a pre-read notification effect (for example, an animation in which the normal hold image 506 lights up white and then changes color when a hold occurs, or an animation in which a small character appears and casts a spell on the displayed normal hold image 506 to change its color). However, if the system is configured so that the pre-announcement is not executed (no lottery or decision is made) even if a new ball enters, in order to draw attention to the screen transformation effect, and if the system is configured so that the animation display effect when a normal hold occurs is not executed, the specification that does not stop the animation display when the screen transformation effect is executed will only be adopted for the animation display when a normal hold occurs (when a hold occurs without a pre-announcement). The animation display of the normal hold image 506 when a normal hold occurs (when a hold occurs without a pre-announcement) may include, for example, a fade-in display of the normal hold image 506, an animation that makes it appear by moving from off-screen such as the bottom of the screen, an animation that rotates or shakes, an animation that adds a color change such as flashing for a moment, or an animation that expands or contracts in size for a moment. Normally, the held image 506 is displayed on the effect layer 524. If a screen transformation effect is executed in the middle of the animation display when the hold occurs, the frame images including the images in the middle of the animation display may be sequentially subjected to transformation. Alternatively, the display content may be updated to continue the animation display of the normally held image 506 included in the target object 516 while the screen transformation effect is being displayed, that is, while the target object 516 is being transformed.
In this way, even when a screen transformation effect is executed while the animation of the normal hold image 506 is being displayed when a hold occurs, the animation display is not interrupted and continues, which prevents any unnaturalness or incongruity from occurring in the flow of the effect. Furthermore, even if hold occurrences occur consecutively and the animation display of the hold occurrence occurs consecutively, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the later ball entry is executed simultaneously without interrupting the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the earlier ball entry. Therefore, depending on the timing of the hold event, (1) if the first ball enters while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball enters will be executed while the screen transformation effect is being executed, and if a subsequent ball enters while the screen transformation effect and the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball enters are being executed, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball enters will be executed simultaneously without interrupting the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball enters, (2) if the timing to start the execution of the screen transformation effect is reached while the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball enters is being executed, the screen transformation effect will be executed while the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball enters is being executed, and if a subsequent ball enters while the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball enters and the screen transformation effect are being executed, the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball enters will be executed simultaneously. (3) If a ball enters the field later while an animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the earlier ball enters the field is being displayed, an animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the later ball enters the field will be displayed simultaneously without interrupting the animation display. Furthermore, in any of the situations (1) to (3), even if there are further ball entries in that situation (while the situations are being executed simultaneously) and those ball entries result in a reserve with a high probability of winning (for example, a reserve that is scheduled to trigger a super reach effect, or a reserve that is scheduled to result in a win), in that situation, it is preferable not to execute the animation display that is normally performed when changing the color or pattern of the reserve image 506 as a pre-announcement effect for that reserve.

In the second prerequisite technology, there are multiple types of performance modes, and for each performance mode, it is specified which types of performances, such as symbol variation performances and予告 (pre-announcement) performances, can be executed.
To explain the performance modes and the performance content executed within each mode in more detail, for example, there are several types of performance modes, such as "Normal Mode,""ChanceMode," and "Rush Mode." Depending on the game state (or the selected variation pattern state) and the number of times the special symbols have been displayed, one of these performance modes is selected, and a variation performance corresponding to the selected performance mode is executed. Basically, "Normal Mode" is set when the game state is normal, "Chance Mode" is set when the game state is time-saving mode, and "Rush Mode" is set when the game state is probability variation mode. When any of the performance modes is set, a background image (background image displayed behind the decorative symbols 61) exclusive to that performance mode is displayed on the screen as a performance (variation performance) that indicates that the player is in that performance mode, and background music exclusive to that performance mode is output from the speaker 108. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different for each performance mode, so the player can recognize which performance mode they are currently in from the type of background image or BGM. Specifically, the "Normal Mode" has four stages: "Stage A,""StageB,""StageC," and "Pre-announcement Stage." After 20 or more spins or when a Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) fails, the game transitions from "Stage A" to "Stage B," from "Stage B" to "Stage C," and from "Stage C" to "Stage A." If the Pre-announcement演出 (Pre-announcement演出) results in a win for the "Pre-announcement Stage," the game transitions from the current stage to the "Pre-announcement Stage." (When the game transitions to the "Pre-announcement Stage," the execution of the Super Reach演出 is confirmed. If it results in a win, matching numbers are displayed on the "Pre-announcement Stage." If it fails, numbers other than matching numbers are displayed on the "Pre-announcement Stage," and the game returns to the stage before the "Pre-announcement Stage" transition in the next spin.) Each of the "Stage A,""StageB,""StageC," and "Pre-read Stage" has a different background music (stage BGM) (different from both the stage BGM in "Chance Mode" and the stage BGM in "Rush Mode"). In "Stage A," the stage BGM is interrupted (ends) when the reel stops (confirms a stop) with a non-reach miss (a miss that does not form a reach state, such as a scattered number like "351"), and starts again from the beginning at the start of the next reel spin. In "Stage B,""StageC," and "Pre-read Stage," the stage BGM is not interrupted (does not end) even if the reel stops (confirms a stop) with a non-reach miss, and continues to be output in the next reel spin (the same configuration applies to "Chance Mode" and "Rush Mode").
In this stage, the pseudo-consecutive reel spinning effect can be performed in any of the "Stage A,""StageB,""StageC," or "Pre-read Stage." However, in any of these stages, when the pseudo-consecutive reel spinning effect is temporarily stopped (when a predetermined pseudo-consecutive reel spinning symbol (for example, a symbol with the word "NEXT") is displayed near the predetermined temporary stop position as the middle symbol), the stage BGM is not output (it is interrupted). The stage BGM starts from the beginning when the re-spinning display occurs (the re-spinning after the temporary stop), or it switches to a different BGM than the one before the re-spinning display. Subsequently, if the game progresses to a Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) in "Stage A,""StageB,""StageC," or "Pre-read Stage," the background image switches from the background image of the current stage to the background image of the Super Reach演出 (and simultaneously switches to BGM specifically for the Super Reach演出). During the execution of the Super Reach演出, the stage BGM is not output. If the Super Reach演出 displays an indication of a miss, the background image switches back to the background image of the current stage (the background image of the stage displayed before the Super Reach演出 developed) within the spin display where the Super Reach演出 was executed. However, in this situation, until the next spin display begins, even if the stage background image is displayed, neither the stage BGM nor the BGM specifically for the Super Reach演出 is output (it is either silent, or a specific BGM different from both the stage BGM and the BGM specifically for the Super Reach演出 is output). Therefore, even if the reel stops without a reach (confirmed stop), the stage BGM will not be interrupted (it will not end), and even in "Stage B,""StageC," and "Pre-read Stage" (and even in "Stage A" which do not), if the reel stops after a super reach animation, the stage BGM will be interrupted before the reel stops (confirmed stop), and the stage BGM will start again from the beginning at the start of the next reel.
In "Chance Mode" and "Rush Mode," the pseudo-consecutive spin animation is not performed. Here, special animations that suggest the pseudo-consecutive spin animation will be performed (for example, the continuation dialogue announcement "It will continue!" which confirms the execution of the subsequent pseudo-consecutive spin animation, and the animation "Maybe it will continue?" which does not confirm the execution of the subsequent pseudo-consecutive spin animation) are performed, suggesting that the pseudo-consecutive spin animation (re-spin display) will be performed later. However, these special animations are only displayed in "Stage A" and "Stage C," and not in "Stage B" and "Pre-read Stage." In other words, both stages where the possibility of the pseudo-consecutive spin animation being performed can be sensed in advance and stages where it cannot be sensed are provided, and by repeatedly transitioning between these stages, an animation is created that will keep the player from getting bored. In "Stage A," a special animation based on character A is performed, while in "Stage C," a special animation based on character B is performed. Furthermore, there are pseudo-consecutive win confirmation events, which are different from special events and, simply by occurring, guarantee that a pseudo-consecutive win event will be executed afterward (for example, an event where the line "Continuity Confirmed!" is always displayed when character C appears). In addition, there are development confirmation events, which are different from both special events and pseudo-consecutive win confirmation events and, simply by occurring, guarantee that a pseudo-consecutive win event will not be executed afterward and that the game will develop into a super reach event (for example, an event where the line "Development Confirmed!" is always displayed when character D appears). These pseudo-consecutive win confirmation events and development confirmation events can be executed in any of the "Stage A,""StageB,""StageC," and "Pre-read Stage." In this way, by displaying one or more combinations of special events, pseudo-consecutive win confirmation events, and development confirmation events when a pseudo-consecutive win event is performed or when a pseudo-consecutive win event is not performed, the expected probability of a pseudo-consecutive win event being executed and the expected probability of development into a super reach event can be diversified. Furthermore, during a single display of fluctuations, all of the special effects, pseudo-consecutive win confirmation effects, and development confirmation effects may be executed. In this case, during a certain re-fluctuation display (for example, the first or second re-fluctuation display), there may be patterns in which the special effects are executed, patterns in which the pseudo-consecutive win confirmation effects are executed, and patterns in which the development confirmation effects are executed. Here, in the pattern in which the special effects are executed during a certain re-fluctuation display (for example, the first or second re-fluctuation display), after the special effects are executed during that re-fluctuation display, the pseudo-consecutive win confirmation effects may be executed further during that re-fluctuation display.
In the second premise technology, different types of effects may be executed depending on which performance mode is being executed. Furthermore, the type of transformation target effect that is executed differs depending on the performance mode, and the type of suggestive effect that indicates the possibility of a transformation target effect being executed, as well as whether or not such an suggestive effect is executed, also differ. In addition, in the second premise technology, when the "NEXT" of the pseudo-consecutive effect is displayed, the screen transformation effect is not executed (it is not treated as a transformation target effect) in order to let the player know that the pseudo-consecutive effect is being executed. However, it is not limited to this, and the screen transformation effect may be executed (it may be treated as a transformation target effect). In that case, it is preferable to configure it so that the possibility of it being a screen transformation effect is lower than that of other predetermined予告 effects (for example, the effect that freezes the enemy character during the super reach effect mentioned above, or the step-up予告 effect which is part of the予告 effects before entering the reach state).

<Sixth aspect>
First, whether the symbol change animation is performed or not, it is possible to form a reach state during that symbol change. Furthermore, the likelihood of the screen change animation being performed differs depending on the type of symbol change animation and the type of reach symbol when a reach occurs. Specifically, for example, the reach symbol type and the probability of the screen change animation being performed are associated so that the screen change animation is more likely to be performed when a reach occurs with the "7" symbol than when a reach occurs with the "2" symbol. More specifically, when a reach occurs with the "7" symbol, the ratio of when the screen change animation that freezes the enemy character during the super reach animation is performed versus when it is not performed is 5:5, and when a reach occurs with the "2" symbol, the ratio of when the screen change animation that freezes the enemy character during the super reach animation is performed versus when it is not performed is 2:8. The screen transformation animation may be configured to make it more likely for the "7" symbol to result in a winning combination. For example, if the screen transformation animation is performed during the step-up予告演出 (pre-announcement animation) and a winning combination is subsequently achieved, the probability of the "7" symbol resulting in a winning combination is 10%, and the probability of the "2" symbol resulting in a winning combination is 15%. However, if the screen transformation animation is not performed during the step-up予告演出 (pre-announcement animation) and a winning combination is subsequently achieved, the probability of the "7" symbol resulting in a winning combination is 1%, and the probability of the "2" symbol resulting in a winning combination is 20%.

<Seventh aspect>
In screen transformation effects, the regular decorative symbols 502 may be included in the effect layer 524 as target objects 516, but the simplified decorative symbols 504 are not included in target objects 516 and may be included in the game status layer 523 as images indicating the game status. Furthermore, even while the screen transformation effect is running, it is possible to display the volume setting image 532 for volume adjustment and adjust the volume according to the player's actions.

If the screen transformation effect is executed while the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the effect is performed, the volume setting image 532 will continue to be displayed on a different layer from the effect layer 524, namely the volume and brightness display layer 522, which is not included in the frame image that is the target of the transformation. The player can then adjust the volume.

The normal hold image 506 may be subject to deformation by the screen deformation effect, but the simplified hold image 507 is not subject to deformation by the screen deformation effect. Furthermore, since the movable mechanism 520 can be operated even while the screen deformation effect that includes the normal hold image 506 as a target is being executed, care must be taken to ensure that the visibility of the simplified hold image 507 is not obstructed by the movable mechanism 520 when viewed from the front while it is in operation. In this case, the display of the normal hold image 506 may also be designed so that its visibility is not obstructed by the movable mechanism 520, or it may be designed so that it is obstructed. Alternatively, the normal hold image 506 may not be subject to deformation by the screen deformation effect.

The system is configured to output specific sound effects when the screen transformation effect is executed. Specifically, a "ping!" sound effect is output when the screen transformation effect starts (for the first second), a "gugugu" sound effect is output while the screen transformation effect is running (from one second after the start to one second before the end), and a "smack!" sound effect is output when the screen transformation effect ends (for the last second). In this case, the sound effects at the start or end of the screen transformation effect are louder than the sound effects in the middle of the screen transformation effect, assuming the volume level is the same (this relationship is true regardless of which volume level is set), making the screen transformation effect more visually and aurally engaging. Regarding the degree/ratio of deformation of the deformation target effect, it is preferable to configure the system so that at the start or end of the screen deformation effect, the degree/ratio of deformation of the deformation target effect is small compared to before the start of the screen deformation effect (unlike volume, the reduction rate is small if shrinking occurs, and the initial positional movement distance of each vertex is short if four vertices are deformed), while in the middle of the screen deformation effect, the degree/ratio of deformation of the deformation target effect is large compared to before the start of the screen deformation effect (the reduction rate is large if shrinking occurs, and the initial positional movement distance of each vertex is long if four vertices are deformed). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create an effect with an unexpected twist where the visual contrast and auditory contrast are reversed. The volume adjustment has, for example, five levels, and the volume can be set to any of levels 1 to 5, and the effect sounds corresponding to each effect are output at the volume corresponding to the set volume level. Here, even at the same volume level, the volume will differ depending on the type of effect. For example, as mentioned above, the "Pikiiin!" sound effect at the start of the screen transformation animation (for the first second from the start) and the "Pishaan!" sound effect at the end of the screen transformation animation (for the last second from the end) are louder than the "Gugugu" sound effect during the screen transformation animation (from one second after the start to one second before the end), regardless of the volume level set (for example, at volume level 1, the "Pikiiin!" and "Pishaan!" sound effects are 30 dB and the "Gugugu" sound effect is 20 dB; at volume level 5, the "Pikiiin!" and "Pishaan!" sound effects are 80 dB and the "Gugugu" sound effect is 70 dB).
As mentioned above, the normally held image 506 and the changing image 508 may also be included in the target object 516 and displayed as targets for transformation in the screen transformation effect.
Alternatively, as shown in the game status layer 523 of Figure 33, the normally held image 506 and the changing image 508 may be specified to not be included in the target object 516 as targets for transformation in the screen transformation effect, but to be displayed in a separate layer, the game status layer 523.

<8th Specification>
If a predetermined error occurs, the performance display device 60 will display an error warning image 536 indicating that error. If an error occurs during the execution of a screen transformation effect, the error warning image 536 is not included in the frame image that is subject to transformation and is displayed on an error display layer 521, which is a different layer from the performance layer 524 on which the screen transformation effect is displayed.

The Super Reach演出 (Super Reach演出) has a first and second half, and when a screen transformation effect is performed, a red flashing effect is more likely to occur in the first half, suggesting that development to the second half, which is the so-called "hidden button" effect, is certain or highly likely. Here, the screen transformation effect is preferably performed before the Super Reach演出, for example, when the screen transformation effect is performed in the step-up予告演出 (step-up予告演出) before the reach state is reached. However, in addition, for example, the specification may be such that a screen transformation effect that freezes the enemy character is performed in the first half during the Super Reach演出, and when the screen transformation effect is performed in the first half, a red flashing effect that suggests the appearance of the hidden button effect is more likely to occur in the first half. The hidden button effect is one in which, although no button image or instructions for button operation are displayed on the screen, a specific effect (in this case, a flashing effect) appears when the player operates the effect button 109 at a predetermined timing, and this is performed in the first half. Furthermore, the light-emitting effect is an effect that changes the color of the decorative lamps 111 surrounding the effect display device 60 and the color (image color) of the light-like effect display on the effect display device 60. The expectation level increases in the order of blue → green → red (higher expectation of development to the second half or a big win). The hidden button effect can also be performed by automatically pressing the effect button 109 by holding it down. As a variation, if the screen transformation effect, which freezes the enemy character, is performed in the second half of the super reach effect rather than the first half, then when the screen transformation effect is performed in the second half, compared to when the screen transformation effect is not performed, the light-emitting color of the decorative lamps 111 surrounding the effect display device 60 and the color of the light-like effect display on the effect display device 60 are more likely to be red, rather than blue or green, suggesting a certainty or high expectation of development to the second half of the super reach effect.

When a screen transformation effect is performed, button images other than the normal color (e.g., white), such as red or rainbow-colored button images that suggest a relatively high probability of winning, are more likely to be displayed. The button images here are often the button images before entering a reach state or the button images during a super reach effect. When the player actually operates the effect button 109 while this button image is displayed, an effect other than the button image is displayed. For example, if a button image is displayed before entering a reach state and the effect button 109 is operated, a dialogue予告 effect (an effect in which the probability of winning varies depending on the content of the dialogue and the color of the speech bubble) is displayed, and if a button image is displayed during a super reach effect (towards the end of the second half) and the effect button 109 is operated, a cut-in effect (an effect in which a cut-in screen of an ally character is displayed, and the probability of winning varies depending on the type of character displayed in the cut-in and the color of the cut-in) is performed. Here, when a non-standard colored button image is displayed rather than a standard colored button image, a type of effect with a higher probability of a big win (for example, a red dialogue予告 effect rather than a blue dialogue予告 effect, and a red cut-in effect rather than a blue cut-in effect) is more likely to be displayed as a result of operating the effect button 109. In addition, in the second premise technology, if a screen transformation effect is executed before the button image is displayed, a non-standard colored button image is more likely to be displayed than a standard colored button image compared to when the screen transformation effect is not executed. An effect that instructs (prompts) the player to operate by displaying a button image is called an operation instruction effect (button effect).
Furthermore, the second prerequisite technology includes a button appearance prompt, which is a prompt that builds anticipation for whether or not an operation instruction prompt (button prompt) will be initiated. In this button appearance prompt, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the prompt button 109 is displayed on the screen in advance, creating the expectation that a button image resembling the prompt button 109 will appear afterward (i.e., that the operation instruction prompt will be initiated). In this button appearance prompt, if the silhouette image of the prompt button 109 gradually changes into a button image, the prompt is successful. On the other hand, in this button appearance prompt, if the silhouette image of the prompt button 109 fades out of the screen, the prompt is unsuccessful. Note that when displaying a button image, it is not always necessary to perform such a button appearance prompt; the button image may be displayed directly without going through the button appearance prompt. Here, the button appearance prompt may have multiple display modes, and in such a configuration, for example, the button appearance prompt with a red effect may be configured to have a higher probability of changing into a button image than the button appearance prompt with a blue effect. Furthermore, as another variation, when a button appearance prompt is executed, it may always change to a button image. In such a configuration, the button appearance prompt with a red effect may be configured to have a higher probability of a big win than the button appearance prompt with a blue effect. Alternatively, multiple types of button images may be provided (for example, a blue button image and a red button image, with the red button image being more likely to trigger a high-probability prompt than the blue button image, for example, the red dialogue prompt being more likely to be triggered than the blue dialogue prompt), and the button appearance prompt with a red effect may be configured to result in a specific button image (for example, a red button image) rather than the button appearance prompt with a blue effect. If the button appearance prompt is always changed to a button image when it is executed, then in addition to the above, the button appearance prompt may be configured so that a longer button appearance prompt (e.g., 4 seconds) has a higher probability of a big win than a shorter button appearance prompt (e.g., 2 seconds), or a longer button appearance prompt (e.g., 4 seconds) may be configured so that a specific button image (e.g., a red button image) is displayed than a shorter button appearance prompt (e.g., 2 seconds). Furthermore, if the button appearance prompt is configured to have multiple display modes, the button appearance prompt may be configured so that a button appearance prompt with a higher probability of a big win is more likely to be executed in the latter half of the variation display (a specific timing after a reach) than in the first half of the variation display (a predetermined timing before a reach), or the button appearance prompt may not be executed in the first half of the variation display (a predetermined timing before a reach), and may only be executed in the latter half of the variation display (a specific timing after a reach).
During the execution of the operation instruction performance, an operation validity period (input validity time) is set during which the operation of the performance button 109 is valid. The operation validity period is the period during which the operation of the performance button 109 is validly accepted when it is operated. "Validly accepting the operation of the performance button 109" means that when the performance button 109 is operated, the operation of the performance button 109 is validly accepted by the sub-board 300, and a predetermined process is performed based on that valid operation. The predetermined process is the process of advancing the dialogue予告 performance triggered by the operation of the performance button 109. During this operation validity period, the performance button 109 (the LED element built into the performance button 109) is illuminated, and a button image resembling the performance button 109 and an indicator image visually showing the remaining period of the operation validity period are displayed on the screen to notify that the operation of the performance button 109 is valid or to prompt an operation input. In addition, a circular effect image emitting sparks (referred to as the "specific image") is displayed on the screen around the button image. This specific image gradually enlarges as the operation validity period elapses. If the performance button 109 is operated during the operation validity period, the sequence progresses to a dialogue予告 (preview) sequence. When the performance button 109 is operated, the display mode of the specific image is forcibly changed to the final display mode. The final display mode of the specific image is the display mode when the specific image is displayed at its maximum enlargement. This operation instruction sequence (button sequence) is a sequence in which the specific image is displayed while the button image and indicator image are displayed (during the operation validity period) (button sequence pattern A), whereas other button sequences of the second premise technology (button sequences other than the said operation instruction sequence) are sequences in which the specific image is not displayed while the button image and indicator image are displayed (during the operation validity period) (button sequence pattern B).
In the dialogue予告演出 (dialogue予告演出), if one of several characters (the aforementioned ally characters and enemy characters) appears and speaks a predetermined line of dialogue, a specific image is continuously displayed around this character in its final display state. In this dialogue予告演出, the display state (display color) of the line spoken by the character indicates the likelihood of a big win. In this embodiment, three types of display colors for the dialogue are set: "blue,""red," and "giraffe pattern," and the likelihood of a big win increases by one level in the order of "blue"<"red"<"giraffepattern." When the dialogue予告演出 is started (when the effect button 109 is operated), the button image and indicator image are hidden, but the specific image is continuously displayed. As a variation of this embodiment, the dialogue予告演出 may be configured as a step-up type演出. This step-up effect divides the display process of the予告演出 (preview effect) into multiple stages, and the number of stages displayed is variable so that the more stages there are, the higher the expectation of a big win. In the second prerequisite technology, it is an advanced type of effect in which the effect (characters and dialogue) changes in stages according to a predetermined order, and the level of expectation of a big win is suggested or announced according to the number of stages of development. For example, the step-up effect may consist of two effect steps (step-up 1, step-up 2), and the effect (characters and dialogue) displayed in the first effect step, step-up 1, may be different from the effect (characters and dialogue) displayed in the second effect step, step-up 2.
The flow of the performance is as follows:
(A) When the button appearance prompt is initiated, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the 109 button will be displayed on the screen. When this silhouette image gradually changes into the button image and the prompt is successful, the operation instruction prompt will be initiated.
(B) When the operation instruction animation is started, the validity period for operating the animation button 109 is set, the animation button 109 is illuminated, and a button image resembling the animation button 109 and an indicator image visually showing the remaining validity period are displayed on the screen. In addition, a specific circular image (effect image) emitting sparks is displayed around the button image. This display prompts the user to operate the animation button 109 within the validity period for button operation.
(C) As the button operation validity period elapses, the display mode (remaining period) of the indicator image changes, and a specific image is enlarged and displayed around the button image. At this time, if the performance button 109 is operated within the operation validity period, the display switches from the operation instruction performance to the dialogue予告 performance. At this time, the button image and indicator image are hidden. On the other hand, the effect image is forcibly changed to its final display mode and continues to be displayed.
(D) When the dialogue予告演出 begins, a character and the line "This is a big chance" are displayed on the screen, and the color of the displayed line indicates the likelihood of a big win. A specific image is continuously displayed around the character and line in its final display form. By displaying this specific image across the operation instruction演出 and the dialogue予告演出, it is possible to suggest to the player that the dialogue予告演出 will occur when the effect button 109 is operated (it is suggested that this button effect is the dialogue予告演出).
Furthermore, as a variation of the above embodiment, the execution of the button appearance prompting effect may be determined by lottery, and the expected probability of a big win in the spin display may be relatively higher when the button appearance prompting effect is executed compared to when it is not executed. Alternatively, the execution time of the button appearance prompting effect (display time of the silhouette image) may be longer, which may relatively increase the expected probability of a big win in the spin display, or a highly probable effect indicating whether or not it is a big win may occur as a result of the button operation. In that case, when the dialogue予告演出 (button appearance prompting effect) is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch (a specific timing after the reach, which is the latter half of the spin display as described above), it is preferable that the duration of the button appearance prompting effect (display time of the silhouette image) is set to be longer than the effective period of operation of the effect button 109. Conversely, the duration of the button appearance prompting effect (display time of the silhouette image) may be set to be shorter than the effective period of operation of the effect button 109. Furthermore, as another variation, multiple display modes for the button image may be provided (for example, a blue button image, a red button image, a rainbow-colored button image, a large button image, a small button image, etc.). In that case, the possibility of executing the button appearance prompting effect and the duration of the effect if executed may be made different depending on the display mode of the button image to be executed afterward. Furthermore, as a further variation, the dialogue notification effect may be made executable and (the button image may be displayed) even during the execution of one or more fluctuation displays (pre-read fluctuation displays which are fluctuations before the target), and the possibility of the button appearance prompting effect being executed during the execution of the pre-read fluctuation display may be lower than during the execution of the fluctuation display when the pre-read target's reserved ball is consumed (the fluctuation display), and the possibility of a high-expectation button appearance prompting effect (such as the button appearance prompting effect with a red effect as described above or a long-duration (for example, 4 seconds) button appearance prompting effect) being executed during the execution of the pre-read fluctuation display may be lower than during the execution of the fluctuation display when the pre-read target's reserved ball is consumed (the fluctuation display). As another variation, the button appearance prompt may be omitted during the first half of the display (a predetermined timing before a reach) (or a low-probability button appearance prompt may be omitted instead of a high-probability button appearance prompt), and the button appearance prompt may be omitted during the second half of the display (a specific timing after a reach) (or a high-probability button appearance prompt may be omitted instead of a low-probability button appearance prompt). In this case, the longer the period between the predetermined timing before a reach (the first half of the display) and the specific timing after a reach (the second half of the display) (for example, 90 seconds is better than 60 seconds), the higher the probability of a big win. Alternatively, the button image at the specific timing after a reach (the second half of the display) may be more likely to be a high-probability image (for example, a red button image is more likely than a blue button image). Furthermore, the button appearance may be configured to use pattern A during the first half of the display (a predetermined timing before a reach) and pattern B during the second half of the display (a specific timing after a reach). Furthermore, as will be explained in more detail later, the timing for displaying the button image at a predetermined timing before a reach, which is the first half of the variable display, may be set to start from the beginning of the variable display, while the timing for displaying the button image at a specific timing after a reach, which is the second half of the variable display, may be set to start from the beginning of a specific performance (normal reach performance or super reach performance), and the timing for displaying the button image at a specific timing after a reach, which is the second half of the variable display, may be set to be longer than the timing for displaying the button image at a predetermined timing before a reach, which is the first half of the variable display.

A screen transformation effect may be executed as a pre-announcement effect based on a prediction. When configured in this way, the screen transformation effect will not be executed from the symbol change currently in progress at the new ball entry timing, which is the pre-announcement timing, but will be executed from the next change (the change following the change in which a new ball entered). Specifically, in the change in which a new ball entered, there is a normal symbol change (the normal decorative symbol 502 changes without the screen changing), and immediately after the start of the next change (for example, 0.5 seconds after the start of the change), there is also a normal symbol change (the normal decorative symbol 502 changes without the screen changing), but thereafter, the symbol change continues with the screen transformation effect executed until the middle of the target change that was the target of the pre-announcement (for example, 10 seconds after the start of the target change). A symbol change with the screen transformation effect executed is, for example, the display of the normal decorative symbol 502 with the screen tilted or the screen reduced in size. As mentioned above, during target changes that are the target of the pre-read, the screen transformation animation continues until a certain point, after which it switches to the normal symbol change animation. This switch occurs at least before the super reach animation develops. Even if a power outage or other power failure occurs during the screen transformation animation that continues across multiple symbol change animations, and the power is restored, the original screen transformation animation will generally not be restored during the pre-target animation. However, the screen transformation animation may be executed again during target changes that were the target of the pre-read.

If an error occurs before the execution of the screen transformation effect, preventing the pre-transformation effect from starting for the frame image to be transformed, the screen transformation effect will not be executed even when the pre-transformation effect is due to start. For example, this could occur if a malfunction occurs in the timer used by the timing means 307 of the sub-board 300 to time the effect, preventing the pre-transformation effect from starting for the frame image to be transformed. As a variation, even if the pre-transformation effect fails to start due to a timer malfunction or other issue, the screen transformation effect may be executed by targeting only the currently displayed background effect.

The standby demo screen is displayed on the effects layer 524, but it is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation effects. In the modified example, the standby demo screen may be displayed on the game status layer 523.
If the screen transformation effect is designed to be executed in response to the player's operation of the effect button 109, the start timing of the screen transformation effect depends on the start timing of the operation of the effect button 109. The button image is also displayed on the effect layer 524, but it is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation effect, and the screen transformation effect is executed after the effect button 109 is operated and the button image is erased. In a modified example, the button image may be displayed on the game status layer 523. Furthermore, in a further modified example, if the timing for displaying the button image is reached while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the button image may also be subject to the screen transformation effect (transformation target), and the effect displayed when the effect button 109 is operated while the button image is displayed may also be subject to the screen transformation effect (transformation target). If a button image starts to appear while a screen transformation effect is running, and the button image finishes displaying earlier than the screen transformation effect finishes, the button image will be displayed as part of the screen transformation effect from start to finish. However, if the button image finishes displaying later than the screen transformation effect finishes, the button image will be displayed as part of the screen transformation effect from start to finish, and then displayed in its normal form (without transformation) until it finishes. This also applies to effects that are displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 109 while a button image is displayed. If the effect that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 109 while a button image is displayed starts to be displayed while a screen transformation effect is in progress, and the timing of the end of the effect that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 109 while a button image is displayed is earlier than the timing of the end of the execution of the screen transformation effect, the effect that is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 109 while a button image is displayed will be displayed as a screen transformation effect from the start until partway through, and then displayed in its normal form (without transformation) until it ends.

<Ninth aspect>
While a screen transformation animation is running, even if a hold corresponding to a new ball entry occurs and the prior information corresponding to that hold is information that would allow for the execution of a pre-announcement animation (for example, a hold with a high expectation that would allow for the execution of a super reach animation, or a hold that would result in a jackpot), the execution of the pre-announcement animation is restricted. For example, while a screen transformation animation is running, the system may be controlled not to execute a pre-announcement animation triggered by a new ball entry, or it may be controlled not to execute pre-announcements at all.

<Tenth aspect>
When a screen transformation effect is performed, the simplified decorative pattern 504 is displayed in a way that it is included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523, which is not the target of transformation in the screen transformation effect. Therefore, the simplified decorative pattern 504, which was displayed in a position within the effect screen 500, i.e., overlapping the frame image 514, may be displayed outside the frame image 514 when the frame image 514 is reduced in the screen transformation effect, for example, overlapping the special first image, the frame image 510, or the second image, the background image 518 (such a display relationship occurs at a predetermined timing during the execution of the screen transformation effect (for example, in the middle)). On the other hand, the normal decorative pattern 502 is not included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523 in the screen transformation effect, but may be included in the frame image that is the target of transformation in the effect layer 524. Therefore, in the screen transformation sequence, the decorative pattern 502 may be displayed in a position that overlaps with the special first image, the framed image 514, but not in a position that overlaps with the second image, the background image 518. It is preferable that this display relationship is always satisfied while the screen transformation sequence is being executed, but as a variation, such a display relationship may be specified at least at a predetermined timing during the execution of the screen transformation sequence (for example, in the middle of the sequence) (otherwise, it may be displayed in a position that overlaps with the background image 518). Furthermore, as another variation, the decorative pattern 502 may also be displayed in a form that is included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523.

When a screen transformation effect is executed, the simplified hold image 507 is displayed in a form that includes it within the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523, which is not the target of the transformation in the screen transformation effect. On the other hand, the normal hold image 506 is not included within the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523 in the screen transformation effect, but may be included within the frame image that is the target of the transformation in the effect layer 524. As a variation, the normal hold image 506 may also be displayed in a form that includes it within the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523.

As mentioned above, in addition to the normal movement (e.g., movement from top to bottom) of the decorative symbols 502, if the display is configured to perform predetermined actions (movement at the start of movement, movement during temporary stop, movement when a reach is established, shaking movement) at the start of movement, immediately after a temporary stop, after a reach is established, and during a temporary stop, then it is also possible to configure the system to perform a jackpot action, such as enlarging the symbols when three symbols are lined up to form a winning combination, like "777". In such a configuration, the screen transformation effect is not performed during the jackpot action, but it is preferable to enable the screen transformation effect during the execution of other predetermined actions. Furthermore, while the jackpot action is being performed, the jackpot action is not performed, but it is preferable to enable the execution of other predetermined actions.

If a new hold occurs during the execution of a screen transformation animation, the system may specify that the normal hold image 506 is also included in the transformation of the screen transformation animation, or it may specify that the normal hold image 506 is not included in the transformation of the screen transformation animation. This specification is preferable for the period of variation leading up to the development of a Super Reach animation. Since the normal hold image 506 is hidden during the display of the Super Reach animation, it is not included in the transformation of the screen transformation animation in either case when the screen transformation animation is executed during the Super Reach animation. Furthermore, the duration of the process of transforming the frame image in the screen transformation animation (i.e., the execution period of the screen transformation animation) is set to be longer than the animation display time when the hold occurs, regardless of the type of animation the transformation target is.

<11th aspect>
When a hold is stored during a normal performance, the performance display device 60 displays a normal hold image 506 indicating the number of holds. Among the normal hold images 506, the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the lottery value at which the symbol variation display started is switched to a variation image 508 indicating that the symbol variation is in progress. Here, while the screen transformation performance is in progress, the normal hold image 506 is hidden, while the variation image 508 continues to be displayed. One of the screen transformation performances, the frame still performance, is a performance that freezes the previously displayed performance as if it were a pause display and then transforms the frame image which is a still image. For the sake of the performance, it is preferable not to include moving images in the frame image, so the normal hold image 506 is hidden. On the other hand, the variation image 508 does not increase or decrease during the symbol variation, so it continues to be displayed even while the screen transformation performance is in progress. In a modified example, the variation image 508 may also be hidden while the screen transformation performance is in progress.

While the screen transformation animation is running, the simplified hold image 507 continues to be displayed. As a result, even if a new hold occurs during the screen transformation animation, the regular hold image 506 is not displayed, but the number of hold items shown in the simplified hold image 507 increases without interfering with the screen transformation animation.

When executing the frame-freezing effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, the frame image, which is a still image created by pausing the previously displayed effect, may include the normal hold image 506. If an animation display was being executed when a hold occurred, that animation display is also included in the frame image in a static state. The display of the fluctuating image 508 may also be included in the frame image, and its animation display is also included in the frame image in a static state. Note that the simplified hold image 507 continues to be displayed while the screen transformation effect is being executed. As a result, even if a new hold occurs during the execution of the screen transformation effect, the normal hold image 506 will not be displayed additionally, but the number of hold items indicated by the simplified hold image 507 will increase without interfering with the screen transformation effect.

When executing a frame-freezing effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, the frame image, which is a still image created by pausing the previously displayed effect, may be hidden and not include the normal decorative symbols 502. On the other hand, the simplified decorative symbols 504 continue to be displayed in a variable state. Note that the time it takes for one rotation of the simplified decorative symbols 504 to change (as mentioned above, for example, if the types of simplified decorative symbols 504 are "1" to "7", and the display changes as "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ..., then one rotation is from the first "123" to the next "123") is longer than the time it takes for the effect to remain still during the screen transformation effect. Thus, if it can be recognized that the simplified decorative symbols 504 have completed at least one rotation during the screen transformation effect, it is possible to distinguish whether the current game state is paused or truly stopped (not progressing).

Furthermore, when performing a frame-freezing effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, the regular decorative symbols 502 may be included in the frame image, which is a still image that freezes the previously displayed effect as if it were paused. In that case, the regular decorative symbols 502 are fixed in display. That is, the regular decorative symbols 502 do not change or animate. On the other hand, the simplified decorative symbols 504 continue to change. Note that the time it takes for one rotation of the simplified decorative symbols 504 to change (as mentioned above, for example, if the types of simplified decorative symbols 504 are "1" to "7", and they change in the sequence "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ... then one rotation is from the first "123" to the next "123") is longer than the time it takes for one rotation of the simplified decorative symbols 504 to change. Thus, if it can be recognized that the simplified decorative symbol 504 completes at least one rotation during the screen transformation animation, it is possible to determine whether the current game state is simply paused or truly stopped (not progressing).

In a frame-freezing effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, a still image obtained by color-inverting the previously displayed effect as if it were paused may be included in the target object 516 as the frame-free image 514, and the freezing and color inversion may be processed simultaneously, or the transformation may be processed simultaneously. However, while a frame-freezing effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, is being executed, another frame-freezing effect can be performed that targets a frame image, which is a still image obtained by pausing the effect as if it were paused, but the transformation process will not start while the effect is frozen.
Even while the screen transformation effect is running, the volume setting image 532 can be displayed and the volume can be adjusted.
If the screen transformation animation is performed while the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the animation occurs, the display of the volume setting image 532 will continue, and the player can adjust the volume simultaneously.

If an error occurs before the execution of the screen transformation effect, and the error warning image 536 is displayed, the display of the error warning image 536 will continue. Even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume (the specified volume), the player can adjust the volume simultaneously, and the volume setting image 532 can be displayed on the volume/light intensity display layer 522 in Figure 33. However, the volume setting image 532 is not included in the transformation target of the screen transformation effect. More specifically, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player during the execution of the screen transformation effect, and further player operation is performed during the execution of the screen transformation effect and while the volume setting image 532 is displayed, resulting in volume adjustment and a change in the display of the volume setting image 532, then both the volume setting image 532 during the execution of the screen transformation effect and before the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 during the execution of the screen transformation effect and after the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 2") will be displayed in a non-transformed display mode. Furthermore, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player immediately before the screen transformation animation is executed, and the screen transformation animation is executed immediately afterward (while the volume setting image 532 is displayed), and the player performs an operation while the volume setting image 532 is displayed and the screen transformation animation is executed, thereby adjusting the volume and changing the display of the volume setting image 532, then both the volume setting image 532 before the screen transformation animation is executed and before the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 after the screen transformation animation is executed and after the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 2") will be displayed in the non-transformed display mode.

If a screen transformation effect, specifically a frame-freezing effect (an effect that temporarily pauses the previously displayed effect), is executed during the animation display of the normal hold image 506 when a hold occurs, and the display of the normal hold image 506 is to be maintained, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 may be stopped (i.e., the display of the normal hold image 506 continues, but without animation). The animation display of the normal hold image 506 referred to here is the animation display when a hold occurs normally, and excludes displays that change the color or pattern of the normal hold image 506 as a pre-announcement effect.

In screen transformation effects, when the frame images of the previously displayed video (a single frame image that is frozen in time, such as a paused display, in the case of a still-frame effect, or multiple frame images that are switched sequentially, such as in a video effect) are to be subjected to color inversion (transformation), the volume setting image 532 can be displayed even during color inversion, and volume adjustment can be performed in parallel via the player's operation. Furthermore, the subsequent "color inversion" also applies to both the frame image that is frozen in time, such as a paused display, in the still-frame effect, and the multiple frame images that are switched sequentially in the video effect, as targets for color inversion processing.
If the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the color inversion is performed, the display of the volume setting image 532 will continue even if the color inversion is performed afterward, and the player can adjust the volume in parallel.
If an error occurs before color inversion is performed and an error warning image 536 is displayed, the display of the error warning image 536 will continue even if color inversion is performed afterward. Even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, the volume can be adjusted in parallel through the player's operation, and the volume setting image 532 can be displayed on the volume light intensity display layer 522 in Figure 33. However, the volume setting image 532 is not subject to color inversion. More specifically, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player's operation while color inversion is being performed, and further player operation is performed while color inversion is being performed and the volume setting image 532 is displayed, resulting in volume adjustment and a change in the display of the volume setting image 532, then both the volume setting image 532 during color inversion and before the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 during color inversion and after the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 2") will be displayed in a non-color-inverted display mode. Furthermore, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player immediately before the color inversion is performed, and the color inversion is performed immediately afterward (while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed), and the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 changes as the player operates while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed and the color inversion is being performed, then both the volume setting image 532 before the color inversion and before the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 after the color inversion and after the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 2") will be displayed in a non-color-inverted display mode.
If a color inversion occurs during the animation display of the normal hold image 506 when a hold occurs, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 may be stopped if the display of the normal hold image 506 is to be maintained (i.e., the display of the normal hold image 506 continues, but it is displayed without animation). The animation display of the normal hold image 506 referred to here is the animation display when a hold occurs as usual, and excludes displays that change the color or pattern of the normal hold image 506 as a pre-announcement effect.

<Twelfth aspect>
Figure 35 schematically shows multiple buffer regions obtained by dividing the frame buffer.
The performance display control means 305 includes a frame buffer 338 for temporarily storing frame images that constitute the moving image to be displayed on the performance display device 60. The frame buffer 338 is divided into five buffer areas, each with a capacity to store frame images: a first buffer area 540, a second buffer area 542, a third buffer area 544, a fourth buffer area 546, and a fifth buffer area 548.
In the effect pattern that executes the screen transformation effect, for example, three buffer areas are used: the first buffer area 540, the second buffer area 542, and the third buffer area 544.

Figure 36 schematically shows the relationship between the display size of the frame image and the capacity of the frame buffer area.
The frame buffer 338 of the second prerequisite technology includes at least a first buffer area 540 with a capacity to store a frame image of a first display size exceeding the screen area size of the performance display device 60, and a second buffer area 542, which is a different area from the first buffer area 540 and has a capacity to store a frame image of a second display size that is the same as or less than the screen area size of the performance display device 60. As schematically shown in Figure 36, the first buffer area 540 has a capacity to store an image of the target object 516 (i.e., the "frame image of the first display size" described above). The second buffer area 542 has a capacity to store an image within a frame 514 (i.e., the "frame image of the second display size" described above), but it does not have a capacity to store the entire target object 516. When the image of the target object 516 is displayed at 100% size, the display size exceeds the screen area size of the performance display device 60, and mainly the frame image 510 is outside the screen area. As a result, in reality, almost only the portion of the image 514 within the frame is displayed on the performance display device 60 so that it is visible to the player. In other words, when the target object 516 is displayed at 100% size, most of the frame image 510 is not displayed on the performance display device 60, or even if part of it is displayed, it is hidden by the center decoration 64 and is almost invisible to the player. At least when displaying an effect that may be subject to screen deformation effects, the first buffer area 540 is used as the frame buffer, and when displaying an effect that is not subject to screen deformation effects, the second buffer area 542 is used as the frame buffer. Multiple types of effect patterns include a first special effect pattern which defines an effect that may be subject to screen deformation effects, and a second special effect pattern which defines an effect that is not subject to screen deformation effects.

As shown in Figure 35, the third buffer area 544, the fourth buffer area 546, and the fifth buffer area 548 also have the same capacity as the second buffer area 542 and are capable of storing the frame image 514, but not the entire target object 516. Thus, only the first buffer area 540 is capable of storing the target object 516, including the frame image 510, while the other buffer areas are limited to storing the frame image 514, but not the entire target object 516. This allows for the securing of five buffer areas even with a frame buffer 338 that does not necessarily have abundant data capacity, by keeping the capacity of each buffer area to the minimum necessary. Furthermore, this avoids conflicts in the use of buffer areas during rendering, suppressing the processing load while efficiently diversifying the effects.

The first special effect pattern is a defined effect pattern in which a first special effect is displayed on the performance display device 60 by sequentially generating a new frame image by combining an image obtained by transforming a frame image of a first display size stored in the first buffer area 540 at a predetermined timing so that it can be displayed within the screen area of the performance display device 60, an image showing the game situation, and a background image, and storing it in the first buffer area 540. The second special effect pattern is a defined effect pattern in which a second special effect is different from the first special effect, by sequentially generating a new frame image by combining an image obtained by transforming a frame image of a second display size stored in the second buffer area 542 at a predetermined timing, an image showing the game situation, and a background image, and storing it in the second buffer area 542, and storing it in the second special effect pattern in which a second special effect is displayed on the performance display device 60.
For each of the multiple special effect patterns, it is determined which of the multiple buffer areas will be used as the frame buffer.

<The 13th aspect>
For example, the first special effect pattern uses the first buffer area 540, the second special effect pattern uses the second buffer area 542, and the third special effect pattern uses the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546. In this way, multiple types of special effect patterns can be defined that use different buffer areas according to the size of the frame image to be transformed by the screen transformation effect, allowing for diversity in effects while maintaining the efficiency of the drawing process and the utilization efficiency of the frame buffer 338.
In the fourth special effect pattern, the first buffer area 540 is specified to be used in the same way as the first special effect pattern, and in the fifth special effect pattern, the second buffer area 542 is specified to be used in the same way as the second special effect pattern. In this way, there may be multiple types of special effect patterns in which the buffer areas used overlap.
The first and second special effect patterns are not executed simultaneously (due to the design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if executed within the same variation, their execution timings cannot overlap). Similarly, the fourth and fifth special effect patterns are not executed simultaneously (due to the design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if executed within the same variation, their execution timings cannot overlap). The third special effect pattern is not executed simultaneously with the first, second, fourth, and fifth special effect patterns (due to the design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if executed within the same variation, their execution timings cannot overlap).

For multiple special effect patterns that are scheduled to be displayed simultaneously (designed to be executable within the same fluctuation and whose execution timings may overlap within the same fluctuation), it is stipulated that each will use a different buffer area. However, for multiple special effect patterns that are not scheduled to be displayed simultaneously (designed not to be executed within the same fluctuation, or whose execution timings cannot overlap even if executed within the same fluctuation), if the display of an effect by one special effect pattern is decided while an effect by another special effect pattern is being displayed, the effect by the later-decided special effect pattern will be given priority over the effect by the first-displayed special effect pattern. For example, if the first special effect pattern and the fourth special effect pattern, both using the same first buffer area 540, are to be executed simultaneously, the effect of the first-displayed special effect pattern will be stopped, and the effect of the later-ordered special effect pattern will be given priority and started. Similarly, if a second special effect pattern and a fifth special effect pattern using the same second buffer area 542 are executed simultaneously, the execution of the first special effect pattern is stopped, and the execution of the later-commanded special effect pattern is prioritized.

Here, "canceling the execution of the special effect pattern that was being executed earlier" may also mean canceling the execution of the screen transformation effect that was being executed up to that point and returning to playback of the video image before the start of the screen transformation effect. This makes it possible to avoid processing problems that may occur when the buffer area used is conflicted, even if the number of special effect patterns that are the target of the transformation by the screen transformation effect is increased. Also, even if the screen transformation effects overlap, by canceling the screen transformation effect and switching the priority of the effect, it is possible to maintain normal image processing and reduce the burden on image processing. As a variation, the design may be configured so that multiple types of special effect patterns that use the same buffer area are executed simultaneously (i.e., they may be designed in advance to be executed simultaneously), and in such a configuration, for example, if the first special effect pattern and the fourth special effect pattern that use the same first buffer area 540 are executed simultaneously, the execution of the special effect pattern that was being executed earlier is canceled, and the execution of the special effect pattern that was commanded later is given priority and started. Similarly, if a second special effect pattern and a fifth special effect pattern using the same second buffer area 542 are executed simultaneously, the execution of the first special effect pattern is stopped, and the execution of the later-ordered special effect pattern is prioritized.

Figure 37 schematically illustrates the process of transforming a frame image stored in a buffer area. First, at a predetermined timing when the screen transformation effect begins, the frame image stored in the first buffer area 540 of the frame buffer 338 is read into the drawing memory 334 (S900). This frame image is the target object 516, including the frame image 514 and the frame image 510, and is a single frame from the previously displayed video. This frame image is read into the drawing memory 334 and transformed. While the frame images following the previously displayed video were originally intended to be displayed, from this point onward, new frame images generated through transformation and compositing processes are displayed instead. Therefore, in the case of a still frame effect, the enemy character included in this frame image, which was previously displayed in motion, becomes still in this frame image, resembling a captured image from the video. In the case of a video effect, by sequentially switching the frame images read into the drawing memory 334, the enemy character included in those frame images continues to be displayed in motion.

When the target object 516 is stored in the first buffer area 540 and displayed on the performance display device 60, the frame image 510 is located outside the screen area of the performance display device 60 and is practically invisible to the player, or only a small portion is visible. By shrinking the target object 516 (S902) so that the frame image 510 fits within the screen area of the performance display device 60, the entire target object 516 becomes visible. For convenience, in this figure, the size of the target object 516 in S10 is shown as 100%, and in S12, the target object 516 is shown as having been shrunk to approximately 80%. However, in the actual animation rendering process, the process does not involve an instantaneous switch from 100% to 80%, but rather a gradual reduction process where, microscopically, the rendering is repeated, for example, by reducing the size by 1% each time a new frame image is generated. The foreground image 517 and background image 518 are then superimposed on the shrunk target object 516 (S904). In this figure, an example of a foreground image 517 is shown where a lightning bolt-shaped object is superimposed as the foreground of the target object 516. However, other images indicating the game status, such as simple decorative patterns 504 and simple hold images 507, are also superimposed as foreground images, with their content updated for each frame image. In S14, the superimposed images are combined to form the next frame image 519 (S906), which is then written to the first buffer area 540, becoming the next frame image that constitutes the moving image.

The target object 516 in S14 is gradually transformed each time a subsequent frame image is drawn. For example, the target object 516 in S14 is color-inverted, another foreground image 517 is superimposed on it (S908), and images indicating the game status, such as the updated simplified decorative symbols 504 and simplified hold images 507, and the background image 518 are superimposed. These superimposed images are combined to form a new frame image 519 (S910), which is written to the first buffer area 540, becoming the next frame image that constitutes the moving image. Subsequently, for each subsequent frame image, the target object 516 is sequentially transformed to superimpose the foreground image 517 and background image 518, and updated images indicating the game status, such as the simplified decorative symbols 504 and simplified hold images 507, are superimposed (S912). This process synthesizes new frame images to constitute the moving image.

<14th aspect>
The first and fourth special effect patterns create a single effect image consisting of a main image portion with a display size equivalent to the screen area size of the effect display device 60 and a frame image 510 formed to surround the outer periphery of the main image portion. Initially, a new frame image is generated by sequentially creating a composite image of the effect image and an image showing the game situation, with the display ratio and shape of the effect image changed so that at least a portion of the frame image 510, which is located outside the screen area of the effect display device 60, can be displayed within the screen area of the effect display device 60, thereby displaying a moving image on the effect display device 60. In this way, when executing the screen transformation effect, the frame image 510, which is normally difficult to see, is deliberately shown while being transformed by scaling, shaking, etc., to create an even more dynamic effect. If the frame image 510 is to display a normal hold image 506, the screen transformation effect may also transform the image including the normal hold image 506.

The second, third, and fifth special performance patterns are used to create a single performance image using a main image portion with a display size equivalent to the screen area size of the performance display device 60. A new frame image is then generated by sequentially combining an image with a display ratio and shape changed from the performance image with an image showing the game status, thereby displaying a moving image on the performance display device 60.
The frame image 510 is not displayed in the second, third, and fifth special effect patterns. Furthermore, the frame image 510 is not displayed in certain situations, such as during the standby demo screen or during a jackpot.

<15th form>
Figure 38 shows an example screen of the third special effect pattern. The third special effect pattern is an effect that includes a screen transformation effect whose transformation timing is determined by the operation input of the effect button 109. In the third special effect pattern, a button image 550 is displayed at a predetermined timing to prompt the player to operate the effect button 109. When the player operates the effect button 109, the frame image transformation is executed by the screen transformation effect. The button image 550 is displayed multiple times, and each time the effect button 109 is operated according to the button image 550, the frame image transformation by the screen transformation effect is executed.

In the third special effect pattern, when the effect button 109 is pressed, a new frame image is sequentially generated by combining a deformed image of the frame image at the time of the input with an image showing the game status, and stored in the first buffer area 540, thereby displaying a moving image on the effect display device 60. Furthermore, when the effect button 109 is pressed again, a new frame image is sequentially generated by combining a deformed image of the frame image stored in the first buffer area 540 at the time of the input with an image showing the game status, and stored in the second buffer area 542, thereby displaying a moving image on the effect display device 60.

Figure 39 schematically illustrates the process of using the buffer area in the third special effect pattern. In the third special effect pattern, each time the player operates the effect button 109, frame images are alternately stored in the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546. Specifically, the third buffer area 544 sequentially stores the frame images of the currently displayed moving image, and displays the button image 550 at a predetermined timing (S920). When the player operates the button image 550, the frame image is read from the third buffer area 544 (S922), an image with transformation applied by the screen transformation effect is generated (S924), and stored in the fourth buffer area 546 as the next frame image (S926). The fourth buffer area 546 sequentially stores the frame images of the moving image, and displays the button image 550 again at a predetermined timing.

When the player operates the button image 550, a frame image is read from the fourth buffer area 546 (S928), an image with transformation applied by the screen transformation effect is generated (S930), and it is stored in the third buffer area 544 as the next frame image (S932). The third buffer area 544 sequentially stores the frame images of the moving image, and the button image 550 is displayed again at a predetermined timing. When the player operates the button image 550, a frame image is read from the third buffer area 544 (S934), an image with transformation applied by the screen transformation effect is generated (S936), and it is stored in the fourth buffer area 546 as the next frame image (S938). The fourth buffer area 546 sequentially stores the frame images of the moving image.

In this way, the frame image, which has been moved slightly, is repeatedly stored by alternately using the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546. This allows for a balance between the dynamism of the animation and the visual confirmation of its progress, ensuring that the player can clearly see the animation, such as the animation button 109 and the images indicating the game status, while maintaining the sense of dynamism during the animation's execution. Furthermore, when executing computationally intensive animations such as repeated screen transformations, the processing load is distributed and malfunctions can be avoided by dividing the buffer area into multiple sections and processing them alternately.

In the third special effect pattern, the button image 550 is not included in the transformation caused by the screen transformation effect.
A sixth special effect pattern may be included. The effect produced by the sixth special effect pattern is not subject to the transformation by the screen transformation effect, but includes an effect that makes it appear as if the screen transformation effect has been performed. However, since it is not a screen transformation effect, both the first display element and the second display element are operated in an effect manner, but the effect is not one in which the first display element and the second display element are perfectly synchronized, as in the screen transformation effect (for example, the first display element is the background display, and the second display element is usually a decorative pattern 502 or a display item specific to that effect).

Furthermore, during the execution of the special game in the second prerequisite technology, a count-up animation can be performed on the screen of the performance display device 60 based on the detection of balls entering the large prize pocket in the special game, which counts up the total number of prize balls (for example, if the number of prize balls currently acquired is "2000" and there are 15 prize balls, the animation will count up by 1 each time, such as 2000 → 2001 → 2002 → ... 2015). In addition, when the number of prize balls displayed in the count-up animation reaches a specific number, a highlighting display can be performed to emphasize that the specific number has been reached (for example, when the number of prize balls displayed in the count-up animation reaches 2500, the display of "2500" will be shown separately from the display in the count-up animation, and will be shown larger than the number of prize balls displayed in the count-up animation). The following specifications may be adopted for these animations and displays. Note that when the large prize pocket 20 is opened in one unit game, it will be closed when 9 game balls enter (note that the prize balls for 1 ball entered will be "15"). Thus, the number of game balls that constitutes the termination condition for a unit game (the condition for closing the large prize winning slot 20) is referred to as the prescribed count.
(1) When a count-up animation corresponding to the entry of game balls within the prescribed number of counts (in particular, a count-up animation corresponding to the 9th count, which is the prescribed number of counts) is in progress and the count-up for 15 balls has not yet been completed, if an over-entry (entry of more balls than the prescribed number of counts) occurs, it is desirable that the system be configured so that the count-up animation corresponding to the over-entry starts only after the count-up for all 15 balls that has not yet been completed has been completed (after the count for 15 balls has been completed). Here, if the over-winning is detected near the end of the interval period (the pause time from when the end of each unit game is set until the setting of the next unit game or end demo begins), the count-up animation corresponding to the over-winning will overlap with the execution period of the next round (the next round which starts after the interval period has elapsed). However, even if a ball enters the large prize slot 20 during the execution of the count-up animation corresponding to the over-winning, which is performed during the execution of the next round (the next round which starts after the interval period has elapsed), if the timing of the ball's entry is while the count-up animation corresponding to the over-winning is being performed and the count-up for 15 balls has not yet been completed, it is preferable that the count-up animation corresponding to the ball entering the large prize slot 20 in the next round starts only after all the count-up animations that have not yet completed the count-up for 15 balls have been completed (after the count-up for 15 balls has been performed).
(2) The time required to count up one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds", meaning that the count-up is performed in increments of "0.03 seconds". The execution time of the count-up animation is derived by multiplying the time required to count up one prize ball by the value of the number of prize balls awarded when one game ball enters the large prize slot 20 (unit prize balls), and the execution time of the count-up animation is "15 (unit prize balls) × 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds". However, even during the execution of a special game, the count-up animation is not performed during the execution of the start demo and the execution of the end demo. In addition, the execution time of the count-up animation is set to be shorter than the interval time (also called the "interval period") set after the end of each unit game. The interval time is the waiting time set between each unit game or between the final unit game and the closing demo, and is the period from the start of the closing operation of the large prize slot 20 until it remains closed. This unit game waiting time or closing demo waiting time is set to "2 seconds" for all round games. Furthermore, by configuring the count-up animation time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), even if the count-up animation is performed based on a game ball entering the large prize slot 20 near the end of a unit game, the count-up animation will be completed within the interval time after the end of that unit game. Therefore, the possibility of the count-up animation extending beyond the interval period into the next unit game or closing demo can be reduced (although it may exceed the interval period if there is an over-entry), and the divisions between each unit game or between the final unit game and the closing demo can be clearly defined.
(3) The count-up animation time is set to be shorter than the execution time of the ending demo. As mentioned above, the count-up animation time is set to "0.45 seconds". The execution time of the ending demo is set to "20 seconds" for all types of jackpots (animations during jackpots). The execution time of the ending demo is the waiting time from when the interval time after the end of the final unit game in the special game has elapsed until the special game ends. In other words, the execution time of the ending demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the final unit game. In other words, the interval time after the end of the final unit game is set as the remaining time (grace period) of the unit game during which it is possible for the entry of a game ball into the large prize pocket 20 to be effectively detected (i.e., detected as eligible for prize ball payout and not judged as an illegal entry). However, the execution time of the ending demo is set as the preparation time for the game (performance mode) after the special game separated from the unit game, during which it is not possible for the entry of a game ball into the large prize pocket 20 to be effectively detected. By configuring the count-up performance time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the execution time of the ending demo (20 seconds), even if the count-up performance is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize pocket 20 just before the end of the final unit game, or even if an over-entry occurs in the final unit game, or even after the closing of the large prize pocket 20 after the final unit game (even during the ending demo period), if the system is designed to perform the count-up performance, the count-up performance will be completed within the ending demo period. Therefore, the count-up animation does not extend beyond the end demo period and into the display of the spins after the special game ends, making it possible to clearly distinguish between the end of the special game and the start of the spin display for the first spin.
(4) When a specified number of game balls enter the large prize pocket 20 in a single game, the total time of the count-up animation for the specified number of balls in this single game (the count-up animation for the number of prize balls that can be won in a single game) is set to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot ending demo. Specifically, the total time of the count-up animation for the specified number of balls is "0.45 seconds (count-up animation time) x 10 balls (specified number of balls) = 4.5 seconds". On the other hand, as mentioned above, the execution time of the jackpot ending demo is set to "20 seconds" for all types of jackpots (animations during jackpots). In this embodiment, the total time for the count-up animation for a predetermined number of counts (4.5 seconds) is set to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot completion demo (20 seconds). As a result, even if multiple count-up animations are performed consecutively based on multiple game balls entering the large prize slot 20 in succession near the end of the final unit game, if the count-up animation is set to be performed even after the closing of the large prize slot 20 after the final unit game (even during the jackpot completion demo period), the count-up animation will be completed within the jackpot completion demo period. Therefore, the count-up animation will not extend beyond the jackpot completion demo period and into the display of variations after the special game ends, making it possible to clearly distinguish between the end of the special game and the start of the display of variations for the first spin.

(Third premise technology)
The following explanation focuses on the differences between the third prerequisite technology and the first and second prerequisite technologies described above, with common points omitted as appropriate.

<Settings Change Device>
A setting change device is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 100. The setting change device includes a button for changing the game specifications, which have six levels, a keyhole for inserting a setting key held by the pachinko parlor employee, a setting memory for storing the set setting value, and a setting display LED for lighting up to show the set value. The six setting values, each corresponding to a different game specification, range from setting 1 to setting 6, with higher numbers indicating a game specification that is more advantageous to the player. If ML is the probability of winning a jackpot in the normal probability state and MH is the probability of winning a jackpot in the probability variation state, then for example, setting 1 is ML = 1/320, MH = 1/32, and setting 2 is ML = 1/315, MH = 1/31.5. Furthermore, setting 3 has ML = 1/310 and MH = 1/31, setting 4 has ML = 1/305 and MH = 1/30.5, setting 5 has ML = 1/300 and MH = 1/30, and setting 6 has ML = 1/295 and MH = 1/29.5. Although the third prerequisite technology described six setting values, it is not limited to six levels; any number of levels is acceptable, for example, two levels (setting 1 and setting 6) or four levels (setting 1, setting 2, setting 5, and setting 6). The setting key is a switch that triggers a transition to a state where the setting can be changed (hereinafter referred to as the "setting change state") or a state where the setting can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as the "setting confirmation state"), and its keyhole is provided on the main board 200. When an employee of the amusement parlor inserts the setting key into the keyhole and turns it, the system enters a state where the setting can be changed by operating the buttons. The button for changing settings may also be used as a RAM clear switch (sometimes called an "RWM clear switch"), an error clear switch, and a game start switch. That is, for example, if it is used as a RAM clear switch, and the setting key is not inserted (setting key off) and the RAM clear switch is pressed while the power is turned on, a RAM clear will be performed. On the other hand, if the setting key is inserted (setting key on) and the RAM clear switch is pressed while the power is turned on, the system will transition to the setting change state along with the execution of the RAM clear. If the setting key is off and the RAM clear switch is not pressed while the power is turned on, the system will power back on without a RAM clear. On the other hand, if the setting key is on and the RAM clear switch is pressed while the power is turned on, the system will transition to the setting confirmation state along with the execution of the RAM clear. The setting display LED may also be used as a performance display unit 159 provided on the main board 200, and the setting value may be displayed by the lighting pattern of its 7-segment LED.

<Performance display section>
As shown in Figure 2, a performance display unit 159 is provided on the main board 200. The performance display unit 159 consists of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number, the ratio (also called "base") of the number of prize balls awarded to the first start port 11, the second start port 12, and the general prize port 33 to the total number of balls launched, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged in a horizontal row, and the top two digits display identification characters to distinguish the measurement period in which the total number of balls launched and the number of prize balls were counted from other measurement periods, while the bottom two digits display a number representing the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of balls launched during that measurement period. For example, the top two digits may display characters such as "bL" indicating the current measurement period, "b1" indicating the previous measurement period, "b2" indicating the measurement period two times ago, and "b3" indicating the measurement period three times ago. In addition, the bottom two digits may display numbers such as "25" indicating 25%, "30" indicating 30%, and "35" indicating 35%. The measurement period is divided into segments each time the total number of balls launched in all game states, including normal game states (normal state, time-saving state, and probability-changing state) and special game states, reaches 60,000. That is, each time the total number of balls launched reaches 60,000, the measurement period ends and the next measurement period begins. Note that the performance display unit 159 may be configured using only 7-segment LEDs corresponding to the last two digits, instead of using 7-segment LEDs corresponding to the characters for identification of the first two digits. Also, the number of prize balls referred to here may not be a value obtained by counting the number of prize balls actually paid out, but rather a number of prize balls calculated based on the number of balls that entered the prize, assuming that the prize ball payout was also performed upon entry, regardless of whether the prize ball payout was successful or not. That is, the number of prize balls to be paid out corresponding to the type of prize entry (whether it was the first start entry 11, the second start entry 12, or the general prize entry 33) may be calculated, and the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of balls launched may be expressed based on that number.

First, the counting of the total number of balls fired in all game states begins from the first power-on after product shipment (power-on from a state where all information has been cleared). Until the total number of balls fired reaches a predetermined number of less than 300, the upper two digits of the performance display unit 159 blink while displaying characters such as "bL", and the lower two digits display a non-numeric symbol, such as "--", to indicate that the count has not yet been measured. After the total number of balls fired reaches a predetermined number of less than 300, the measurement period is repeated every 60,000 balls from that point onward. That is, during the measurement period until the first total number of balls fired reaches 60,000, the characters such as "bL" in the upper two digits blink when the number of balls fired in the normal state (i.e., normal probability state and non-time-saving state) is between 0 and 5999, and lights up when the number of balls fired in the normal state is 6000 or more. The prize ball ratio in the lower two digits is calculated in real time for each count based on the number of balls fired and the number of prize balls counted in the normal state, and is displayed. When the number of launched balls reaches 60,000 for the first time, the payout ratio at that point is saved as the "payout ratio for the previous measurement period," the total number of launched balls, the number of launched balls under normal conditions, and the number of paid-out balls under normal conditions are reset, and the counting starts again until the second 60,000 balls are reached. This counting and resetting process is repeated in increments of 60,000 balls.

<Error Type>
Several types of errors are exemplified below. The error types and conditions exemplified below are merely examples and can be modified within the scope of their intended purpose.

A "game ball payout error" usually includes three or more error types, and may include six or more error types, such as "abnormal payout quantity error," "payout switch malfunction error (sensor malfunction)," "payout switch malfunction error (detection of game balls outside of payout operation)," "payout switch malfunction error (detection of game ball count for payout operation when payout operation is incomplete)," "payout case error (ball jamming error)," and "payout case error (payout count switch not passed)." The conditions for the occurrence of a "game ball payout error" and the conditions for clearing the error differ depending on the error type it is classified as. Regardless of the error type, when a payout error occurs, the payout operation is stopped or the payout operation is performed at a slow speed. The conditions for clearing the error are determined by whether or not the error clear switch is pressed, and there are error types that require the error clear switch to be pressed and error types that do not require the error clear switch to be pressed. In addition, there are error types that are automatically cleared after a predetermined period of time without pressing the error clear switch. Error display devices include those that illuminate corresponding lamps for each error type, and those that display error numbers categorizing each error type; details will be provided later. Furthermore, the error display on error display devices is sometimes referred to as error notification.

The "abnormal payout count error" occurs when the payout control board 155 determines that the number of excess payouts exceeds the allowable limit, based on a count value from the excess payout accumulation counter, which accumulates and counts the number of excess payouts. In this case, the payout operation is stopped, and the corresponding lamp on the error display device is lit, or an error number (e.g., "1") is displayed. As a condition for clearing the error, operation of the error clear switch described later is not required; the stop of the payout operation is released and the error display on the error display device is cleared when the power is restored. If this error overlaps with other types of game ball payout errors, the stop of the payout operation is maintained, and the error notification corresponding to the error with higher priority is given priority. For example, the error type with the lowest (smallest) error number may be displayed first. As an example of priority display, (1) only the error number of the error with the highest priority among duplicate errors may be displayed, or (2) the error number of the error with the highest priority will be displayed first, and then the others will be displayed sequentially every second (for example, if the errors are 1 and 4, they will be displayed alternately as 1, 4, 1, 4...). Priority display also applies to other types of game ball payout errors described below. Furthermore, when a "payout quantity abnormality error" occurs, the decorative lamp 111 on the door frame may be made to flash, an error notification may be displayed on the performance display device 60, and an error notification sound may be output. Also, the error numbers displayed on the error display device, as exemplified later, are merely examples; the system may display different numbers for each error type, or the error type may be indicated not by error numbers, but by which of several lamps is lit.

The "Dispensing Switch Malfunction Error (Sensor Malfunction)" occurs when the dispensing control board 155 receives an abnormal signal from the dispensing count sensor used to detect dispensed game balls. In this case, the dispensing operation is stopped, and the corresponding lamp on the error display device is illuminated, or an error number (e.g., "3") is displayed. As a condition for clearing the error, operation of the error clearing switch (described later) is not required; the dispensing operation is resumed and the error display on the error display device is cleared upon restoration of power. If this error overlaps with other types of game ball dispensing errors, the dispensing operation remains stopped, and the error notification corresponding to the higher-priority error takes precedence.

The "Dispensing Switch Malfunction Error (Detection of Game Balls Outside of Dispensing Operation)" occurs when the dispensing control board 155 receives an entry signal from the dispensing count sensor while dispensing control is not being performed. In this case, the dispensing operation is stopped, and the corresponding lamp on the error display device is illuminated, or an error number (e.g., "5") is displayed. The error is cleared by operating the error clearing switch described later, which releases the stop on the dispensing operation and clears the error display on the error display device. If this error overlaps with another type of game ball dispensing error, the dispensing operation remains stopped, and the error notification corresponding to the higher-priority error takes precedence.

The "Dispensing Switch Malfunction Error (Detection of the number of game balls to be dispensed when the dispensing operation is incomplete)" occurs when the dispensing control board 155 receives an input signal from the dispensing count sensor that exceeds a predetermined number of balls before the dispensing operation for a predetermined number of balls is completed. In this case, the dispensing operation is stopped, and the corresponding lamp on the error display device is illuminated, or an error number (e.g., "5") is displayed. As a condition for clearing the error, the stop of the dispensing operation is released and the error display on the error display device is cleared when the error clearing switch described later is operated. If this error overlaps with another type of game ball dispensing error, the stop of the dispensing operation is maintained, and the error notification corresponding to the error with higher priority is given priority.

A "dispensing case error (ball jamming error)" occurs when the dispensing control board 155 detects, based on the signal received from the dispensing motor sensor, that the sprocket has not rotated by a predetermined angle after the dispensing motor has completed for one game ball. In this case, the dispensing operation is stopped or retried, and the corresponding lamp on the error display device is illuminated, or an error number (e.g., "7") is displayed. The error is cleared when the error clearing switch (described later) is operated, or when a predetermined period, for example, two minutes, has elapsed since the error occurred. In such cases, the dispensing operation is resumed, and the error display on the error display device is cleared. If this error overlaps with another type of game ball dispensing error, the dispensing operation remains stopped, and the error notification corresponding to the higher-priority error takes precedence.

The "Dispensing Case Error (Dispensing Count Switch Not Passed)" occurs when the dispensing control board 155 receives fewer ball input signals from the dispensing count sensor than the predetermined number of balls at the completion of the dispensing operation for a predetermined number of balls or after a predetermined period has elapsed thereafter. In this case, the dispensing operation is stopped or performed at a slow speed, and the corresponding lamp on the error display device is illuminated, or an error number (e.g., "7") is displayed. The error is cleared when the error clearing switch described later is operated, or when a predetermined period, e.g., 2 minutes, has elapsed since the error occurred. In such cases, the stop of the dispensing operation is released or normal dispensing operation resumes, and the error display on the error display device is cleared. If this error overlaps with another type of game ball dispensing error, the stop of the dispensing operation is maintained, and the error notification corresponding to the higher-priority error takes precedence.

Next, we will describe errors other than the game ball payout error.
An "abnormal prize entry error" occurs when the main board 200 detects that a game ball has entered the large prize entry opening 20 by the large prize entry detection device 25 during a period outside the valid period for the large prize entry opening, i.e., a period other than the period during which ball entry into the large prize entry opening is considered valid or normal, and during a period during which ball entry into the large prize entry opening is considered invalid or abnormal. However, in the case of a special game, the condition for occurrence may be that a predetermined number of ball entries into the large prize entry opening 20 outside the valid period for the large prize entry opening in a single special game are detected, for example, three times. When an "abnormal prize entry error" occurs, the decorative lamp 111 provided on the door frame flashes as an error notification, an error notification is displayed on the performance display device 60, and an error notification sound is output. The error notification is canceled when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch (described later) pressed, or when a predetermined period, for example, 30 seconds, has elapsed since the error occurred.

The "door/frame open error" includes both "door open error" and "frame open error." These may be treated as separate errors or as a single "door/frame open error." If treated as separate errors, the "door open error" occurs when the door frame set (door 104 and transparent plate 103) is opened. The following is an example of treating them as separate errors.

A "door open error" occurs when the door frame set is opened, that is, when the payout control board 155 detects that the door open detection state by the door open sensor has changed from off to on. In this case, the payout operation for prize balls is stopped, and the ball dispensing operation is also stopped. In addition, the decorative lamp 111 provided on the door frame is made to flash, an error notification is displayed on the performance display device 60, and an error notification sound is output. If ball entry into the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12 prize entry opening, or passage through the second operation opening 32 is detected while a "door open error" is occurring, a special ball entry notification sound is output. As a condition for clearing the error, the "door open error" is cleared when the door frame set is closed and the payout control board 155 detects that the door open detection state by the door open sensor has changed from on to off. That is, the stop of the payout operation is released, the stop of the ball dispensing operation is released, the output of the error notification and error notification sound to the performance display device 60 is released, and the output of the ball entry notification sound is stopped. On the other hand, the flashing of the decorative lamp 111 continues even after the "door open error" is cleared, and stops after a predetermined time has elapsed since the "door open error" was cleared, for example, 30 seconds. If this error overlaps with the "large prize opening abnormality detection error" described later, the stoppage of the payout operation and the stoppage of the ball dispensing operation will be maintained, and the error notification for the "large prize opening abnormality detection error" will take priority. As a variation, the performance display device 60 will notify both the "door open error" and the "large prize opening abnormality detection error," but the error notification sound may be set to output only the "door open error" sound, or only the "large prize opening abnormality detection error" sound. Also, the main board 200 may be the entity that detects errors. The above specifications for the "door open error" may also be applied when the "door open error" and the "frame open error" are combined into a single "door/frame open error." In a modified version, the system may allow the payout of prize balls even if a "door opening error" occurs, while temporarily blocking the flow path to the upper ball tray 105 and the lower ball tray 106.

Furthermore, the "door open error" may be specified to occur when the door frame set (door 104 and transparent plate 103) or the inner frame set (front frame 102) is opened. In other words, the "door open error" occurs when the payout control board 155 detects that the detection state of door open by the door open sensor or the detection state of frame open by the frame open sensor has changed from off to on. In this case, the payout operation of the prize balls is stopped, and the movable mechanism 66 is moved to its initial position. In addition, the decorative lamp 111 provided on the door frame is made to blink, an error notification is displayed on the performance display device 60, and an error notification sound is output. As a condition for clearing the error, the error is cleared when the payout control board 155 detects that the door frame set or the frame set has been closed and the detection state of door open by the door open sensor or the detection state of frame open by the frame open sensor has changed from on to off. In other words, the stop of the payout operation is released, and the error notification to the performance display device 60 is canceled. On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the "door open error" was cleared, for example 5 seconds, the error notification sound is stopped, and the flashing of the decorative lamp 111 continues for an even longer period, stopping after a predetermined time has elapsed since the "door open error" was cleared, for example 30 seconds. Furthermore, the main board 200 may be the primary entity detecting errors. In a modified example, while the payout operation for prize balls may be enabled even when a "door open error" occurs, the flow path to the upper ball tray 105 and the lower ball tray 106 may be temporarily blocked.

A "frame open error" occurs when the inner frame set (front frame 102) is opened. In other words, a "frame open error" occurs when the payout control board 155 detects that the frame open detection state by the frame open sensor has changed from off to on. In this case, the payout operation for prize balls is stopped, and the ball dispensing operation is also stopped. In addition, the decorative lamp 111 provided on the door frame is made to blink, an error notification is displayed on the performance display device 60, and an error notification sound is output. As a condition for clearing the error, the "frame open error" is cleared when the inner frame set is closed and the frame open detection state by the frame open sensor has changed from on to off. In other words, the stop of the payout operation is released, the stop of the ball dispensing operation is released, and the error notification to the performance display device 60 is released. On the other hand, the blinking of the decorative lamp 111 continues even after the "frame open error" is cleared and stops after a predetermined time has elapsed since the "frame open error" was cleared, for example, 30 seconds. Also, the main board 200 may be the entity that detects errors, etc. In the modified configuration, the payout operation for prize balls may be enabled even if a "frame release error" occurs, while the flow path to the upper ball tray 105 and the lower ball tray 106 may be temporarily blocked.

The "Big Prize Opening Anomaly Detection Error" occurs when the main board 200 detects that a game ball has entered the big prize opening 20 by the big prize detection device 25 outside of the big prize opening's valid period. In this case, the main board 200 invalidates the ball that entered the big prize opening 20 related to the error. As an error notification, the decorative lamps 111 provided on the door frame and game board 80, and the lamps provided on the back side of the performance display device 60 are lit, an error notification is displayed on the performance display device 60, and an error notification sound is output. As an error clearing condition, the "Big Prize Opening Anomaly Detection Error" is cleared when the power is turned on again, or when the payout control board 155 detects that the door frame set has been closed and the door opening detection state by the door opening sensor has changed from on to off. In these cases, the error notification, such as the lamp lighting, the display of the error notification, and the output of the error notification sound, is stopped. The error clearing conditions for the "Big Prize Opening Anomaly Detection Error" are the same as those for the "Frame Opening Error," except for the condition for turning off the LEDs such as the decorative lamps 111.

Furthermore, the "Big Prize Opening Anomaly Detection Error" occurs when (1) the Big Prize Detection Device 25 detects that a predetermined number A (for example, 11 balls) or more have entered the Big Prize Opening 20 during the Big Prize Opening's valid period while a minor win game is being played, or (2) the Big Prize Detection Device 25 detects that a variable number N (a variable value corresponding to the type of big win symbol, and N can differ even for big win symbols with the same number of rounds in the special game) or more have entered the Big Prize Opening 20 during the continuous opening period of the Big Prize Opening 20 during a special game, i.e., the period during which the Big Prize Opening 20 is continuously open, and the Big Prize Detection Device 25 detects that a variable number N (a variable value corresponding to the type of big win symbol, and N can differ even for big win symbols with the same number of rounds in the special game) or more have entered the Big Prize Opening 20 The main board 200 may be configured to generate an error when it detects at least one of the following: (3) a predetermined number B (e.g., 3 balls) or more balls entering the large prize opening 20 during a predetermined period other than the continuous opening period of the large prize opening 20, or (4) a predetermined number C (e.g., 1 ball) or more balls entering the large prize opening 20 while the "large prize opening abnormality detection error" is occurring, that is, while the large prize opening detection device 25 is detecting a predetermined number C (e.g., 1 ball) or more balls entering the large prize opening 20 (the values of A, B, and C are A > B > C, and A is designed to be the same as the minimum value of N). In this case, as an error notification, the performance button 109, the decorative LED of the performance button 109, and other decorative lamps 111 are blinked or lit, an error notification is displayed on the performance display device 60, and an error notification sound is output. As an error release condition, the error notification is stopped when the power is turned on again, thereby releasing the error. However, the error notification to the performance display device 60 will stop after a predetermined time, for example 300 seconds, has elapsed since the start of the error notification, even if the error is not cleared by restarting the power. Also, the output of the error notification sound will stop after a predetermined time, for example 90 seconds, has elapsed since the start of the error notification sound output, even if the error is not cleared by restarting the power. Note that the occurrence of the "Grand Prize Aperture Detection Error" does not affect the progress of the game. Furthermore, in gaming machines that do not feature minor win games, the system may be configured to generate the "Big Win" when the main board 200 detects at least one of the following: (5) during the continuous opening period of the big win slot 20 in special games, i.e., the period during which the big win slot 20 is continuously open, and during the total period of each round of games in special games, a variable number N (a variable value corresponding to the type of big win symbol; even if the number of rounds of the special game is the same, N may differ) or more balls entering the big win slot 20; (6) during a predetermined period other than the continuous opening period of the big win slot 20, a predetermined number B (e.g., 3 balls) or more balls entering the big win slot 20; or (7) during the occurrence of a "Big Win Slot Anomaly Detection Error," i.e., during the occurrence due to the fulfillment of condition (5) or (6) above, a predetermined number C (e.g., 1 ball) or more balls entering the big win slot 20.

Furthermore, the "Grand Prize Entrance Abnormality Detection Error" may be specified to occur when the main board 200 detects that the grand prize detection device 25 has continued to detect game balls for an exceptionally long period of time (e.g., 300 seconds), meaning that the game ball detection state (on state) has continued for a long time due to game balls remaining near the sensor. However, if the total number of detected causes of the "Grand Prize Entrance Abnormality Detection Error" exceeds 10, the decorative lamp 111 on the door frame will be illuminated as an error notification, and the illumination will cease after a predetermined time, for example, 1 second, from the time the error occurred. Also, if the total number of detected causes of the "Grand Prize Entrance Abnormality Error" exceeds 30, an error notification sound will be output as an error notification, and the output of the error notification sound will cease after a predetermined time, for example, 30 seconds, from the time the error occurred.

The "Abnormal Entry Point Detection Error" occurs when the main board 200 detects any of the following: (1) detection of abnormal radio waves by a radio wave sensor (preferably a radio wave sensor installed near the entry point); (2) detection of a continuous ON state for a certain period of time in various entry/ball detection devices (first start entry detection device 16, second start entry detection device 17, big entry detection device 25, general entry detection device 38, ball entry detection device for the out entry point 34) (i.e., the game ball detection state (ON state) continues for a certain period of time, such as when game balls remain near the sensor); or (3) detection by the big entry detection device 25 of a predetermined number of balls or more entering the big entry point 20 during special gameplay. In this case, the main board 200 invalidates the balls that entered related to the error. In other words, this is an error type that is determined to be an error when any of the above error conditions are met at any of the entry points, regardless of the type of entry point. Furthermore, as an error notification, decorative lamps 111 on the door frame and game board 80, as well as a lamp on the back of the performance display device 60, are illuminated, an error notification is displayed on the performance display device 60, and an error notification sound is output. The error clearing condition is when the power is restarted, or when the payout control board 155 detects that the door frame set has been closed and the door open detection state by the door open sensor has changed from on to off. In these cases, the error notification, including lamp illumination, error notification display, and error notification sound output, is stopped, thereby clearing the "winning slot abnormality detection error."

The "Normal Electric Prize Entry Abnormal Error" occurs when: (1) the second start entry detection device 17 detects a predetermined number A (e.g., 15 balls) or more balls entering the second start entry 12 during the valid period of the second start entry 12, i.e., during the period when balls entering the second start entry 12 are considered valid or normal; (2) the second start entry detection device 17 detects a predetermined number B (e.g., 10 balls) or more balls entering the second start entry 12 during the non-valid period of the second start entry 12, i.e., during the period when balls entering the second start entry 12 are considered invalid or abnormal; or (3) the "Normal Electric Prize Entry Abnormal Error" An error occurs when the main board 200 detects either of the following: an error occurring, that is, an error occurring due to the fulfillment of either condition (1) or (2) above, or the main board 200 detecting that a predetermined number C (e.g., 1 ball) or more balls have entered the large prize opening 20 by the large prize detection device 25 (the values of A, B, and C are designed so that A > B > C so as not to affect the progress of the game. For example, a larger value is set when the possibility of an abnormality is low, and a smaller value is set when the possibility of an abnormality is high, and so on, with appropriate values set according to the current situation). In this case, as an error notification, the performance button 109, the decorative LED of the performance button 109, and other decorative lamps 111 are made to blink or light up, an error notification is displayed on the performance display device 60, and an error notification sound is output. As an error clearing condition, the error notification is cleared by stopping the error notification when the power is turned on again. However, even if the error is not cleared by turning on the power, the error notification to the performance display device 60 is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the error notification, for example, 300 seconds. Furthermore, the error notification sound will stop outputting after a predetermined time, for example 90 seconds, has elapsed since the start of the error notification sound output, even if the error is not cleared by restarting the power. The display mode of the decorative LED on the performance button 109 is independent of the performance content, while the display mode of the performance display device 60 depends on the performance content and also displays errors. That is, even if the performance button 109 should illuminate in white during the progression of the performance, if an error occurs, it will illuminate in red, indicating the error state. However, if the performance display device 60 should display a predetermined pre-announcement performance during the progression of the performance, it will display that pre-announcement performance while simultaneously displaying an error notification in front of it.

Furthermore, the "Normal Electric Prize Entry Abnormal Error" may be specified to occur when the main board 200 detects either that a predetermined number A (e.g., 10 balls) or more game balls have entered the second start entry 12 by the second start entry detection device 17 outside the valid period of the second start entry 12, or that a predetermined number A (e.g., 10 balls) or more game balls have entered the large prize entry 20 by the large prize entry detection device 25 outside the valid period of the large prize entry 20. In this case, the decorative lamp 111 provided on the door frame is lit and then turned off after a predetermined time, for example, 1 second, from the time the error occurs. Furthermore, the "Normal Electric Prize Entry Abnormality Error" also occurs when the main board 200 detects either the detection of a predetermined number B (e.g., 30 balls) or more game balls entering the second start port 12 by the second start prize entry detection device 17 outside the valid period of the second start port 12, or the detection of a predetermined number B (e.g., 30 balls) or more game balls entering the large prize port 20 by the large prize entry detection device 25 outside the valid period of the large prize port 20. In this case, an error notification sound is output. As a condition for clearing the error, the output of the error notification sound stops and the error is cleared when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed, or when a predetermined time, for example 30 seconds, has elapsed since the error occurred. Note that the occurrence of these errors does not affect the progress of the game.

Furthermore, the "normal electric prize entry abnormality error" may occur in the non-time-saving state when a predetermined number of game balls, for example, 1 ball, enter the second start port 12. In this case, various LEDs may be lit, and the error may be cleared after the power is turned back on or after a predetermined time, for example, 300 seconds, has elapsed since the abnormality occurred. In that case, the "normal electric prize entry abnormality error" may occur in the time-saving state and within the normal electric prize validity period, i.e., during the period when entry into the second start port 12 is considered valid or normal, when a predetermined number of game balls, for example, 6 balls, enter the second start port 12. In the time-saving state and outside the normal electric prize validity period, i.e., during the period when entry into the second start port 12 is considered invalid or abnormal, when a predetermined number of game balls, for example, 5 balls, enter the second start port 12. In the time-saving state and after the abnormality occurred, the error may occur when a predetermined number of game balls, for example, 1 ball, enters the second start port 12. In these cases, the special symbol changes and the operation of the large prize slot 20 are interrupted. An error notification is displayed on the performance display device 60, the decorative lamps 111 on the door frame are illuminated, and an error notification sound is emitted. The error is cleared and the error notification ends when the power is restored while the door is open.

Furthermore, the "Normal Electric Prize Entry Abnormal Error" occurs when the main board 200 detects that the second start prize entry detection device 17 has detected a ball entering the second start port 12 while the machine is not in a time-saving state and is in a special game or minor win game. In other words, it occurs when the main board 200 detects that the second start prize entry detection device 17 has detected a ball entering the second start port 12 when the machine is not in an open extension state. In this case, as an error notification, the decorative lamp 111 provided on the door frame lights up and an error notification sound is output. As an error clearing condition, the error notification ends when the power is turned on again or when a predetermined time, for example 300 seconds, has elapsed since the error occurred. Note that this specification applies when the second start port 12 does not have a hold function. For example, it is desirable to apply this specification to a machine where the second start port 12 does not have a hold function, and when a minor win game is performed, the large prize port equipped with a V prize port opens, and if a ball enters the V prize port while it is open, it is upgraded to a big win. An error notification is triggered if, after this error is detected, another error is detected before the special symbol corresponding to the first start port 11 completes a predetermined number of rotations, for example, five times; or if, after this error is detected, a ball enters the V-prize slot before the special symbol corresponding to the first start port 11 rotates; or if, after this error is detected, a ball enters the V-prize slot before the standby demo screen is displayed.

The "Starting Port Entry Abnormality Error" occurs when the main board 200 detects that the difference between the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged at the first starting port 11 exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 100 balls). In this case, as an error notification, the performance button 109, the decorative LED of the performance button 109, and other decorative lamps 111 flash or light up, an error notification is displayed on the performance display device 60, and an error notification sound is output. The error is cleared when the power is restarted, by stopping the error notification. However, the error notification to the performance display device 60 stops after a predetermined time, for example, 300 seconds, has elapsed since the start of the error notification, even if the error is not cleared by restarting the power. Also, the output of the error notification sound stops after a predetermined time, for example, 90 seconds, has elapsed since the start of the output of the error notification sound, even if the error is not cleared by restarting the power. Note that the occurrence of the "Starting Port Entry Abnormality Error" does not affect the progress of the game. The first start prize detection device 16 may be a non-contact sensor, and the discharge detection device for the first start port 11 (not shown) may be a contact sensor. Alternatively, the first start prize detection device 16 may be a contact sensor, and the discharge detection device for the first start port 11 (not shown) may be a non-contact sensor.

Furthermore, the "Starting Point Prize Entry Abnormality Error" may be specified to occur when the main board 200 detects that the difference between the number of game balls detected by the first starting prize entry detection device 16 from the time of power-on and the number of game balls detected by the fraudulent activity confirmation sensor exceeds a predetermined number. In this case, as an error notification, an error notification is displayed on the performance display device 60, the decorative lamp 111 provided on the door frame is lit, and an error notification sound is output. As an error clearing condition, the error is cleared when the power is restarted, and even if the power is not restarted, the output of the error notification sound ends after a predetermined time has elapsed since the error occurred, for example, 90 seconds, and the display of the error notification and the illumination of the lamp end after a predetermined time has elapsed since the error occurred, for example, 300 seconds.

A "tray full error" occurs when the lower ball tray 106 becomes full due to the operation of the prize ball payout device or game ball dispensing device, and the payout control board 155 detects that this fullness has been detected by a full-fill sensor (not shown) in the lower ball tray 106. In this case, the payout operation is stopped, an error notification is displayed on the performance display device 60, and an error notification sound is output. The error is cleared when it is determined that the lower ball tray 106 is no longer full, that is, when the game balls are no longer in contact with the full-fill sensor and the full-fill sensor detection is stopped. The stop on the payout operation is then released, and the error notification is stopped, thereby clearing the error. The error notification sound is output only when the game stops on a predetermined jackpot symbol and when the condition device operation flag, which indicates whether the condition device is in an activated (on) or in an activated (off) state, is on (especially during special games related to long-open jackpots, where it is easier to acquire prize balls, even if the special game consists of the same number of rounds). The main board 200 may also be the entity that detects errors.

An "ejection error" occurs when the main board 200 detects that the difference between the number of balls entered and the number of balls ejected exceeds a predetermined number, for example, 100 balls, using various prize detection devices (first-start prize detection device 16, second-start prize detection device 17, big prize detection device 25, general prize detection device 38) and an ejection detection device (not shown) that detects ejection from each prize slot. In this case, as an error notification, the decorative lamp 111 provided on the door frame lights up, an error notification is displayed on the performance display device 60, and an error notification sound is output. The error is cleared when the RAM clear switch is pressed and the power is turned back on. However, even if the power is not turned back on, the error notification is terminated by turning off the decorative lamp 111, stopping the display of the error notification on the performance display device 60, and stopping the output of the error notification sound after a predetermined time, for example, 30 seconds, from the occurrence of the error. Note that the occurrence of these errors does not affect the progress of the game. "Discharge errors" have more error notification patterns and fewer error notification termination conditions than "abnormal prize entry errors."

The "Grand Prize Outlet Abnormal Discharge Error" occurs when the main board 200 detects that the number of balls discharged from the grand prize outlet 20 (detected by a discharge detection device, not shown) or the number of balls passing through a specific area of the grand prize outlet 20 (detected by a passage detection device, not shown) is greater than the number of balls entering the grand prize outlet 20 during special gameplay (detected by the grand prize detection device 25). In this case, as an error notification, the decorative lamp 111 on the door frame lights up, an error notification is displayed on the performance display device 60, and an error notification sound is output. The error notification ends when the power is restarted or when a predetermined time (e.g., 300 seconds) has elapsed since the error occurred.

The "Big Prize Outlet Ball In/Out Mismatch Error" occurs when the main board 200 detects that the number of balls dispensed from the big prize outlet 20 (detected by an unillustrated discharge detection device) or the number of balls passing through a specific area of the big prize outlet 20 (detected by a unillustrated passage detection device) is less than the number of balls entering the big prize outlet 20 during special gameplay (detected by the big prize detection device 25). In this case, the special symbol changes and the operation of the big prize outlet 20 are stopped. As an error notification, the decorative lamp 111 on the door frame is illuminated, an error notification is displayed on the performance display device 60, and an error notification sound is output. The error notification ends when the power is restarted as a condition for error resolution.

The "Guidance Device Malfunction Error" occurs when a position sensor of a guidance device (not shown) that guides game balls to either a specific area or a normal area inside the large prize winning opening 20 detects a discrepancy between the guidance device's normal operation and the actual operation, and the main board 200 detects a total of five or more such detections. This guidance device is configured to guide game balls to a specific area during a specific round of special gameplay (for example, the 4th round), and to guide game balls to the normal area in rounds other than the specific round. In other words, an error is determined if the device attempts to guide game balls to the specific area outside of the specific round, or if it fails to do so during the specific round. In this case, an error notification is displayed on the display device 60, the decorative lamp 111 on the door frame lights up, and the error notification ends 5 minutes after the error occurred.

<Signals output from the external information output terminal>
The signals output from the external information output terminal 160 include, for example, a reserve signal, an out signal, a prize ball signal, a door/frame opening signal, a jackpot signal, a prize entry signal, a security signal, a start gate signal, a gate signal, etc. However, the content and conditions of the signals exemplified below are merely examples and can be changed within the scope that does not deviate from their purpose.

The auxiliary signal is a backup signal that always indicates an off state. For example, it will always show an off signal from any point after power-on. Note that the use of this signal varies depending on the complexity of the gameplay for each model.

The "OUT" signal is one of the IN/OUT signals and indicates the number of game balls that have entered all the entry points (including the exit points) located in the game area 81 (i.e., the number of game balls that have been played into the game area 81). For example, each time the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor (for example, the value of the total discharge confirmation counter, but it may also be the value of the entry count counter) reaches a predetermined number, for example, a multiple of 10, an ON signal is output for 0.2 seconds, followed by an OFF signal for 0.2 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the system waits for the next output until the output period of the currently outputting signal has expired.

The prize ball signal is one of the IN/OUT signals and indicates the number of game balls dispensed by the gaming machine. In this case, each time the number of game balls detected by the payout count sensor reaches a predetermined number, for example, a multiple of 10, an ON signal is output for 0.1 seconds, followed by an OFF signal for 0.1 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the system waits for the next output until the current signal's output period has expired. Furthermore, when the door/frame open signal output conditions are met for the first time, the system may be configured to start outputting after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, one interrupt = 0.004 seconds). Also, if the system is waiting for the next output, it may be configured to start outputting immediately after the current output period has expired (even if the predetermined period has not elapsed).

The door/frame open signal is one of the signals in the unit monitoring system, indicating, for example, that the glass door (e.g., transparent panel 103) of a gaming machine is open. In this case, the door unit open detection sensor outputs a continuously on signal during the period that the sensor is on (for example, during the period when the door open flag, which indicates whether the glass door is open (on) or closed (off) is on), triggered by a change from off to on (or after a predetermined period of time, e.g., 0.1 seconds). However, the on signal may continue to be output for a predetermined period, e.g., 0.1 seconds, after the change from on to off.

Furthermore, the door/frame open signal may indicate that the front frame 102 of the gaming machine is open. In this case, the signal is continuously output as soon as the front frame unit open detection sensor changes from off to on (or as soon as it remains on for a predetermined period, for example, 0.1 seconds) after changing from off to on. This output is maintained during the period when the detection sensor is on (for example, during the period when the frame open flag, which indicates whether the front frame 102 is open (on) or closed (off), is on). However, the signal may continue to be output for a predetermined period, for example, 0.1 seconds, after changing from on to off.

Furthermore, the door/frame open signal may indicate that the game machine's tray frame (e.g., door 104) is open. In this case, the signal is continuously output as long as the ball tray unit open detection sensor is on, triggered by the sensor changing from off to on (or after it has changed from off to on and remained on for a predetermined period, for example, 0.1 seconds). However, the on signal may continue to be output for a predetermined period, for example, 0.1 seconds, after it has changed from on to off.

Here, any one of the three types of door/frame opening signals described above may be applied to a single model, or two or three of the three types may be applied as the same output signal depending on the configuration between the units. In the latter case, the ON signal should be continuously output while any of the opening detection sensors are ON. Furthermore, the opening detection sensors of each unit may be connected to the main board 200 or to the dispensing control board 155 (since bidirectional communication is possible between the main board 200 and the dispensing control board 155).

The symbol confirmation count signal is one of the signals in the symbol variation system. It indicates the number of symbol variations for all symbol variations that could trigger the opening of the large prize slot 20. In this case, when the variation display of the first or second special symbol ends (this could be the timing after the variation display ends and the period of fixed symbol display ends, or it could be the timing of the variation start or during the variation period), an ON signal is output for 0.5 seconds. It is preferable to configure the output period to be shorter than the shortest possible variation display period for the first and second special symbols. Alternatively, the ON signal may be output for a period during the fixed variation time of the special symbol (e.g., 0.5 seconds).

Furthermore, the symbol confirmation count signal may be configured to indicate the number of symbol variations for the second special symbol, which is part of the symbol variation that can trigger the opening of the large prize slot 20. In this case, when the variation display of the second special symbol ends (this could be the timing after the variation display ends and the period during which the symbol is fixed has ended, or it could be the timing of the variation start or during the variation period), an ON signal is output for 0.5 seconds. It is preferable that the output period be configured to be shorter than the shortest possible variation display period for the second special symbol.

Furthermore, the symbol confirmation count signal may be configured to indicate the number of symbol variations for the first special symbol, which is part of the symbol variation that can trigger the opening of the large prize slot 20. In this case, when the variation display of the first special symbol ends (this could be the timing after the variation display ends and the period during which the symbol is fixed has ended, or it could be the timing of the variation start or during the variation period), an ON signal is output for 0.5 seconds. It is preferable that the output period be configured to be shorter than the shortest possible variation display period for the first special symbol.

The first jackpot signal is one of the jackpot signals and indicates that a special game is being played (the continuous mechanism is in operation) that allows the large prize winning slot 20 to be opened. Here, "the period during which the special game is being played" includes not only the period during which multiple rounds of gameplay are played (including the period during which the large prize winning slot is closed after each round), but also the periods of the start demo and end demo. More specifically, it is the period of the start demo (the period during which the large prize winning slot remains closed until the first round begins) + 1 round + post-round closing time (time between rounds) + 2 rounds + post-round closing time (time between rounds) + ... final round + post-round closing time + end demo (the period from the end of the final round until the end of the special game / the period during which the large prize winning slot remains closed until the first spin immediately after the end of the special game begins). This signal outputs a continuously ON signal when a special game is initiated (the output timing may also be before the start, during, or after the introductory demo period), and while the special game is in progress (for example, during the period when the continuous mechanism activation flag or condition device activation flag, which indicates whether the continuous mechanism activation device is activated (on) or deactivated (off), is ON).

The first jackpot signal may be configured so that its output period differs depending on the type of jackpot symbol, the game state immediately before the start of the special game (when the jackpot symbol stops), and the type of game state to which the player transitions after the special game ends. For example, when a jackpot symbol corresponding to a 16-round probability variation jackpot stops, and when a jackpot symbol corresponding to a 4-round normal jackpot stops, (1) when a 16-round probability variation jackpot is won in a non-time-saving state, the period during which the first jackpot signal is output in the start demo time is, for example, 5 seconds, and the period during which the first jackpot signal is output in the end demo time is, for example, 30 seconds, and the image displayed on the performance display device 60 during the start demo time and the end demo time is an image of character A, and furthermore, an image is displayed during the end demo time to remind the player not to forget to take the recording medium necessary to borrow the game balls, (2) when a 4-round normal jackpot is won in a non-time-saving state, the period during which the first jackpot signal is output in the start demo time is, for example, 5 seconds, and the period during which the first jackpot signal is output in the end demo time is, for example, 10 seconds, and the image displayed on the performance display device 60 during the start demo time and the end demo time is an image of character B, and furthermore, an image is displayed during the end demo time to remind the player not to forget to take the recording medium necessary to borrow the game balls (3) If a 16-round probability variation jackpot occurs in a time-saving state, the period during which the first jackpot signal is output in the start demo time is, for example, 4 seconds, and the period during which the first jackpot signal is output in the end demo time is, for example, 6 seconds. The image displayed on the performance display device 60 during the start demo time is the image of character C, and the image to remind players not to forget to take the recording medium necessary to borrow the game balls is not displayed during the end demo time. (4) If a 4-round normal jackpot occurs in a time-saving state, the period during which the first jackpot signal is output in the start demo time is, for example, 4 seconds, and the period during which the first jackpot signal is output in the end demo time is, for example, 10 seconds. The image displayed on the performance display device 60 during the start demo time is the image of character B, and the image to remind players not to forget to take the recording medium necessary to borrow the game balls is not displayed during the end demo time. The above time values are examples and can be changed as appropriate, but the relationships between them, such as magnitude and difference, are desirable.

The second jackpot signal is one of the jackpot signals and indicates that a special game is being played that allows the large prize winning slot 20 to open (the continuous mechanism operation device is active), and that a time-saving game is being played that triggers the opening of the large prize winning slot 20 (the time-saving function is active). This signal outputs a constantly ON signal when a special game is started, when a time-saving game is started, during the period when the special game is being played (for example, during the period when the continuous mechanism operation device operation flag and/or the condition device operation flag are ON), and during the period when a time-saving game is being played (for example, during the period when the special symbol time-saving flag, which indicates whether the special symbol is in a time-saving state (ON) or not (OFF), and/or the normal symbol time-saving flag, which indicates whether the normal symbol is in a time-saving state (ON) or not (OFF), are ON).

Furthermore, in the case of a game machine where a special game is not executed even if the conditions for opening the big prize opening 20 are met unless a ball enters a specific ball entry point, the first and second jackpot signals may indicate that the conditions for opening the big prize opening 20 have been met (that a combination of symbols that will activate the condition device related to the continuous mechanism operation device has been displayed), and that the period during which the big prize opening 20 can be opened is in operation (the continuous mechanism operation device is in operation). In this case, after a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds, but if the signal is output in the next interrupt processing, the interrupt processing period is added, making it 0.504 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the variable display of the symbols related to the jackpot symbols (the output timing may be when the period during which the symbols are fixed in display has ended (or started, or is in the period) after the variable display has ended), during the period after the output timing, and during the period during which the special game is being executed (for example, during the period when the condition device operation flag is on), the signal is always on. Furthermore, after the display of the winning symbols has finished, the special game will not be executed until a game ball enters a specific entry slot. Output begins when the special game starts; therefore, in this specification where the start timing of the special game depends on the timing of ball entry into the specific entry slot, the above output period is variable.

Furthermore, when the first and second jackpot signals are applied to a gaming machine capable of executing jackpots based on balls entering the V-entry slot triggered by a minor win, the signal output start timing is as follows: in the case of a jackpot triggered by a minor win, it is the timing when the ball entering the V-entry slot is detected; in the case of a jackpot triggered by the stopping of a jackpot symbol, it is the timing when the condition device activation flag changes from off to on (the timing of the jackpot start); and the signal continues to output until the jackpot ends (from the condition device activation flag on to off), before turning off.

The third jackpot signal is applied in a gaming machine equipped with a large prize slot 20 having an entry area, for example, a specific area, for determining whether or not to transition to a probability variation state. It may indicate that a game ball has entered the entry area when the large prize slot 20 with the specific area is briefly open (for example, with a maximum opening time of 0.01 seconds) during a round (while a special electric mechanism is operating) and ball entry detection into the entry area is enabled. In this case, if a game ball enters the specific area during a round where the large prize slot 20 is briefly open and ball entry detection into the specific area is enabled, an ON signal is output for 1 second. It is preferable to configure the system so that no output is output for any balls other than the first one that satisfies the aforementioned output timing during a single special game.

Other signals may be output that indicate information for uniquely identifying the gaming machine. For example, the manufacturer's identification code (2 bytes), the machine model name identification code (64 bytes), and the main CPU 290's unique information (chip code register value = 4 bytes) may be output sequentially. This signal is output at any timing after power-on, for example, approximately 10 seconds after power-on, until all of the unique information, divided into frames (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 parity bit + 1 stop bit), is output via serial transmission (asynchronous, 200 bps). It is preferable to differentiate the signal format (rated voltage, rated current) from other signal types.

The prize entry signal is one of the IN/OUT signals and outputs the number of game balls scheduled to be dispensed from the gaming machine. This signal is generated when the ball entry sensor at each prize entry point detects the entry of a game ball. The system calculates the total number of prize balls to be dispensed, and each time the total number of prize balls (e.g., the value of the prize ball counter) reaches a predetermined number, for example, a multiple of 10, it outputs an ON signal for 0.1 seconds, followed by an OFF signal for 0.1 seconds. If output periods overlap, the system waits for the next output until the current output period has expired. Furthermore, when the conditions for outputting the prize entry signal are met for the first time, the system may configure the output to begin after a predetermined period, for example, one interrupt (0.004 seconds). Also, if the system is waiting for the next output, it may be configured to begin output immediately after the current output period has expired (even if the predetermined period has not elapsed).

The security signal is one of the security signals, and for example, it indicates that a RAM initialization operation has been performed in a gaming machine. In this case, an ON signal is output for 0.2 seconds, starting at an arbitrary timing after power-on, specifically after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on, for example, after one interrupt interval = 0.004 seconds, following the RAM initialization operation. The output period may be configured to be the same as that of the IN/OUT system or the prize detection system. Furthermore, the security signal is output not only to indicate that a RAM initialization operation has been performed, but also when conditions such as those described below (error detection, fraud detection, etc.) are met. In this case, it is desirable that the conditions for outputting the security signal meet at least one of the conditions described below.

The security signal may indicate the detection of a ball entering the large prize slot 20 during a period other than the period during which the large prize slot 20 can be opened (from the operation of the special electric mechanism until a predetermined period has elapsed after its operation ends). For example, during a period when the flag indicating whether the ball entering the large prize slot 20 is considered valid or normal (on) or invalid or abnormal (off) is off, the security signal may indicate that a ball has been detected entering the large prize slot 20. In this case, when the large prize detection device 25 detects the entry of a game ball during a period other than the execution period of each round during special gameplay (including the waiting period for discharge and the period between rounds), for example, during a period when the flag indicating the valid period of the large prize slot 20 is off, an ON signal is output for 0.2 seconds, followed by an OFF signal for 0.2 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the next output will be waited for until the output period of the currently outputting signal expires.

The security signal may indicate a magnet sensor error, specifically the detection of abnormal magnetism by a sensor that detects the proximity of a magnet. In this case, when the signal from the magnet sensor turns ON (however, if it turns ON again within a predetermined period, for example, 1 second, after the initial ON state, the output timing is not met), an ON signal is output for 0.2 seconds. Note that the output periods are configured to prevent overlap, based on the relationship between the output timing and the output period.

The security signal may indicate a radio wave sensor error, i.e., the detection of an abnormal radio wave by a radio wave-receiving sensor. In this case, when the signal from the radio wave sensor turns ON (however, if it turns ON again within a predetermined period, for example, 1 second, after the initial ON state, the output timing is not met), an ON signal is output for 0.2 seconds. Note that the output timing and output duration are configured so that they cannot overlap.

The security signal may indicate a radio wave sensor error on the dispensing control board 155 side, i.e., the detection of an abnormal radio wave by a radio wave-receiving sensor. In this case, when the signal from the radio wave sensor input to the dispensing control board 155 side turns ON (however, if it turns ON again within a predetermined period, for example, 1 second, after it turns ON, the output timing is not met), an ON signal is output for 0.2 seconds. Note that, due to the relationship between the output timing and the output period, the output periods cannot overlap. Alternatively, the dispensing control board 155 side may send a command to the main board 200 side indicating that the signal from the radio wave sensor has turned ON, and the main board 200, upon receiving this command, may output a signal.

The security signal may indicate that there has been an unauthorized ball entry into each prize-winning slot that is eligible for prize ball payout (for example, more than a predetermined number of ball entries within a predetermined time, the ball entry detection sensor remaining on for more than a predetermined time, the number of balls entering the main prize slot during a special game exceeding a predetermined number determined for each mode of execution of the special game, the number of balls entering exceeding the design value during a certain valid ball entry period, etc.). In this case, if any of the following conditions are met, an ON signal is output for 0.2 seconds, followed by an OFF signal for 0.2 seconds: (1) After detecting one ball entry into each prize slot with a switch for detecting ball entry, if another ball entry is detected within a period set for each prize slot, the total number of times this occurs exceeds a predetermined number; (2) The switches for detecting ball entry into each prize slot continue to detect ball entry over a predetermined period; or (3) During the execution of a special game, such as a 16-round jackpot, if the number of balls detected by the ball entry sensor into the main prize slot exceeds a predetermined number, such as 160, throughout the period; then an ON signal is output for 0.2 seconds, followed by an OFF signal for 0.2 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the system is configured to wait for the next output until the output period of the currently outputting signal has expired. Furthermore, in case (3), it is preferable to vary the prescribed number depending on the content of the special game (Example 1: If the maximum number of rounds is 10, the prescribed number = 100. Example 2: If the large prize slot only opens briefly, (3) does not apply). Alternatively, the specification may adopt only one of (1) to (3).

The above are the main conditions for outputting the security signal, but other conditions will be described below. The following conditions will include the condition that a RAM initialization operation has been performed on the gaming machine, as well as other output conditions.

The security signal may indicate that a RAM initialization operation has been performed on the gaming machine, or that a detectable fraudulent activity has been performed on the gaming machine. Examples of fraudulent activity include, for example, fraudulent entry (detecting a predetermined number of balls, e.g., 5 or more, into the large prize slot 20 during a period other than when the large prize slot 20 can be opened (when the special electric mechanism is operating), or detecting a predetermined number of balls, e.g., 5 or more, into the normal electric mechanism during a period when the normal electric mechanism cannot be opened), radio wave sensor error (a sensor that receives radio waves detecting an abnormal radio wave, or the sensor being disconnected), board switch error (a proximity sensor on the gaming board detecting the approach of an object), and magnet sensor error (a sensor that detects the approach of a magnet detecting an abnormal magnetism, or the sensor being disconnected). In this case, if any of the following conditions are met: (1) at any time after the RAM initialization operation is performed, (2) when fraudulent winning or a radio wave sensor error is detected, or (3) when a board switch error or magnetic sensor error is detected, then in case (1), an ON signal is output for a first period, for example, 30 seconds; in case (2), an ON signal is output for a second period, for example, 30 seconds; and in case (3), an ON signal is output for a third period, for example, during the detection of each fraudulent act. If the output periods overlap, all output periods are made to overlap, and the ON signal output is maintained until all output periods have expired. Furthermore, the output periods may be different in case (1) and case (2).

Furthermore, the security signal may indicate that a RAM initialization operation has been performed on the gaming machine, or that a detectable fraudulent activity has been performed on the gaming machine. Examples of such fraudulent activities include abnormal prize entry errors (detection of ball entry into the large prize entry 20 during a period other than when the large prize entry 20 can be opened (when the special electric mechanism is operating), detection of ball entry into the normal electric mechanism during a period when the normal electric mechanism cannot be opened (excluding a predetermined period immediately after closing), etc.), magnetic sensor errors (detection of abnormal magnetism by a sensor that detects the approach of a magnet, etc.), and discharge errors (the difference between the number of balls entered by a switch for detecting ball entry into each entry fountain eligible for prize ball payout and the number of balls entered by a ball entry confirmation switch located downstream of the said switch exceeds a predetermined number, for example, 100, etc.). In this case, at any of the following times: (1) at any time after the RAM initialization operation, (2) when an abnormal prize entry error or a magnetic sensor error is detected, or (3) when a dispensing error is detected, in cases (1) and (2), an ON signal is output for 0.2 seconds, followed by an OFF signal for 0.2 seconds. In case (3), an ON signal is output until the next condition (1) is met. If the output periods overlap (except in case (3)), the system is configured to wait for the next output until the output period of the currently outputting signal has expired. Furthermore, even during the output periods related to (1) and (2), the ON signal is maintained when the output timing for (3) occurs. Similarly, during the output period related to (3), the ON signal is maintained even when the output timing for (1) or (2) occurs.

Furthermore, the security signal may indicate that the gaming machine has been powered on, and that a detectable fraudulent activity is occurring on the gaming machine. The fraudulent acts referred to here include, for example, abnormal ball entry (balls entering a large prize slot different from the large prize slot that is being controlled to open), magnetic sensor errors (a sensor that detects the approach of a magnet detects abnormal magnetism), radio wave sensor errors (a sensor that receives radio waves detects abnormal radio waves), vibration sensor errors (a vibration sensor detects abnormal vibrations under predetermined conditions = outside of the execution of each round during a jackpot), switch malfunction errors (balls are detected by the switch for detecting ball entry into each prize slot, but not by the ball entry confirmation switch located downstream of that switch), large prize slot abnormal discharge errors (the number of balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch located downstream of the switch for detecting ball entry into the large prize slot is greater than the number of balls detected by the switch for detecting ball entry into the large prize slot), and large prize slot ball entry/exit mismatch errors (the number of balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch located downstream of the switch for detecting ball entry into the large prize slot is less than the number of balls detected by the switch for detecting ball entry into the large prize slot, etc.). In this case, (1) at any timing after power-on, for example, after a predetermined period (1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds) has elapsed since power-on, or (2) at the time of detection of the fraudulent activity (which may also be after a predetermined period (1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds) has elapsed since detection), in case (1), an ON signal is output for a first period, for example, 30 seconds, and in case (2), an ON signal is output for a second period, for example, 18 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the current output period for the signal being output is discarded, and the next output is started anew. (If the next output timing is met, the current output period for the signal being output may be discarded after a predetermined period, for example, after 1 interrupt = 0.004 seconds has elapsed, and the next output may be started anew.) Furthermore, even for the same output signal, it is preferable to have different output periods in case (1) and case (2).

Furthermore, the security signal may indicate that a RAM initialization operation has been performed on the gaming machine, and that a detectable fraudulent activity has been performed on the gaming machine. Examples of such fraudulent activities include: a magnet sensor error (a sensor that detects the proximity of a magnet detects abnormal magnetism), a large prize slot abnormality detection error (the number of balls detected by a switch for detecting balls entering the large prize slot is greater than the number of balls that are designed to enter within the longest opening period of the large prize slot (or, if multiple rounds are performed, the total period), a start slot entry abnormality error 1 (the number of balls detected by an anti-fraud switch downstream of a switch for detecting balls entering a certain start slot is less than the number of balls detected by a switch for detecting balls entering that switch), and a start slot entry abnormality error 2 (the number of balls detected by a switch for detecting balls entering a normal electric mechanism is greater than the number of balls that are designed to enter within the longest opening period of the normal electric mechanism (including the interval after closing), or a ball is detected by a switch for detecting balls entering a normal electric mechanism during a period when the normal electric mechanism cannot be opened, etc.). This signal outputs an ON signal for a first period, e.g., 30 seconds, in the case of (1) an arbitrary timing after the RAM initialization operation, and in the case of (2) an ON signal for a second period, e.g., 30 seconds, in the case of (2). If the output periods overlap, the output period of the currently outputting signal is discarded, and a new output begins. Furthermore, the output periods may be different for case (1) and case (2).

Furthermore, the security signal may indicate that a RAM initialization operation or an error clearing operation (an operation to clear an error that occurs when a certain number of times within a predetermined period of time the payout of prize balls occurs despite the payout operation being performed) has been performed on the gaming machine, and that a detectable fraudulent activity has been performed on the gaming machine. The fraudulent acts referred to here include, for example, fraudulent winning 1 (detection of ball entry into the large winning slot 20 during a period other than the period during which the large winning slot 20 can be opened (when the special electric mechanism is in operation)), fraudulent winning 2 (detection of ball entry by a switch for detecting ball entry into the normal electric mechanism during a period during which the normal electric mechanism cannot be opened (excluding a predetermined period immediately after closing)), magnetic sensor error (a sensor that detects the approach of a magnet detects an abnormal magnetic field (detection for 0.1 seconds or more)), radio wave sensor error (a sensor that receives radio waves detects an abnormal radio wave (detection for 0.01 seconds or more)), and winning slot switch error (a switch for detecting ball entry into each winning slot continues to detect a ball entry for a predetermined period, for example, 0.2 seconds or more). This signal is output in one of the following situations: (1) at any time after a RAM initialization operation or error clearing operation has been performed, (2) upon detection of the aforementioned fraudulent activity (fraudulent prize entry 1, fraudulent prize entry 2), or (3) upon detection of the aforementioned fraudulent activity (magnetic sensor error, radio wave sensor error, prize slot switch error). In case (1), an ON signal is output for a first period, for example, 30 seconds. In case (2), an ON signal is output for a second period, for example, 30 seconds. In case (3), an ON signal is output for a third period, for example, 30 seconds during the detection of each fraudulent activity and after each fraudulent activity has not been detected. If the output periods overlap, the output period of the currently outputting signal is discarded, and a new output for the next signal is started. The output periods may also be different in cases (1) and (2).

Furthermore, the security signal may indicate that a RAM initialization operation has been performed on the gaming machine, and that a detectable fraudulent activity has occurred on the gaming machine. Examples of such fraudulent activities include: a jackpot entry error (detection of a predetermined number of balls, for example, 5 or more, entering the jackpot 20 during periods other than when the jackpot 20 can be opened (when the special electric mechanism is operating), excluding the period when the jackpot 20 can be opened only in a single round (when the special electric mechanism is operating)); a predetermined start-up entry error (detection of balls entering the normal electric mechanism during periods when the normal electric mechanism cannot be opened); a magnet sensor error (detection of abnormal magnetism by a sensor that senses the approach of a magnet); and an induced magnetic field detection error (detection of abnormal radio waves by a sensor that senses radio waves, etc.). This signal outputs an ON signal for 0.05 seconds, followed by an OFF signal for 0.05 seconds, at any timing after the RAM initialization operation has been performed, and at the time of detection of the aforementioned fraudulent activity. Furthermore, if output periods overlap, the system is configured to wait for the next output until the output period of the currently outputting signal has expired. Alternatively, the output period may be configured to be the same as that of the IN/OUT system, symbol variation system, and prize detection system.

Furthermore, the security signal may indicate the detection of a guidance device malfunction error or an ejection error. A guidance device malfunction error occurs when a wing-shaped guidance device located inside the large prize opening does not open or close at the time it should (i.e., does not open as per the opening pattern). An ejection error occurs when the number of balls detected by an ejection confirmation switch located downstream of a switch (e.g., ball entry detection device at the ejection opening) is greater than the number of balls detected by a switch (e.g., large prize detection device 25) for detecting ball entry into the large prize opening 20. In either case, the signal turns ON for 0.200 seconds from the time a guidance device malfunction error or ejection error is determined, followed by a 0.200-second OFF period. If the output period overlaps with another signal, the signal will wait until the 0.200-second OFF period of the previously output signal (0.200-second ON to 0.200-second OFF) has ended before turning ON (waiting until the currently running output has finished). Furthermore, a guidance device malfunction error occurs when the guidance device's position sensor recognizes whether its current state is open or closed, and determines whether this state is appropriate for the current game state (whether the guidance device should or may be open, or not). Specifically, an error is not detected if the guidance device is in an inappropriate state. For example, an open state is not considered an error from the start of a minor win until a predetermined period has elapsed after the minor win ends, but an error is detected during any other period. In this case, if detected during a major win, it does not necessarily have to be considered an error.

The All Start Ports signal is one of the signals in the prize detection system. It indicates the number of balls that have entered each start port, targeting all start ports related to the symbol change that triggers the opening of the large prize port 20. When the switch for detecting a ball entering the first start port 11 detects one ball entry, and when the switch for detecting a ball entering the second start port 12 detects one ball entry, this signal outputs an ON signal for 0.1 seconds, followed by an OFF signal for 0.1 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the system waits for the next output until the output period of the currently outputting signal expires. Furthermore, if an unauthorized ball entry into the second start port 12 is detected, the system may be configured to prevent the output timing from being met.

The first start gate signal is one of the signals in the prize detection system. It targets a specific start gate related to the symbol change that triggers the opening of the main prize gate 20, for example, the first start gate 11, and indicates the number of balls that have entered that gate. This signal is generated when the first start prize detection device 16, which detects ball entry into the first start gate 11, detects one ball entry. It outputs an ON signal for 0.1 seconds, followed by an OFF signal for 0.1 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the system waits for the next output until the current signal's output period expires.

The second start gate signal is one of the signals in the prize detection system. It targets a part of the start gates related to the symbol change that triggers the opening of the main prize gate 20, for example, the second start gate 12, and indicates the number of balls that have entered that start gate. This signal is a switch for detecting ball entry into the second start gate 12 (the one equipped with the standard electric mechanism 90). When one ball entry is detected, it outputs an ON signal for 0.1 seconds, followed by an OFF signal for 0.1 seconds. If the output periods overlap, the system waits for the next output until the output period of the currently outputting signal expires. Furthermore, if an unauthorized ball entry into the second start gate 12 (the one equipped with the standard electric mechanism 90) is detected, the system may be configured to not meet the output timing requirements based on that ball entry.

The gate signal is one of the signals in the prize detection system. It indicates the number of balls that have entered all of the starting openings (e.g., the first operating opening 31 and the second operating opening 32) related to the symbol change that triggers the opening of the standard electric mechanism (an electric tuner, for example, standard electric mechanism 90). This signal outputs an ON signal for 0.1 seconds, followed by an OFF signal for 0.1 seconds, when a ball entry is detected by a switch (e.g., the first passing detection device 36 and the second passing detection device 37) for detecting ball entry into the operating opening (passage gate). If the output periods overlap, the system waits for the next output until the output period of the currently outputting signal expires.

The additional external terminal signal is one of the signals in the additional external terminal system. For example, it indicates when a game ball enters the V-entry slot during a minor win in a non-time-shortened game state. In this case, when a game ball enters the V-entry slot within the V-entry slot validity period (the period during which entering the V-entry slot grants the right to transition to a major win), the signal turns ON for 0.200 seconds, followed by OFF for 0.200 seconds.

The additional external terminal signal may indicate that a minor win is in progress. In this case, the signal remains on from the timing of the opening of the large prize slot 20 related to the minor win (for example, when the minor win flag is turned on) until the timing of the end of the opening time of the large prize slot 20 related to the minor win.

The additional external terminal signal may indicate that the jackpot detection device 25 has detected a game ball. In this case, when the jackpot detection device 25 switches from off to on (for example, when the jackpot detection device 25 detects a game ball entering the game), it will remain on for 0.200 seconds and then off for 0.200 seconds. If the output period overlaps with another signal, it will wait until the 0.200-second off period of the previously output signal (0.200 seconds on to 0.200 seconds off) has ended before turning on (waiting until the currently running output has finished).

<Terminal Unit>
An external information output terminal 160 is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 100. As shown in Figure 2, the external information output terminal 160 is provided on the back set mechanism 152 near the upper right on the back side of the pachinko game machine 100, but a specific example of the configuration of the external information output terminal 160 in the third prerequisite technology will be explained in Figures 41 and 42 below. The external information output terminal 160 is a terminal that outputs an error signal to notify the game parlor of the occurrence and details of an error when an error occurs in the pachinko game machine 100, as well as game status signals that indicate various game states.

Figure 40 shows the correspondence between error types and error signals. Errors that may occur in the pachinko machine 100 can be divided into those that are notified to the pachinko parlor via the external information output terminal 160, and those that are not specifically notified. Furthermore, errors that may occur in the pachinko machine 100 can also be divided into those caused by misconduct by the player, etc., and those caused by factors other than misconduct.

There are several types of errors that can occur, mainly due to misconduct by players or other users. For example, there are relatively low-priority errors such as abnormal prize entry errors (number 5 in the diagram), abnormal passage errors (number 6), ejection errors (number 7), and connection abnormality errors (number 8), and relatively high-priority errors such as magnetic sensor errors (number 1), radio wave sensor errors (number 2), vibration sensor errors (number 3), and abnormal operation errors (number 4). "Abnormal prize entry errors" may include prize entry when the start gate or large prize gate is not open or outside the valid period, or excessive prize entry. "Abnormal passage errors" may include when the large prize gate 20 is not open or when it passes through a specific area outside the valid period, or excessive passage. "Connection abnormality errors" are errors that occur when various prize gates, symbol display units, or external information output terminals 160 that should be connected to the main board 200 are not connected to the main board 200. "Abnormal operation errors" are errors that occur when abnormalities occur in relation to various operations that affect the number of prize balls. For example, there are route switching plate errors that occur when there is a malfunction in the component that switches the path that guides the game balls, random number update errors that occur when there is a malfunction in the random number update process, and disconnection errors that occur when there is a disconnection in the signal line, etc. Warnings that can be caused by both fraud and non-fraud include, for example, a notification (number 9) indicating that a power-on accompanied by a RAM clear has occurred, and an error (number 11) indicating that a door or frame has been opened. Note that while a notification indicating a power-on accompanied by a RAM clear was used as an example of warning number 9, as a variation, the specification may also be such that a similar notification is given when a power-on is performed without a RAM clear. Other warnings include, for example, a notification (number 10) indicating that a setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. On the other hand, errors that are not caused by fraud include, for example, a communication error (number 12), a tray full error (number 13), a game ball payout error (number 14), and a game ball dispensing device not connected error (number 15). A "communication error" is an error that indicates that communication is not possible between devices such as the main board 200, sub-board 300, performance display device 60, and payout control board 155. The "game ball dispensing error" is as described above.

Among the various types of errors, some errors are output from a common terminal, while others are output from a different terminal. Relatively high-priority errors and warnings are generally output from the common terminal as warning information (hereinafter referred to as "security signals"), but signals indicating other errors may be output from different terminals. For example, high-priority errors, such as those likely caused by fraud, are not likely to occur multiple times, and even if only one occurs, there is a high need to resolve that error state. Therefore, they are notified to the arcade as a common security signal from the common terminal. On the other hand, relatively low-priority errors are notified to the arcade as separate signals from different terminals to distinguish them from security signals. For example, magnetic sensor errors and abnormal prize entry errors, which are likely to be caused by fraudulent activity, are output from the common terminal as the same security signal, while door/frame opening errors, which are likely to be caused by maintenance work by arcade staff, are output from a different terminal as door/frame opening error signals. Meanwhile, warnings indicating that a power-on accompanied by a RAM clear has occurred are events that should definitely be notified to the arcade regardless of whether fraud occurred, and are therefore output from the common terminal as security signals. Furthermore, information indicating a transition to a setting change or setting confirmation state may also be output from a common terminal as a security signal. As mentioned above, among the errors subject to security signals, the magnet sensor error (1), radio wave sensor error (2), vibration sensor error (3), and abnormal operation error (4) are particularly important. Compared to these, abnormal prize entry error (5), abnormal passage error (6), ejection error (7), connection error (8), notification indicating power-on (9), and notification indicating setting change/setting confirmation execution (10) are considered relatively less important, but are still relatively more important than errors not subject to security signals.

Depending on the type of error, the external information output terminal 160 may output an error signal, but it may not output an error notification via sound or display on the performance display device 60. This is to notify the arcade operator of the detected anomaly without informing the player. In this case, at least one of the following will not occur: the output of an error notification sound or the display of an error notification on the performance display device 60. Therefore, there will be no restrictions on the performance display or performance sound output. In other words, it will be avoided that the performance sound will be interrupted or stopped when the error notification sound is played, that the performance on the performance display device 60 will be interrupted or stopped when the error notification is played on the performance display device 60, or that part of the performance will be hidden by the error notification because the error notification is given priority on the performance display device 60. For example, if an abnormal prize entry error occurs, a security signal will be output from the external information output terminal 160, but if the specification does not output an error notification sound, the output of the performance sound will not be restricted. In this case, the performance on the performance display device 60 will be interrupted or stopped when the error notification is displayed on the performance display device 60, or part of the performance will be hidden by the error notification because the error notification is given priority on the performance display device 60. In other examples, if an abnormal prize entry error occurs, a security signal is output from the external information output terminal 160, but the performance display device 60 does not provide error notification. In this case, the performance on the performance display device 60 will not be interrupted or canceled, nor will any part of the performance be hidden. In this case, an error notification sound is output, and the output of the performance sound is restricted.

As shown in the table in Figure 40, in the event of errors 1 to 4, a common security signal is output along with an error alarm sound. In the event of errors 5 to 8, the system may output both a security signal and an error alarm sound, or it may not output an error alarm sound. Similarly, in the event of a power-on warning accompanied by a RAM clear (error 9) and a setting change/setting confirmation (error 10), the system may output both a security signal and an error alarm sound, or it may not output an error alarm sound. Similarly, in the event of a door/frame open error (error 11), the system may output both a door/frame open error signal and an error alarm sound, or it may not output an error alarm sound. The error alarm sound for the door/frame open error (error 11) may be an audio warning such as "The door is open!". Errors 12, 14, and 15 are errors with a low probability of fraud and are therefore of relatively low importance. Consequently, they are not indicated by signal output or error notifications on the display device 60, but are instead displayed on the error display device located on the back of the pachinko machine 100, as described later. On the other hand, in the case of error 13, the full tray error, an image of a ball removal button (ball removal lever) for removing game balls from the ball tray (e.g., lower ball tray 106) into a box, along with the words "Please remove the balls," is displayed on the display device 60 screen as an error notification. If the balls are not removed and the error is not cleared after 10 seconds, an audio warning sound, such as "Please remove the balls," is output as an error notification sound. As a variation, even if any of the following errors occur—abnormal entry error, abnormal passage error, ejection error, or connection error—the system may not only refrain from issuing error notifications but also refrain from outputting security signals. Furthermore, in the table in Figure 40, items marked "Yes/No" indicate whether the output or display is specified as "Yes" or "No" for each specific device.

If a magnetic sensor error and a door/frame open error occur simultaneously, and these error conditions overlap, the security signal and the door/frame open signal may be output simultaneously from the external information output terminal 160, i.e., they may be output redundantly. However, the corresponding error alarm sounds will not be output redundantly; only the alarm sound corresponding to one of the errors will be output from the speaker 108. In this case, the error alarm sound corresponding to the more critical error may be output preferentially. Furthermore, if the magnetic sensor error is cleared after the above-mentioned overlapping errors, but the door/frame open error is not cleared, the error alarm sound corresponding to the door/frame open error will be output after the error alarm sound corresponding to the magnetic sensor error stops.

The game status indicated by the signals output from the external information output terminal 160 includes prize balls, number of confirmed symbol wins, entry into the starting slot, jackpot, game ball ejection, setting changes, setting confirmation, etc. There are multiple types of signals indicating a jackpot (e.g., first jackpot signal, second jackpot signal), each output from a separate terminal. There is a first jackpot signal output during special gameplay, and a second jackpot signal output during special gameplay and high-base states (time-saving states and probability-changing states accompanied by time-saving states). The first and second jackpot signals are output from separate terminals.

As described above, when power is turned on, a security signal is output from the external information output terminal 160 for a predetermined period as a warning indicating power-on. If an error occurs during the output period of the security signal indicating power-on, and the error is highly likely to be caused by unauthorized activity, such as a magnetic sensor error, the security signal will be output for a period exceeding the predetermined period (i.e., the output period is extended). On the other hand, if the error is a specific error that may occur due to reasons other than unauthorized activity, such as an error indicating a door or frame has been opened, the output of the security signal will end at the predetermined period (i.e., the output period is not extended). Thus, whether or not the output period of the security signal is extended may depend on the type of error that occurs during the security signal output period.

There are two ways in which power can be restored. One is when power is restored by pressing the RAM clear switch without pressing it. The other is when power is restored by pressing the RAM clear switch. Note that power restoration may also occur after a power outage due to a malfunction, or due to improper operation.

The output period for the signal indicating the transition to the configuration change state (which may be output as a security signal) is the longer of either the duration of the configuration change state or 30 seconds or more from the transition to the configuration change state. Similarly, the output period for the signal indicating the transition to the configuration confirmation state (which may be output as a security signal) is the longer of either the duration of the configuration confirmation state or 30 seconds or more from the transition to the configuration confirmation state. However, the total output period, including the security signal indicating power-on, may be 30 seconds or more. In this case, during the signal output period, an announcement indicating the configuration change state or configuration confirmation state may be executed, and after the end of the configuration change state or configuration confirmation state, an announcement indicating power-back may be executed, so that the total time of both is 30 seconds or more.

If the power is turned on accompanied by the pressing of the RAM clear switch while the security signal is being output, the security signal will continue to be output from the external information output terminal 160 even after the power is turned on. However, as a variation, the specification may be such that the security signal is also output even if the power is turned on without the pressing of the RAM clear switch while the security signal is being output. Also, while a special game is being played, a jackpot signal indicating that a jackpot state is in progress is output from the external information output terminal 160. However, if the power is turned on without the pressing of the RAM clear switch while in a jackpot state, the jackpot signal will continue to be output from the external information output terminal 160 even after the power is turned on. In this case, the security signal indicating power on will not be output from the external information output terminal 160. On the other hand, if the power is turned on accompanied by the pressing of the RAM clear switch while in a jackpot state, the jackpot signal will not be output from the external information output terminal 160 after the power is turned on, but the security signal indicating power on will be output from the external information output terminal 160. Thus, if a power restoration occurs during the output period of either the security signal or the jackpot signal, the continuation of the output of either signal may differ depending on whether the RAM clear switch was pressed. However, if a power restoration occurs during the output period of both the security signal and the jackpot signal without pressing the RAM clear switch, both signals will continue to be output after the restoration. However, the signal output timing after power restoration is such that the security signal is output first, followed by the jackpot signal.

Even during the security signal output period, the tendency for performance restrictions differs depending on whether the trigger for the security signal output is a magnetic sensor error or an abnormal prize entry error. In other words, when an error occurs that is likely to be caused by a relatively high-priority fraudulent act, the performance output tends to be restricted (first tendency), and when an error occurs that is likely to be caused by a relatively low-priority fraudulent act, the performance output tends not to be restricted or is only slightly restricted (second tendency). Here, the "first tendency" is characterized by a strong restriction on the performance output. For example, in the performance display device 60, the performance is not displayed at all due to the error notification, or most of the performance display is not displayed or is hidden by the error notification. In this case, only the error notification sound is output as audio output, and the performance sound is not output. The "second tendency" is characterized by a weak restriction on the performance output. For example, in the performance display device 60, only a small part of the performance is not displayed due to the error notification, or is only slightly hidden by the error notification. In this case, either the error notification sound is not output as audio output, and only the performance sound is output, or the error notification sound and the performance sound are output in parallel. Even if the performance is restricted, the performance control means 304 continues processing such as displaying the performance, and the error display is superimposed on the performance display, so that the performance is effectively difficult for the player to see, which may also be included in the definition of "restriction". In any case of error, the performance is restricted, but the manner of restriction may differ, for example, an error notification may be displayed only in the case of a high-priority error such as a magnet sensor error. Alternatively, an error notification may be displayed in the case of a high-priority error such as a magnet sensor error, while a small error notification may be displayed while the performance display remains for a low-priority error such as an abnormal prize entry error. Furthermore, in the case of a relatively high-priority error among the targets of the security signal, such as a magnet sensor error, the output of the performance sound may be restricted during the output period of the error notification sound. Even in the case of a relatively low-priority error such as an abnormal prize entry error, if an error notification sound is output, the output of the performance sound may be restricted during that output period. Furthermore, the tendency for whether or not there are restrictions on the animation during error notifications differs depending on whether there are errors such as door/frame opening errors or plate full errors.

Figures 41 and 42 show examples of the external information output terminal 160. Figure 41 shows a first example of the external information output terminal 160. Figure 42 shows a second example of the external information output terminal 160. The external information output terminal 160 is configured as a terminal unit (a so-called terminal block) in which multiple output terminal connectors are assembled into a single unit. The external information output terminal 160 is, for example, a terminal unit in which 10 connectors 400 (1st to 10th connectors 400a to j) are connected in a horizontal row. Each of the 1st to 10th connectors 400a to j includes two cable insertion holes 401 and two lock buttons 402. By pressing the lock button 402 to open the cable insertion hole 401, a cable 403 is inserted, and by returning the lock button 402, the cable 403 is fixed in the cable insertion hole 401. Output signals from the main board 200 and the dispensing control board 155 are input to the external information output terminal 160.

<Output terminal colors>
The connectors 400 with multiple output terminals are individually colored to distinguish them by type. Specifically, the color of the lock button 402 differs for each connector 400. For example, the first connector 400a is white, the second connector 400b is green, the third connector 400c is gray, the fourth connector 400d is yellow, and the fifth connector 400e is black. The sixth connector 400f is pink, the seventh connector 400g is blue, the eighth connector 400h is red, the ninth connector 400i is light blue, and the tenth connector 400j is purple. The example in Figure 41 is a configuration in which two cable insertion holes 401 and two lock buttons 402 included in one connector 400 are arranged side by side in the direction of continuity of the connector 400. The example in Figure 42 is a configuration in which two cable insertion holes 401 and two lock buttons 402 included in one connector 400 are arranged opposite each other in the vertical direction perpendicular to the direction of continuity of the connector 400. A gaming parlor that installs a pachinko machine 100 can optionally connect a cable 403 to any of the connectors 400 and input that information into the parlor's computer (a so-called hall computer). When connecting the cable 403, an employee refers to the output terminal explanation section shown in Figure 43, selects the connector 400 corresponding to the information to be input into the hall computer, and inserts the cable 403.

<Explanation of output terminals>
Figure 43 illustrates an output terminal explanation section. The output terminal explanation section 410 is a sticker that describes the correspondence between the information output from each of the multiple output terminal connectors 400 and the color of that output terminal. The output terminal explanation section 410 is affixed to a highly visible location on the back of the game board 80, for example, to a predetermined parts case provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 100. The output terminal explanation section 410 has a table printed on it showing the correspondence between the connector number, the sample color which is the same as the external color of the connector, the color name, and the information to be output. For example, connector number "1" is "white" and outputs "prize ball" (prize ball signal) along with the first sample color 421. Connector number "2" is "green" and outputs information indicating "door/frame open" (door/frame open signal) along with the second sample color 422. Connector number "3" is gray and outputs information indicating the "number of confirmed symbols" (symbol confirmation count signal) along with the third sample color 423. Connector number "4" is yellow and outputs information indicating a win at "start gate 1" (first start gate signal) along with the fourth sample color 424. Connector number "5" is black and outputs information indicating "start gate 2" (second start gate signal) along with the fifth sample color 425. Connector number "6" is pink and outputs information indicating "win 1" (first jackpot signal) along with the sixth sample color 426. Connector number "7" is blue and outputs information indicating "win 2" (second jackpot signal) along with the seventh sample color 427. Connector number "8" is red and outputs information indicating "out" (out signal) along with the eighth sample color 428. Connector number "9" is "light blue" and outputs information indicating "main prize ball" (winning signal) along with the 9th sample color 429. Connector number "10" is "purple" and outputs information indicating "security" (security signal) along with the 10th sample color 430.

The sticker for the output terminal explanation section 410 is a low-transparency sticker, and is formed by printing a table on a yellow background, for example, with black text and each sample color associated with it and separated by lines, and the entire area surrounded by a red border 420. However, as a variation, it may be printed on a transparent sticker of another color, for example, a table composed of white text and lines. Since the output terminal explanation section 410 may partially obstruct the visibility of components below where it is attached, it is attached in a position that does not overlap with the main CPU 290 included in the main board 200. For example, when attaching the output terminal explanation section 410 to the case of the main board 200, it is attached in a position away from the main CPU 290 so that part of the output terminal explanation section 410 does not cover the main CPU 290. Alternatively, it may be attached to the case of a board or device other than the main board 200, for example, the case of the sub-board 300. This configuration of the output terminal explanation section 410 and its attachment method ensures visibility, allowing users to quickly determine if any tampering, such as modifications to the main CPU 290, has been made. Furthermore, the output terminal explanation section 410 is affixed in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the performance display section 159. This ensures that the performance display section 159 functions fully without being hindered.

As part of the output terminal explanation section 410, a sticker printed with a terminal color correspondence table may be affixed to one of the locations. Additionally, a sticker indicating the location of the terminal unit may be affixed to the terminal unit case or its vicinity. The sticker indicating the location of the terminal unit may also be printed with a yellow background, the words "External Terminal" in black, and the entire sticker surrounded by a red border.

The output terminal description section 410 may be attached to the case of the terminal unit of the external information output terminal 160, or to other component cases, such as the case of the main board 200, the rear cover, or the case of the sub-board 300. Typically, the terminal unit of the external information output terminal 160 is designed to be compact for space-saving purposes, and as shown in Figures 41 and 42, its height is shorter than its width. On the other hand, the output terminal description section 410 needs to be somewhat large to improve visibility and make its contents easy to read. Therefore, the sticker for the output terminal description section 410 is taller than the terminal unit of the external information output terminal 160. Thus, the output terminal description section 410 is attached to a component case other than the terminal unit of the external information output terminal 160. As a modification, the output terminal description section 410 may be constructed not as a sticker, but by direct printing onto the component case, or by injection molding so that the front and text are raised onto a resin component case.

<Dispensing control board>
Figures 44 and 45 show the board case unit of the dispensing control board 155. Figure 44 shows a first example of the board case unit of the dispensing control board 155. Figure 45 shows a second example of the board case unit of the dispensing control board 155. In the first example, the dispensing control board 155 is provided with an error display device 412 and a RAM clear switch 416. The error display device 412 is a device that mainly indicates errors that have occurred in the dispensing control board 155 by the way the lamps light up. In the first example, the error display device 412 consists of five lamps, each corresponding to a different error, and the lamp corresponding to the error that has occurred lights up. Many of the errors that are indicated by the light-up of the error display device 412 are of a type that does not output an error signal from the external information output terminal 160. The dispensing control board 155 is housed so as to be covered by a transparent board case unit 417, and the error display device 412 and RAM clear switch 416 on the dispensing control board 155 can be seen by passing through the board case unit 417. A transparent, sticker-like error explanation section 413 is affixed to the outer surface of the circuit board case unit 417. The error explanation section 413 contains an explanation of the correspondence between the lamp correspondence marks 418, which indicate the correspondence with each lamp of the error display device 412, and the types of errors. The error explanation section 413 is affixed in a nearby position that does not overlap with the error display device 412, so that the positions of the five lamps of the error display device 412 correspond to the display positions of the five types of errors and the lamp correspondence marks 418. The error names corresponding to each lamp are listed as "dispensing error,""communicationerror,""tray full error,""door/frame open error," and "game ball dispensing device not connected error." Note that "dispensing error" refers to the aforementioned "game ball dispensing error," and the same applies hereafter. The spacing between the five lamp-corresponding marks 418 included in the error explanation section 413 does not necessarily have to match the spacing between the five lamps of the error display device 412. It is sufficient that the relationship between the number of lamp-corresponding marks 418 and the display order of the error messages corresponds to the number of lamps and the display order of the five lamps of the error display device 412. The multiple LEDs of the error display device 412 are shown in a way that makes it easy to intuitively understand which type of error each corresponds to. In the modified example, the error explanation section 413 may include an explanation of the correspondence between the lighting patterns of the error display device 412 (i.e., which lamps are lit and which are not) and the types of errors. For example, if multiple errors occur, the specification may be to light up only the error with the highest priority (i.e., only one lamp is lit), then clear the error associated with that lamp and light up the next highest priority error, or to light up multiple lamps simultaneously. Alternatively, the specification may be to light up only one lamp at a time, but effectively display multiple errors by switching which lamp is lit every 500ms. As another modification, the error explanation section 413 may be affixed so that a part of it overlaps with at least a part of the error display device 412. In this case, the error explanation section 413 should be affixed in a position or manner that does not obstruct the visibility of the CPU on the payout control board 155 or the error display device 412. As yet another modification, the error explanation section 413 may be configured not as a sticker, but by printing directly onto the case of the payout control board 155, or by injection molding on a resin component case so that the front and text are raised. As yet another modification, the error explanation section 413 may be affixed, printed, molded, etc., on the case unit of a board other than the payout control board 155 (for example, the board case of the power supply board 158, main board 200, launch control board 157, etc.) or on the surrounding area of the board case (for example, devices, components other than each board provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 100 shown in Figure 2, and their surroundings). In that case, the attachment (printing, molding) locations of the output terminal explanation section 410 and the error explanation section 413 should not overlap.

The RAM clear switch 416 also functions as an error release switch. The error explanation section 413 includes a string of characters and an arrow indicating the location of the RAM clear switch 416 (which also functions as an error release switch). In the example shown in Figure 44, the string of characters "RAM Clear/Error Release Switch" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the direction in which the RAM clear switch 416 is located. In a modified example, the RAM clear switch 416 and the error release switch may be provided as separate switches rather than a combined switch. In that case, the error release switch is provided on the payout control board 155 as shown in Figure 44, while the RAM clear switch 416 is provided on a board other than the payout control board 155, for example, the main board 200.

In the second example shown in Figure 45, the dispensing control board 155 is also provided with an error display device 414 and a RAM clear switch 416 as error display means. The error display device 414 is also a device that mainly indicates errors that have occurred on the dispensing control board 155 by the way it lights up, but in the example shown in this figure it is implemented in the form of a so-called 7-segment display device. The error display device 412 in the second example consists of 7 (or 8 including the dot) segment lamps, and each of the numbers represented by the 7 segments corresponds to a different error, and the number corresponding to the occurring error is displayed by the lighting of the lamp. The dispensing control board 155 in the second example is also housed so as to be covered by a transparent board case unit 417, and the error display device 412 and RAM clear switch 416 on the dispensing control board 155 can be seen by passing through the board case unit 417. A transparent sticker-like error explanation section 415 is also attached to the board case unit 417 in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the error display device 412. The error explanation section 415 contains an explanation of the correspondence between the numbers displayed by the error display device 414 and the types of errors. The error explanation section 415 shown in Figure 45 describes the correspondence between numbers and error names as follows: number "1" corresponds to "dispensing error", number "2" to "communication error", number "3" to "tray full error", number "4" to "door/frame open error", and number "5" to "game ball dispensing device not connected error". As a variation, a specific number or character indicating a non-error state, i.e., normal operation, may be displayed. In addition, for other errors, such as "radio wave sensor error" or "power-on error", the error display devices 412 and 414 may also display errors that are subject to output as security signals. As a variation, the error explanation section 415 may also be configured by printing directly onto the case of the dispensing control board 155 instead of being in the form of a sticker, or by injection molding so that the table and characters are raised on a resin component case. In the example shown in Figure 45, the text "RAM Clear/Error Reset Switch" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the direction in which the RAM clear switch 416 is located.

<Error notification>
As explained in Figures 44 and 45, errors that are not subject to security signals, such as a full tray error or a game ball dispensing device disconnection error (also called a "prepaid card unit disconnection error" or a "CR unit disconnection error"), do not output a signal indicating the error from the external information output terminal 160. Instead, the error is notified by the lighting patterns of the error display devices 412 and 414 located on the back of the pachinko game machine 100. Since the error notification is not displayed on the screen of the performance display device 60, the performance display on the performance display device 60 is not restricted and can continue, and the output of performance sounds is also not restricted. In addition, in the case of a game ball dispensing device disconnection error, the launching of game balls is stopped (even if the player rotates the launch handle 107 by hand, they cannot launch game balls), but in the case of a full tray error, the launching of game balls is not stopped (the player can launch game balls by rotating the launch handle 107 by hand). In contrast, relatively important errors, such as magnetic sensor errors that are highly likely to be caused by fraudulent activity, are not only indicated by outputting a signal from the external information output terminal 160, but also by using the screen and audio output of the performance display device 60 instead of the error display devices 412 and 414 on the back of the gaming machine to notify the user of the error. In this case, the performance display and performance audio output on the performance display device 60 are restricted. The performance display unit 159 may be used to indicate that a setting change is being performed or to indicate that the setting has been changed, or a device such as a decorative lamp 111 provided on the front of the gaming board 80 may be used to indicate the number of times it lights up or the way it lights up.

If an error occurs that is different from the errors targeted by the security signal and is not caused by fraud (for example, a full tray error), the external information output terminal 160 will not output a signal indicating that error, but will instead output an error notification sound or display an error notification. For example, in the case of a full tray error, from the moment the full tray error occurs, the screen of the performance display device 60 will display an error notification along with an image of a ball removal button (ball removal lever) for removing game balls from the ball tray (for example, the lower ball tray 106) into a box, and the words "Please remove the balls." This error notification is displayed on a layer in front of the currently displayed performance. If the balls are not removed and the error is not cleared after 10 seconds have passed since the display of the error notification, an audio warning such as "Please remove the balls" will be output as an error notification sound. Error notifications will also be issued simultaneously by the error display devices 412 and 414 on the back of the game machine, and these error notifications will start from the moment the full tray error occurs. Alternatively, for example, error notification may be omitted from the display device 60, and instead, error notification may be provided via an error notification sound and error display devices 412 and 414.

If a ball enters the large prize slot 20 during the execution of a special game, the prize ball payout will be performed along with the prize ball payout animation, which is an animation related to the number of prize balls dispensed. However, if an error related to prize ball payout occurs when a ball enters the large prize slot 20 during a special game, the prize ball animation related to that win will be performed, but the prize ball payout related to that win will be restricted. Even when the prize ball payout is temporarily restricted, the animation will continue to progress to prevent players from feeling any discomfort. An error related to prize ball payout may be an error that occurs when a problem with prize ball payout is detected due to factors such as an abnormality in the payout device or other components related to prize ball payout. For example, these include "abnormal payout number error," "payout switch abnormality error (sensor abnormality)," "payout switch abnormality error (detection of game balls outside of payout operation)," "payout switch abnormality error (detection of game balls for payout operation when payout operation is incomplete)," "payout case error (ball jamming error)," and "payout case error (payout number count switch not passed)." The prize ball display may be a display that shows the cumulative number of prize balls paid out on the screen. For example, each time the total number of prize balls paid out reaches 100, the display device 60 may highlight a round cumulative number (a multiple of a predetermined number) such as "100 balls!" or "200 balls!" on its screen and output a sound that changes according to the cumulative number. The cumulative number may be the cumulative number of prize balls paid out itself, or it may be the cumulative number of the difference in the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of balls launched (for example, the number of prize balls that enter the large prize pocket 20) from the number of prize balls paid out. The prize ball presentation may also include a presentation that displays a predetermined milestone number, such as "10,000 balls reached!", when a larger number is reached. The prize ball presentation may also include a presentation that highlights an over-winning (exceeding the prescribed number of balls that can be won into the large prize slot 20 in one round, for example, 9 or 10 balls) by displaying an indication and providing an audio message to that effect. The prize ball presentation may also include a presentation for balls that can be won into the general prize slot 33 located near the large prize slot 20, for example, at the same target position as the large prize slot 20. For example, if the number of prize balls won into the general prize slot 33 is 3, the presentation may include a presentation that highlights the additional prize balls, such as "Plus 3 balls!", by displaying an indication and providing an audio message to that effect. Furthermore, even if the payout of prize balls is temporarily restricted, the count of the total number of balls launched and the total number of prize balls used to calculate the prize ball ratio displayed on the performance display unit 159 will continue. In this case, the total number of balls launched may be an actual measured value, but the total number of prize balls may be a theoretical value, that is, a calculated value that includes the number of prize balls expected to be paid out after the error is cleared.

The types of errors that need to be addressed by limiting the payout of prize balls include those that require operation of a predetermined error clearing mechanism to clear the error state, and those that do not require operation of a predetermined error clearing mechanism to clear the error state. Errors that require operation of the error clearing mechanism are types of errors that should not be cleared until it is confirmed that the cause has been resolved, such as errors that are highly likely to be caused by fraudulent activity. Examples include "payout switch malfunction error (detection of game balls outside of payout operation)" and "payout switch malfunction error (detection of the number of game balls for payout operation when payout operation is incomplete)." Errors that do not require operation of the error clearing mechanism are types of errors whose cause may be resolved even without clearing by the clearing mechanism. Examples include "payout quantity abnormal error," "payout switch malfunction error (sensor malfunction)," and "tray full error," which can be resolved by the player removing game balls from the ball tray. There are also types of errors that can be cleared by operation of the error clearing mechanism, but can also be cleared when other conditions are met even without operation of the error clearing mechanism. Examples include "payout case error (ball jamming error)" and "payout case error (payout quantity count switch not passed)." As a means of clearing errors, a dedicated error clearing switch may be provided on the back of the pachinko machine 100, or the RAM clear switch 416 may be used in the same way as in the third premise technology. Furthermore, the priority for executing error notifications is determined according to the type of error. The error notifications referred to here include not only the error notifications in the performance display device 60, but also the error notifications in the error displays 412 and 414. In particular, the error display device 414 of the payout control board 155 is composed of a single 7-segment LED and can only display one error notification at a time. Therefore, if multiple types of errors that should be displayed using the error display device 414 occur simultaneously, the error with the highest priority will be displayed. Note that control such as limiting prize ball payouts is performed by the payout control board 155, but the prize ball performance is controlled by the sub-board 300. Therefore, even when prize ball payouts are limited by the payout control board 155, the prize ball performance is executed in parallel with that control by independent control of the sub-board 300.

<Power saving mode>
The performance control means 304 has two operating modes: a power-saving mode that limits power consumption, and a non-power-saving mode that does not switch to power-saving mode, i.e., a mode that does not limit power consumption. When the system switches to power-saving mode, light sources such as decorative lamps 111 (e.g., LEDs) are dimmed or turned off to limit their illumination, while the light source of the performance display device 60 (e.g., backlight) is not dimmed or turned off, and the device displays images with a darker color tone than those displayed in the non-power-saving mode. In other words, the power consumption of the performance display device 60 is not limited, and images with low brightness and luminance, or images with low saturation (e.g., images with emphasized black or gray) are displayed on the performance display device 60. The decorative lamps 111 are dimmed or turned off to save power, and the performance display device 60 appears to be saving power, but the backlight is not turned off. This is because turning off the backlight would take time to recover, making it difficult to display important information that affects the payout, such as jackpots, at the appropriate timing. Furthermore, the power saving mode is not activated while an error notification is displayed on the performance display device 60. In power saving mode, the text "Power saving in progress" is displayed on a portion of the screen of the performance display device 60. Even in power saving mode, the performance display unit 159 located on the back of the pachinko game machine 100 is not turned off.

The operation input means includes a first operation means other than the performance button 109, such as a directional pad 110 that is operated for a predetermined purpose, and a second operation means including the performance button 109 that is operated during normal performances. The second operation means, in particular the performance button 109, is an operation means that the player is required to press or perform other operations during normal performances. In contrast, the first operation means, such as the directional pad 110, is an operation means that is used for purposes other than operations required by performances, such as performing predetermined functions such as volume control or brightness control. For example, the volume can be adjusted with the left and right keys, and the brightness can be adjusted with the up and down keys. Both the volume and brightness can be adjusted in, for example, five levels. Furthermore, the first operation means is not limited to the directional pad 110; it may also be a touch panel that is an operation means for performing predetermined functions. Alternatively, it may be an operation means such as a performance lever that the player is required to press or perform other operations only during predetermined performances that appear in special circumstances. Alternatively, the operating means may be a RAM clear switch 416 or an error clear switch located on the back of the pachinko machine 100, which can be operated by an employee of the amusement parlor. In power-saving mode, the power-saving mode is not deactivated even if the first operating means is operated, but the power-saving mode is deactivated when the second operating means is operated. The player can adjust the light intensity of the decorative lamp 111 by operating the first operating means, but regardless of the level the light intensity is set to, during power-saving mode it will be a predetermined constant light intensity (including when the light intensity is 0). During power-saving mode it is set to be completely off or to a predetermined low light intensity. In addition, when a security signal is being output, it is set to a predetermined light intensity for security signal output, regardless of the current light intensity setting. The performance button 109 is configured to allow for automatic rapid pressing, where a long press, i.e., a single press that is held down for an extended period, is considered as multiple presses (automatic rapid pressing). For example, in a performance where a predetermined value or state changes in stages through rapid button presses, automatic rapid presses can be applied by long-pressing the performance button 109. Similarly, volume and brightness can be adjusted in stages by pressing the directional pad 110, and an image indicating the current level is displayed during volume or brightness adjustment. However, long-pressing the directional pad 110 during volume or brightness adjustment does not result in automatic rapid presses; the level changes only once. Furthermore, even during automatic rapid presses via long-pressing the performance button 109, volume and brightness adjustments can still be performed by simultaneously operating the directional pad 110. Additionally, even if a button animation requiring the press of the performance button 109 appears during volume or brightness adjustment, the performance button 109 can still be operated, and the displayed volume or brightness adjustment screen remains visible.

<Volume settings and error sounds>
When an error occurs, the error notification sound is output at a predetermined volume, independent of the volume setting set by the player. For example, the error notification sound is output at the maximum volume level. On the other hand, the sound effects during non-error states depend on the player's volume setting, which is set in advance, and are output at that volume. Furthermore, if a specific type of error occurs that is not caused by fraud, such as a door or frame opening error, the sound effect display device 60 may display a volume setting screen that shows the player the current volume setting that the player can adjust, even while the error notification sound is being output. This allows the player to set the volume that will be reflected after the error is cleared, even while the error notification is being displayed. However, even if the player adjusts the volume, the volume of the error notification sound does not change because it does not depend on the volume setting. Also, the confirmation sound output to check the setting during volume adjustment does not depend on the volume setting set by the player, and is output at the changed volume each time the volume level is changed. This allows the player to confirm the volume level audibly. However, as a variation, the confirmation sound output for setting confirmation during volume adjustment may be output at a predetermined constant volume, independent of the volume setting set by the player. As another variation, in the event of a specific error that may occur due to reasons other than fraud, such as a door or frame opening error, the volume setting screen may not be displayed on the performance display device 60 while the error notification sound is being output, or the volume setting screen may be displayed, but the setting may not be reflected immediately, but only after the error has been cleared. Alternatively, the volume setting screen may be displayed, but the setting may not be reflected immediately, nor after the error has been cleared. Note that the same processing may be applied not only when a door or frame opening error occurs, but also when a magnet sensor error or an abnormal prize entry error occurs.

If a player inputs an operation while a performance sound is being output when no specific type of error, such as an abnormal prize entry error or a door/frame opening error, is occurring, the volume of the performance sound will be changed and the display content of the volume setting screen will be changed. On the other hand, if a player inputs an operation while an error notification sound is being output when a specific type of error is occurring, the volume of the error notification sound will not be changed, but the display content of the volume setting screen will be changed. The performance display device 60 prioritizes displaying the volume setting screen over the symbol variation display, and also prioritizes displaying the error notification screen over the volume setting screen. However, as a variation, the specification may be such that the volume setting screen is prioritized over the error notification screen, or the specification may be such that the volume setting screen and the error notification screen are displayed substantially equally. "Priority" here may mean, for example, that the error notification with higher priority is displayed full-screen on the performance display device 60, or that they are displayed on separate layers, with the error notification with higher priority being displayed on a higher layer or a more prominent layer. Alternatively, high-priority error notifications may be displayed first, displayed larger, or displayed for a longer duration. During a performance, in a predetermined first situation, the player can adjust the volume, but in a different second situation, the player cannot adjust the volume. For example, in the first situation, where only the symbol change display is active, the player can adjust the volume. However, in the second situation, where a performance using the directional pad 110 is being executed, the performance takes priority to avoid overlapping uses of the directional pad 110, and the player cannot adjust the volume.

<Management Menu Screen>
When the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed from a power-off state, a management menu screen like the one shown in Figure 46 is displayed on the display device 60.

Figure 46 shows an example of the management menu screen. The management menu in Figure 46(a) displays items that can be set by an administrator, such as a game store employee, and that cannot be set by a player. In this example, it is possible to set the machine settings, reset the date and time, reset the elapsed days, and set the power saving mode. The management menu screen is displayed when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch from the power-off state. On the management menu screen, one of the setting items is selected by operating the up and down buttons on the directional pad 110, and the setting item is confirmed by pressing the effect button 109. This figure shows the case when "Machine Settings" is selected. After each setting is completed, the setting is completed by moving the cursor to "End Settings" at the bottom and pressing the effect button 109. Note that the method of exiting the management menu screen is not limited to this, and it may also be configured to exit when various settings are decided to be changed in "Machine Settings," etc. Furthermore, in each menu, if you select a setting by pressing the performance button 109, the selected setting will be executed and remembered even if you do not exit the management menu screen by pressing the performance button 109 again in "Settings Complete". For example, after setting the volume control function to off (i.e., making it unadjustable), even if the management menu screen is displayed and the power is turned off or a game ball enters the starting slot, the selected setting will be reflected. Alternatively, the system may be configured so that the selected setting is not reflected unless the management menu screen is exited by pressing the performance button 109 in "Settings Complete". In addition, if an error occurs while the management menu is displayed (for example, an illegal entry error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls are detected entering the big prize slot when a jackpot is not in progress), the system may be configured to maintain the display of the management menu while executing the screen display and audio output related to the error. In such a configuration, the screen display related to the error has a higher display priority than the display of the management menu screen, so the screen display related to the error will be displayed on a front layer than the display of the management menu screen. However, this is not limited to the above; if an error occurs while the management menu is being displayed, the system may be configured to clear the management menu and display a screen related to the error.

Figure 46(b) shows an example of the display screen when "Actual Device Settings" is selected. In this example, the "Volume Control Function" is configurable, and each setting item can be selected by operating the up and down buttons on the directional pad 110 (in this case, "Volume Control Function" is selected). The function can be switched on or off by operating the left and right buttons on the directional pad 110. When the function is set to "on," the volume control prohibition flag, which indicates whether the volume control function is prohibited (on) or permitted (off), is turned off, and when the function is set to "off," the volume control prohibition flag is turned on. For Events 2, 3, and 4, configurable items may be provided as appropriate; for example, it may be possible to switch the "Automatic Button Operation Settings" on or off. In this embodiment, the "Light Intensity Adjustment" function is always enabled, taking into consideration the prevention of epilepsy, and is configured so that it cannot be selected on or off. Furthermore, while it is possible to configure the "light intensity adjustment" function to allow on/off settings, if configured in this way, it is preferable to configure it such that the default light intensity is not set to the maximum value, and that when the "light intensity adjustment" function is turned off, the light intensity is set to a value other than the maximum value.

Figure 47 shows examples of customization guidance. Figure 47(a) is an example of the first customization guidance screen, Figure 47(b) is an example of the second customization guidance screen, and Figure 47(c) is an example of the standby demo screen. The first customization guidance is displayed when 5 seconds have elapsed since the symbol change stopped and the game was not in operation. The first customization guidance indicates that pressing the performance button 109 will allow changes to the automatic button operation settings, but it does not show how to adjust the volume and brightness. The display of the first customization guidance is semi-transparent, allowing the decorative symbols to be visible even when they overlap with the guidance display. Furthermore, pressing the performance button 109 while the first customization guidance is displayed enables customization of the actual machine (change of automatic button operation settings).

After the first customization guide is displayed, if 70 seconds have passed while the game is not in play (i.e., 75 seconds have passed since the start of the non-play period), the second customization guide will be displayed. In addition to the display format of the first customization guide, the second customization guide displays guidance images for volume adjustment and brightness adjustment at the bottom of the display area, i.e., below the first customization guide. The second customization guide is semi-transparent, similar to the first customization guide.

If 165 seconds have passed since the display of the second customization guide, i.e., 240 seconds have elapsed since the start of the non-game period, the standby demo screen will be displayed. On the standby demo screen, the first and second customization guides are hidden, and the story display, etc., is shown instead. The standby demo screen is not semi-transparent; if the standby demo screen and decorative symbols overlap, the decorative symbols will be invisible or difficult to see (e.g., the display area of the decorative symbols is smaller than that of the standby demo screen, or the decorative symbols are displayed on a background layer). Furthermore, if the volume control prohibition flag is on, the display related to volume control will not be shown in the second customization guide.

Figure 48 shows an example of customization guidance. Figure 48(a) shows the display mode of the volume adjustment setting screen that appears when the player operates the left and right buttons of the directional pad 110 while the first or second customization guidance is displayed on the display device 60. Specifically, when the first or second customization guidance is displayed, the volume adjustment screen appears when the player operates the left and right buttons of the directional pad 110. If the left button of the directional pad 110 is pressed while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the confirmation sound from speaker 108 decreases, and the illuminated portion (white portion) of the volume indicator in the upper speaker schematic diagram decreases (indicating a decrease in volume level). If the right button of the directional pad 110 is pressed, the confirmation sound from speaker 108 increases, and the illuminated portion (white portion) of the volume indicator in the upper speaker schematic diagram increases (indicating a increase in volume level). Pressing the performance button 109 sets the selected volume level.

Figure 48(b) shows the display mode of the light intensity adjustment setting screen that appears when the up and down buttons of the directional pad 110 are operated while the first customization guide or the second customization guide is displayed on the performance display device 60. Specifically, when the player operates the up and down buttons of the directional pad 110, the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. When the first customization guide or the second customization guide is displayed on the light intensity adjustment screen, if the up button of the directional pad 110 is pressed, the number of petal-shaped lights displayed on the performance display device 60 increases in three stages: "0 → 6 → 12" (indicating an increase in the light intensity level). If the down button of the directional pad 110 is pressed, the number of petal-shaped lights displayed on the performance display device 60 decreases in three stages: 12 → 6 → 0 (indicating a decrease in the light intensity level). The light intensity level is set to the selected level by pressing the performance button 109. Note that even if you operate the directional key 110 while the standby demo screen is displayed, the volume adjustment screen and the brightness adjustment screen will not be displayed, but the volume level and brightness level themselves can still be changed. In the diagram, the display corresponding to the brightness level is represented by a petal-shaped display, and the number of lit areas increases in three stages: "0 → 6 → 12". However, this is not limited to this configuration; the number of lit areas may increase in three stages: "1 → 2 → 3", or three petal-shaped displays may be provided (three petals of different display area sizes: large, medium, and small), and the display may increase in three stages: "small → medium → large".

Figure 48(c) shows the display mode of the customization execution screen that appears when the performance button 109 is operated while the first customization guide, second customization guide, or standby demo screen is displayed on the performance display device 60. When the player operates the performance button 109, the customization screen is displayed. Pressing the left or right buttons on the directional pad 110 on the customization screen moves the cursor between "ON" and "OFF" for the automatic button operation setting. Pressing the performance button 109 confirms the setting selected by the cursor. If "ON" is selected, the automatic button operation setting screen disappears, and the message "Automatic button operation setting is ON. Pressing a button during gameplay will turn off automatic button operation." is displayed. If "OFF" is selected, the automatic button operation setting screen disappears, and the message "Automatic button operation setting is OFF. Pressing a button long during gameplay will turn on automatic button operation." is displayed.

<Volume adjustment screen and brightness adjustment screen>
Figure 49 shows examples of the volume adjustment screen and the light intensity adjustment screen. In a non-time-saving state, the volume adjustment screen allows for volume adjustment during the symbol change standby state when the symbol change is stopped, or during the symbol change. Volume adjustment is performed based on the operation of the left and right keys of the directional pad 110. When the effect button 109 is operated while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, which includes a display indicating the volume, a directional pad display indicating the volume adjustment method, a display of an effect button indicating how to exit the volume adjustment screen, and a display of an image that makes the screen semi-transparent, the display of the volume adjustment screen is terminated. In a non-time-saving state, if the game is in a change standby (change stopped) state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first game side, and the second hold display on the second game side are displayed, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping with all of these, or overlapping with some of these. For example, the volume adjustment screen may be configured to overlap with the first decorative symbol but not with the second decorative symbol. This makes it possible to configure the volume adjustment screen to overlap with displays where visibility is particularly important. If the game is in a non-time-saving state and is in a spinning state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserve display on the first game side, the second reserve display on the second game side, the reserve display for the performance of the spin, and if there are reserves, the first reserve display on the first game side are displayed. Although not shown in the diagram, it is preferable to display the volume adjustment screen smaller during spinning than when spinning is in standby (spinning stopped). For example, it may be a simply reduced version of the volume adjustment screen during spinning standby (spinning stopped) (reducing each of the display showing the volume, the display of the directional keys showing how to adjust the volume, the display of the performance button showing how to exit the volume adjustment screen, and the display of the image that makes the screen semi-transparent), or it may be just the display showing the volume, or just a combination of the display showing the volume and the display of the directional keys showing how to adjust the volume. If only the display showing the volume is used, or just a combination of the display showing the volume and the display of the directional keys showing how to adjust the volume is used, the display may be the same as during spinning standby (spinning stopped), or it may be different (for example, the shape may be different, or the shape may be the same but reduced). Furthermore, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative symbol may be configured so that they do not overlap. Additionally, the volume adjustment screen, when displayed in a smaller size, may be configured so that it does not overlap with the second decorative symbol during reel spinning, but overlaps with the first decorative symbol during reel spinning. This ensures the visibility of the second decorative symbol while displaying the volume adjustment screen. It is also possible to configure the system so that the volume adjustment screen is not displayed during reel spinning, but is displayed only when the left or right buttons on the directional pad are pressed. The display priority is second decorative symbol > second hold display > volume adjustment screen > first decorative symbol > first hold display (and the hold display for the reel spinning effect). The display priority may also be second decorative symbol = second hold display, second decorative symbol < second hold display, first decorative symbol < first hold display (and the hold display for the reel spinning effect). Furthermore, if a button operation related to volume adjustment (operation of the left or right buttons on the directional pad) is performed while the standby movie is being displayed, the standby movie will be terminated and the volume adjustment screen will be displayed.

This section explains volume adjustment in the time-saving game state. In the time-saving game state, volume adjustment is possible during or while the reels are in standby (stopped). If the reels are in standby (stopped) in the time-saving game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserve display on the first game side, the second reserve display on the second game side, and the right-shoot instruction display are displayed. The volume adjustment screen may overlap with all of these, or it may overlap with some of these. For example, the volume adjustment screen may overlap with the first decorative symbol but not with the second decorative symbol. This allows for a configuration where the volume adjustment screen overlaps, except for displays where visibility is particularly important. If the reels are in motion in the time-saving game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserve display on the first game side, the second reserve display on the second game side, the reserve display for the reel's performance, the first reserve display on the second game side if there are any reserves, and the right-shoot instruction display are displayed. Although not shown in the diagram, it is preferable to display the volume adjustment screen smaller during fluctuation than during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stopped). For example, the volume adjustment screen may be configured so that it does not overlap with the second decorative pattern. For example, the volume adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stopped) may be simply scaled down (scaled down each of the display showing the volume, the display of the cross keys showing how to adjust the volume, the display of the performance button 109 indicating to exit the volume adjustment screen, and the display of the image that makes the screen semi-transparent), or only the display showing the volume may be shown, or only a combination of the display showing the volume and the display of the cross keys showing how to adjust the volume may be shown. If only the display showing the volume is shown, or only a combination of the display showing the volume and the display of the cross keys showing how to adjust the volume is shown, the display may be the same as during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stopped), or it may be different (for example, the shape may be different, or even if the shape is the same, it may be scaled down). Furthermore, the volume adjustment screen may be configured so that it does not overlap with the second decorative pattern during fluctuation. This allows the volume adjustment screen to be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the second decorative symbol. Alternatively, the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed during reel spins, but only when the left or right buttons on the directional pad are pressed. The display priority is: right-hand spin instruction > second decorative symbol > second hold display > volume adjustment screen > first decorative symbol > first hold display (and the hold display for the reel spin's special effect). The display priority may also be: right-hand spin instruction > second hold display > second decorative symbol, second decorative symbol > second hold display > right-hand spin instruction, second hold display > second decorative symbol > right-hand spin instruction, and furthermore, second decorative symbol = second hold display, first decorative symbol < first hold display (and the hold display for the reel spin's special effect).

This section explains how to adjust the light intensity in non-time-saving gameplay. In non-time-saving gameplay, the light intensity can be adjusted by operating the up and down keys on the directional pad 110 while the reel is in standby mode (reel is stopped). The display of the light intensity adjustment screen ends when the effect button 109 is operated while the light intensity adjustment screen (display showing the light intensity, display of the directional pad indicating the method of adjusting the light intensity, display of the effect button indicating to end the light intensity adjustment screen, display of an image to make the screen semi-transparent) is displayed. In non-time-saving gameplay, while the reel is in standby mode (reel is stopped), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserve display on the first game side, and the second reserve display on the second game side are displayed, and the light intensity adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping with all of these, or overlapping with some of these. If the game is in a non-time-saving state and is in a variation state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserve display on the first game side, the second reserve display on the second game side, the reserve display for the effect of the variation, and if there are reserves, the first reserve display on the first game side are displayed. Although not shown in the diagram, it is preferable to display the light intensity adjustment screen smaller during variation than when variation is in standby (variation stopped). For example, it may be a simple reduction of the light intensity adjustment screen during variation standby (variation stopped) (a reduction of each of the display showing the light intensity, the display of the cross key showing the light intensity adjustment method, the display of the effect button 109 indicating to end the light intensity adjustment screen, and the display of the image that makes the screen semi-transparent), or it may be just the display showing the light intensity, or just a combination of the display showing the light intensity and the display of the cross key showing the light intensity adjustment method. If only a display indicating the light intensity is shown, or if only a combination of a display indicating the light intensity and a directional pad displaying the method of adjusting the light intensity is shown, the display manner may be the same as that during the variable standby (variation stopped) state, but may also be different (for example, the shape may be different, or the shape may be the same but scaled down). In addition, the light intensity adjustment screen may be configured so that it does not overlap with the second decorative symbol. Furthermore, the small display of the light intensity adjustment screen may be configured so that it does not overlap with the second decorative symbol during variation, but overlaps with the first decorative symbol during variation. This makes it possible to configure the light intensity adjustment screen to overlap, except for displays where visibility is particularly important. In the non-time-shortened game state, if variation is in progress, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserve display on the first game side, the second reserve display on the second game side, the reserve display for the effect of the variation, and the first reserve display on the first game side if there are reserves will be displayed, and the light intensity adjustment screen will not be displayed. Furthermore, the system may be configured to allow light intensity adjustment even during fluctuations, or to display the light intensity adjustment screen only when the up or down keys on the directional pad are pressed, if the screen is not displayed during fluctuations. The display priority is as follows: Second decoration symbol > Second hold display > Light intensity adjustment screen > First decoration symbol > First hold display (and the hold display for the current fluctuation's effect). However, the display priority may also be: Second decoration symbol = Second hold display, Second decoration symbol < Second hold display, First decoration symbol < First hold display (and the hold display for the current fluctuation's effect). Furthermore, if a button operation related to light intensity adjustment (up or down key operation on the directional pad) is performed while the standby movie is being displayed, the standby movie will end and the light intensity adjustment screen will be displayed.

This section explains the adjustment of light intensity in the time-saving game state. In the time-saving game state, the light intensity can be adjusted while the reel is in standby (stopped). When the reel is in standby (stopped) in the time-saving game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserve display on the first game side, the second reserve display on the second game side, and the right-hand shooting instruction display are displayed, and the light intensity adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping with all of these, or it may be displayed overlapping with some of these. For example, the light intensity adjustment screen may be configured to overlap with the first decorative symbol but not with the second decorative symbol. For example, the light intensity adjustment screen during standby (stopped) may be simply a scaled-down version (scaled-down versions of the display showing the light intensity, the display of the directional keys showing the light intensity adjustment method, the display of the effect button 109 indicating the end of the light intensity adjustment screen, and the display of the image that makes the screen semi-transparent), or only the display showing the light intensity may be used, or only a combination of the display showing the light intensity and the display of the directional keys showing the light intensity adjustment method may be used. If only a display indicating the light intensity is shown, or if only a combination of a display indicating the light intensity and a directional pad displaying the method of adjusting the light intensity is shown, the display manner may be the same as that during the variable standby (variation stopped) state, but may also be different (for example, the shape may be different, or the shape may be the same but scaled down). In addition, the light intensity adjustment screen may be configured so that it does not overlap with the second decorative symbol. Furthermore, the small display of the light intensity adjustment screen may be configured so that it does not overlap with the second decorative symbol during variation, but overlaps with the first decorative symbol during variation. This makes it possible to configure the light intensity adjustment screen to overlap, except for displays where visibility is particularly important. In the time-saving game state, if variation is in progress, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second reserve display on the first game side, the second reserve display on the second game side, the reserve display for the effect of that variation, the first reserve display on the second game side if there are reserves, and the right-hand shooting instruction display are displayed, and the light intensity adjustment screen is not displayed. Furthermore, the system may be configured to allow light intensity adjustment even during fluctuations, or to display the light intensity adjustment screen when the up or down keys of the directional pad are operated, even if the screen is not displayed during fluctuations. The display priority is: right-hand play instruction display > second decorative symbol > second hold display > light intensity adjustment screen > first decorative symbol > first hold display (and the hold display for the current fluctuation's performance). The display priority may also be: right-hand play instruction display > second hold display > second decorative symbol, second decorative symbol > second hold display > right-hand play instruction display, second hold display > second decorative symbol > right-hand play instruction display, and furthermore, second decorative symbol = second hold display, first decorative symbol < first hold display (and the hold display for the current fluctuation's performance).

<Special Effects>
The performance control means 304 displays an error notification using the entire screen of the performance display device 60 when a specific, high-priority error occurs, such as an abnormal prize entry error, thus restricting the performance display using the performance display device 60. On the other hand, the performance control means 304 does not perform an error notification using the entire screen of the performance display device 60 when a predetermined, low-priority error occurs that is not caused by fraud, such as a tray full error or a game ball dispensing device not connected error, so the performance display using the performance display device 60 is not restricted. During an error notification, performances that do not use the performance display device 60, such as performances in which a movable object shaped like the machine name logo moves up and down or slides left and right, do not need to be restricted. However, if a predetermined error occurs that requires the operation of a movable object to be stopped, performances using that movable object will be restricted. For example, in a machine where a movable object is installed on the door side, if a door/frame opening error occurs, there is a risk that the movable object may collide with the adjacent machine when the door is open, so performances using that movable object will be restricted and the operation of that movable object will be stopped.

If a specific error occurs during the execution of a performance using a specific movable mechanism, one of the following actions will be taken: (1) the mechanism return operation will be performed to return the movable mechanism to its initial position before the specified time has elapsed; (2) the mechanism return operation will be performed when (or after) the specified time has elapsed; or (3) the mechanism return operation will not be performed even after the specified time has elapsed. However, in this case, the "specific error" is a significant error caused by fraud, such as one that is notified on the screen of the performance display device 60, and excludes less significant errors related to the movable mechanism (e.g., a full tray error or an abnormal prize entry error).

The pinball game machine of the first embodiment of the third premise technology comprises a game board in which a game area is formed, and a terminal unit including a plurality of output terminals. When a first error and a second error, each with different error judgment conditions, occur, first information indicating the occurrence of these errors is output from a common output terminal. When a third error, each with different error judgment conditions than the first and second errors, occurs, second information indicating the occurrence of this error is output from an output terminal separate from the common output terminal.

The "output terminal" is, for example, the external information output terminal 160 referred to in the prerequisite technology. The "terminal unit" is, for example, a unit such as the "external information output port" referred to in the prerequisite technology. The "first error" and the "second error" are errors detected primarily for the purpose of monitoring fraudulent activity. The "first information" indicating the occurrence of these errors may be, for example, a warning signal also called a security signal. The "second information" may be, for example, a signal that notifies the detection of door or frame opening. The terminal unit, which includes multiple output terminals from which the "first information" and the "second information" are output, may be a terminal block (or terminal board) with each terminal color-coded. The "first error" and the "second error" are different types of errors, and each may be any of the errors that are mainly caused by fraudulent activity, such as magnetic detection, radio wave detection, vibration detection, abnormal operation detection, abnormal prize entry detection, abnormal passage detection, abnormal ejection detection, and abnormal switch detection, but may also include errors that may occur accidentally or temporarily due to malfunctions. The "third error" is a different error from the first and second errors, and is an error that notifies of things like door/frame opening detection, which can be caused by actions of either the player or the arcade staff.

The pinball game machine of the second aspect of the third premise technology comprises a game board on which a game area is formed, a main control board including a processor for controlling the progress of the game, and a terminal unit including a plurality of output terminals. An output terminal description section is provided on a predetermined component, containing descriptions of the information output from each of the plurality of output terminals. The plurality of output terminals are configured to be distinguishable by individually coloring, and the output terminal description section describes the correspondence between the information output from each of the plurality of output terminals and the color of that output terminal. The output terminal description section is provided in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the processor included in the main control board.

The "processor" may be a device such as a central processing unit (CPU) or a graphics processing unit (GPU), and the CPU may be, for example, a main CPU 290 provided on the main board 200. Output terminals only need to be partially colored so that each terminal is easily distinguishable from others; it is not necessary for the entire terminal to be colored. The "predetermined component" may be any component included in the pinball game machine, for example, a case and its surroundings that houses a component located on the back side of the pinball game machine. The "output terminal explanation section" may explain the correspondence between the output information and the terminals in text, or part of the explanation may be colored the same as the terminals to represent their colors. The location and manner of installation of the output terminal explanation section are designed in such a manner that it does not hinder the visual assessment of whether the processor has been replaced or tampered with in an unauthorized manner.

The third aspect of the third premise technology of the pinball game machine comprises a game board in which a game area is formed, a large prize slot provided in the game area which is opened in a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay, a terminal unit including a plurality of output terminals, an error display means for displaying error details, an audio output means for outputting sound, and an effect display means for displaying the content of the effects on a screen. There are two types of errors, a first and a second, each with different error detection conditions. If a first error occurs, the game ball launch is stopped; however, if a second error occurs, the game ball launch is not stopped. If a first error occurs, no information indicating the error is output from the output terminal; however, if a second error occurs, information indicating the error is output from the output terminal. If a first error occurs, the error display means displays an error, while the performance display means does not; however, if a second error occurs, the performance display means displays an error, while the error display means does not. If a first error occurs, the performance sound output from the audio output means is not restricted; however, if a second error occurs, the performance sound output from the audio output means is restricted. If a first error occurs, the performance display from the performance display means is not restricted; however, if a second error occurs, the performance display from the performance display means is restricted.

The "error display means" is provided at any location on the pinball game machine, and may be provided, for example, on any circuit board on the back side of the pinball game machine. The "error display means" may be, for example, an LED display device including a plurality of LEDs provided on the payout control board. The "performance display means" may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device. The "first error" in the third embodiment may be an error mainly caused by something other than fraudulent activity, for example, an error that occurs when the game machine detects that it is electrically disconnected from the game ball dispensing device. The "second error" in the third embodiment may be an error that is mainly likely to be caused by fraudulent activity, such as a magnetic sensor error. The "restriction" of the audio output may be, for example, temporarily interrupting the audio output, lowering the volume, shortening the output period, or switching to a simplified audio output. The "restrictions" on the visual effects display may include, for example, temporarily suspending the visual effects display, dimming the display brightness, shortening the display period, switching to a simplified visual effect display, or overlaying other images on a higher layer than the visual effects display, making the visual content that would normally be visible difficult to see.

The fourth aspect of the third premise technology is a pinball game machine comprising: a game board in which a game area is formed; a large prize slot provided in the game area, which is opened during a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game; a payout control board that controls the payout of prize balls upon entry into prize slots, including the large prize slot; and a performance display means that displays the content of the performance on a screen. If an error occurs regarding the payout of prize balls, the payout can be restricted. During the execution of a special game, a prize ball payout animation, which is an animation related to the number of prize balls paid out, is displayed on the screen of the animation display device. If a ball enters the big prize slot during the execution of a special game, the prize ball payout is performed along with the execution of the prize ball animation. If an error regarding the payout of prize balls occurs when a ball enters the big prize slot during the execution of a special game, the prize ball animation related to that win will be executed, but the payout of prize balls related to that win will be restricted. If a ball enters the big prize slot during the execution of a special game, but the payout of prize balls related to that win is to be executed after the end of the special game, the prize ball animation will not be executed in that situation, even if the payout of prize balls is being executed after the end of the special game.

An "error related to prize ball payout" may refer to an error that occurs when a problem with prize ball payout is detected due to factors such as an abnormality in the payout device or other components related to prize ball payout. A "prize ball display" may be a display showing the number of prize balls to be paid out, and may be a display that does not occur outside of special games. A "restriction" on prize ball payout may, for example, be a temporary suspension of prize ball payout, or it may be a postponement of the execution of prize ball payout until a predetermined period later. A "situation where prize ball payout is being executed after the end of a special game" may refer to a situation where, as a result of a temporary restriction on prize ball payout, the restricted amount of prize ball payout is executed after the end of the special game, or a situation where prize ball payouts cannot keep up and continue until after the end of the special game.

The fifth aspect of the third premise technology of the pinball game machine comprises a game board with a game area formed therein, and a terminal unit including an output terminal. Upon power-on, first information is output from the output terminal. If power-on occurs, the first information is output for a predetermined period after power-on. If a first error occurs during the output period of the first information after power-on, the first information is output for a period exceeding the predetermined period after power-on. If a second error occurs during the output period of the first information after power-on, with different error judgment conditions than the first error, the output of the first information ends after the predetermined period after power-on has elapsed.

In the fifth embodiment, "power on" may refer to powering on from a simply powered-off state, but it may also refer to powering on accompanied by pressing the RAM clear switch, i.e., initialization of the means for storing the game state. Alternatively, it may refer to power off and power on without pressing the RAM clear switch, i.e., without initialization of the means for storing the game state. "First information" may refer to a warning signal, also known as a security signal. In the fifth embodiment, "first error" may be an error detected primarily for the purpose of monitoring fraudulent activity, such as a magnetic sensor error or other error that is highly likely to be caused by fraudulent activity. In the fifth embodiment, "second error" may be an error that can be caused by something other than fraudulent activity, such as an error when a door or frame is opened or when the ball tray is full.

The sixth aspect of the third premise technology of the pinball game machine comprises a game board in which a game area is formed, a light-emitting means capable of emitting light during performances, a performance display means that displays the content of the performance on a screen, and a performance control means that controls the illumination of the light-emitting means and the display of the performance display means during the performance. There are two operating modes: a power-saving mode and a non-power-saving mode. In both power-saving and non-power-saving modes, there is a waiting state where the symbols indicating whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay, remain unchanged. When transitioning to power-saving mode, the light source in the light-emitting means is dimmed or turned off, while the light source in the performance display means is not dimmed or turned off. A darker image than the one displayed in the waiting state in non-power-saving mode is displayed, and the machine does not transition to power-saving mode while the performance display means is announcing a predetermined error.

The "light-emitting means" may be LEDs such as decorative lamps 111 provided on the game machine frame or game board 80. In "power-saving mode," the power-saving mode state may be indicated by displaying text such as "Power saving in progress" on the screen of the display device 60. "Displaying an image darker than the image in non-power-saving mode" means, for example, displaying an image with lower brightness and luminance than the image displayed during the game waiting state in non-power-saving mode, making it appear darker visually, or displaying an image while adjusting its brightness and luminance to be lower than the image displayed during the game waiting state in non-power-saving mode.

The seventh aspect of the third prerequisite technology of the pinball game machine comprises a game board on which a game area is formed, a performance display means for displaying the content of the performance on a screen, an audio output means for outputting sound, and a performance control means for controlling the output of the performance display means and the audio output means during the performance. When a predetermined error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the audio output means. The volume of the sound output from the audio output means can be set according to the player's input. When no specific type of error occurs, the performance sound is output at a volume based on the volume setting set by the player. When a specific type of error occurs, the error notification sound is output at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume setting set by the player. Even while the error notification sound is being output when a specific type of error occurs, a volume setting screen showing the current volume setting to the player can be displayed on the performance display means.

In the seventh aspect, the "predetermined error" may be a type of error that triggers an error notification audio output when it occurs. The system may also be designed so that the volume setting screen is not displayed when an error other than a "specific type of error" occurs among the "predetermined errors."

The eighth aspect of the third prerequisite technology of the pinball game machine comprises a game board with a game area formed therein, an audio output means for outputting sound, and a terminal unit including multiple output terminals. When a first error and a second error, each with different error judgment conditions, occur, first information indicating the occurrence of the error is output from a common output terminal. When a third error, each with different error judgment conditions than the first and second errors, occurs, second information indicating the occurrence of that error is output from an output terminal separate from the common output terminal. A first warning sound can be output upon the occurrence of the first error, and a second warning sound can be output upon the occurrence of the third error. When both the first and third errors occur, both the first and second pieces of information indicating the occurrence of each error are output simultaneously. However, the first and second warning sounds corresponding to each error are not output simultaneously from the audio output means; instead, only one of the first or second warning sounds is output from the audio output means.

In the eighth aspect, the "first error," "second error," and "third error" may include errors that produce a warning sound and those that do not. Furthermore, the warning sound may differ depending on the type of error. For example, in the case of a door/frame open error, an audio warning sound such as "The door is open" may be output to indicate that the door/frame is open. However, in the case of errors that are highly likely to be caused by fraudulent activity, a buzzer sound may be output as a warning. When either the first or third warning sound is output from the audio output means, priority may be given to the warning sound corresponding to the error of higher importance, or priority may be given to the warning sound of the error that occurred first.

The pinball game machine according to the ninth aspect of the third premise technology comprises a game board on which a game area is formed, a main control board including a processor for controlling the progress of the game, a payout control board for controlling the payout of prize balls upon entry into each prize slot, and a terminal unit including a plurality of output terminals. An output terminal description section is provided on a predetermined component, containing descriptions of the information output from each of the plurality of output terminals. The plurality of output terminals are configured to be distinguishable by individually coloring, and the output terminal description section describes the correspondence between the information output from each of the plurality of output terminals and the color of that output terminal. The output terminal description section is provided in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the processor included in the main control board. The payout control board is provided with an error display means indicating the type of error that has occurred. The case housing the payout control board is provided with an error description section describing the correspondence between the display mode of the error display means and the type of error. The output terminal description section is provided on a different component from the error description section, and the error description section is provided in a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the error display means.

The errors displayed by the "error display means" are mostly related to the payout of prize balls, but may also include errors unrelated to prize ball payout. While the case housing the payout control board may include an "error explanation section," the case housing the payout control board does not necessarily need to include an "output terminal explanation section." The error explanation section may be positioned so as not to overlap with the error display means, i.e., so that at least a portion of the error explanation section does not cover at least a portion of the error display means. Even if it overlaps with the error display means, i.e., so that at least a portion of the error explanation section covers at least a portion of the error display means, it is sufficient if it is positioned in a manner such as shape or color that does not impede its visibility.

The pinball game machine of the tenth aspect of the third premise technology comprises a game board in which a game area is formed, a large prize slot provided in the game area which is opened in a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal game, a terminal unit including a plurality of output terminals, an error display means for displaying the error details, an audio output means for outputting sound, and a performance display means for displaying the performance details on a screen. There are first and second errors, each with different error judgment conditions. When a first error occurs, the launch of game balls is stopped, but when a second error occurs, the launch of game balls is not stopped. When a first error occurs, information indicating the occurrence of the error is not output from the output terminal, but when a second error occurs, information indicating the occurrence of the error is output from the output terminal. When a first error occurs, the error display means displays the error, but the performance display means does not. When a second error occurs, the performance display means displays the error, but the error display means does not. If a first error occurs, the output of the performance sound from the audio output means is not restricted. However, if a second error occurs, the output of the performance sound from the audio output means is restricted. If a first error occurs, the performance display from the performance display means is not restricted. However, if a second error occurs, the performance display from the performance display means is restricted. If a third error occurs, which has different error judgment conditions than the first and second errors, the output terminal does not output information indicating the occurrence of the third error. Instead, it outputs a warning sound from the audio output means indicating the occurrence of the third error, or displays a warning message indicating the occurrence of the third error on the performance display means.

In the tenth embodiment, the "third error" may be an error that is not subject to signal output from the output terminal and is not caused by fraudulent activity, such as an error indicating that the game ball dispensing device is not connected. The warning display indicating the occurrence of the "third error" may be displayed not only by the performance display means but also by the error display means.

The pinball game machine of the eleventh aspect of the third premise technology comprises a game board in which a game area is formed, a large prize slot provided in the game area which is opened in a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay, a payout control board that controls the payout of prize balls when balls enter the prize slots, including the large prize slot, and a performance display means that displays the content of the performance on a screen. If an error occurs regarding the payout of prize balls, the payout can be restricted. During the execution of a special game, a prize ball payout animation, which is an animation related to the number of prize balls paid out, is displayed on the screen of the animation display means. If a ball enters the big prize slot during the execution of a special game, the prize ball payout is performed along with the execution of the prize ball animation. If an error regarding the payout of prize balls occurs when a ball enters the big prize slot during the execution of a special game, the prize ball animation related to that win will be executed, but the payout of prize balls related to that win will be restricted. If a ball enters the big prize slot during the execution of a special game, but the payout of prize balls related to that win is performed after the end of the special game, even if the payout of prize balls is performed after the end of the special game, the prize ball animation will not be executed in that situation. There are multiple types of errors related to the payout of prize balls, and these multiple types of errors include at least errors that require operation of a predetermined error clearing means to clear the error state, and errors that do not require operation of a predetermined error clearing means to clear the error state.

In the eleventh embodiment, the "predetermined error release means" may be provided as a dedicated error release switch, or it may be provided in a manner that is shared with other switches.

The pinball game machine of the twelfth aspect of the third premise technology comprises a game board in which a game area is formed, a terminal unit including a plurality of output terminals, and a storage means for storing information indicating the game state. When power is turned on accompanied by initialization of the storage contents of the storage means, first information is output from the output terminals. When power is turned on accompanied by initialization of the storage contents of the storage means, the first information is output for a predetermined period after power is turned on accompanied by initialization of the storage contents of the storage means. When a first error occurs during the output period of the first information output after power is turned on accompanied by initialization of the storage contents of the storage means, the first information is output for a period exceeding the predetermined period after power is turned on accompanied by initialization of the storage contents of the storage means. If a second error occurs with different judgment conditions, the output of the first information will cease after a predetermined period has elapsed following power-on, which involves the initialization of the memory contents of the memory device. During the execution of a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay, second information different from the first information will be output from another output terminal. If power-on occurs during the execution of a special game without initializing the memory contents of the memory device, the second information will continue to be output after that power-on, while the first information will not be output. If power-on occurs during the execution of a special game with initialization of the memory contents of the memory device, the second information will not be output after that power-on, while the first information will be output.

In the twelfth aspect, the "second information" may be information indicating that a special game is in progress. Here, the "information indicating the game state" stored in the "storage means" includes not only the type of game state, such as "probability variation state" or "time reduction state," but also information such as whether or not there are any lottery values corresponding to a jackpot among the held win/loss lottery values. For example, the current game state (high probability/low probability, high base/low base, time reduction/non-time reduction, special game/non-special game, etc.), whether or not there are held values, whether or not a variation is in progress, if a variation is in progress, the elapsed time or remaining variation time, if a game state has a limited number of plays, the remaining plays or elapsed plays of that game state, and if a special game is in progress, the remaining rounds or elapsed rounds or current rounds, in addition to the elapsed time or remaining time or count of the current round, may be stored as "information indicating the game state."

The pinball game machine of the 13th aspect of the third premise technology comprises a game board on which a game area is formed, a light-emitting means capable of emitting light during a performance, a performance display means for displaying the content of the performance on a screen, a performance control means for controlling the emission of light by the light-emitting means and the display by the performance display means during the performance, a first operation input means capable of receiving operation input, and a second operation input means capable of receiving operation input but different from the first operation input means. There are two operating modes: a power-saving mode and a non-power-saving mode. While operating the first operation input means during the power-saving mode does not transition to the non-power-saving mode, operating the second operation input means during the power-saving mode transitions to the non-power-saving mode.

In the 13th embodiment, the "second operation input means" is an operation input means operated during normal gameplay, and may include, for example, a gameplay button that the player is required to press when executing a preview or reach gameplay sequence. The "first operation input means" may be an operation means such as a touch sensor or directional pad used for purposes other than operations primarily required of the player during gameplay, such as volume control or light intensity adjustment. Alternatively, it may be an operation means such as a lever that the player is required to press only during specific gameplay sequences that appear under special circumstances. In these cases, the first operation input means may be a combination of gameplay button A and the second operation input means may be gameplay button B. Furthermore, the "first operation input means" may be an operation means provided on the back of the pachinko machine, operated by an employee of the game parlor, etc.

The pinball game machine of the 14th aspect of the third premise technology comprises a game board on which a game area is formed, a performance display means for which the display content in the performance is displayed on a screen, an audio output means for outputting sound, and a performance control means for controlling the output of the performance display means and the audio output means in the performance. When a predetermined error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the sound output means. The volume of the sound output from the sound output means can be set according to the player's input. When no specific type of error occurs, the sound effects are output at a volume based on the volume setting set by the player. When a specific type of error occurs, the error notification sound is output at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume setting set by the player. Even while the error notification sound is being output when a specific type of error occurs, a volume setting screen showing the current volume setting can be displayed on the display means. Furthermore, if the player inputs an input while the sound effects are being output when no specific type of error occurs, the volume of the sound effects and the content displayed on the volume setting screen are changed. Conversely, if the player inputs an input while the error notification sound is being output when a specific type of error occurs, the volume of the error notification sound remains unchanged, but the content displayed on the volume setting screen is changed.

In the 14th embodiment, the error notification sound for a "specific type of error" may be output at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume setting. Furthermore, the display device may prioritize the display of the volume setting screen over the display of the symbol changes, and may prioritize the display of the error notification screen over the volume setting screen.

The pinball game machine according to the 15th aspect of the third premise technology comprises a game board with a game area formed therein and a terminal unit including a plurality of output terminals. When a first error and a second error, each with different error judgment conditions, occur, first information indicating the occurrence of these errors is output from a common output terminal. When a third error, each with different error judgment conditions than the first and second errors, occurs, second information indicating the occurrence of this error is output from an output terminal separate from the common output terminal. Even when power is turned on, the first information can be output from the common output terminal. When power is turned on, the first information is output for a predetermined period after power-on. If a first or second error occurs during the output period of the first information output after power-on, the first information is output for a period exceeding the predetermined period after power-on. If a third error occurs during the output period of the first information output after power-on, the output of the first information ends after the predetermined period after power-on has elapsed.

The pinball game machine according to the sixteenth aspect of the third premise technology comprises a game board in which a game area is formed, a large prize slot provided in the game area which is opened during special gameplay which is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay, a terminal unit including a plurality of output terminals, an error display means for displaying error details, an audio output means for outputting sound, a performance display means for displaying performance details on a screen, and a payout control board for controlling the payout of prize balls when balls enter the prize slots, including the large prize slot. There are two types of errors, a first and a second, each with different error detection conditions. If a first error occurs, the launch of the game balls is stopped, but if a second error occurs, the launch of the game balls is not stopped. If a first error occurs, no information indicating the occurrence of the error is output from the output terminal, but if a second error occurs, information indicating the occurrence of the error is output from the output terminal. If a first error occurs, the error display means displays an error, but the performance display means does not. If a second error occurs, the performance display means displays an error, but the error display means does not. If a first error occurs, the output of performance sounds from the audio output means is not restricted, but if a second error occurs, the output of performance sounds from the audio output means is restricted. While the display of effects on the display means is not restricted, if a second error occurs, the display of effects on the display means is restricted. If an error related to the payout of prize balls occurs, the payout of prize balls can be restricted. During the execution of the special game, the prize ball effect, which is an effect related to the number of prize balls paid out, is displayed on the screen of the display means. If a ball enters the big prize slot during the execution of the special game, the prize ball effect is executed along with the payout of prize balls. If an error related to the payout of prize balls occurs when a ball enters the big prize slot during the execution of the special game, the prize ball effect related to that entry is executed, while the payout of prize balls related to that entry is restricted. If a ball enters the big prize slot during the execution of the special game, but the payout of prize balls related to that entry is executed after the end of the special game, the prize ball effect is not executed in that situation, even if the payout of prize balls is executed after the end of the special game.

The pinball game machine of the 17th aspect of the third premise technology comprises a game board on which a game area is formed, an audio output means for outputting sound, a light-emitting means capable of emitting light during a performance, a performance display means for displaying the content of the performance on a screen, a performance control means for controlling the output of the audio output means, the illumination of the light-emitting means, and the display of the performance display means during a performance, and an error display means for displaying the content of an error. When a predetermined error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the audio output means, and there are two operating modes: a power-saving mode and a non-power-saving mode. In both the power-saving mode and the non-power-saving mode, there is a waiting state in which the symbols indicating whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal gameplay, have not changed. When switching to power-saving mode, the light source in the light-emitting means is dimmed or turned off, while the light source in the performance display means is not dimmed or turned off. A darker image than the one displayed in the non-power-saving mode's game waiting state is displayed. While a predetermined error is being announced by the performance display means or error display means, the system does not switch to power-saving mode. The volume of the sound output from the audio output means can be set according to the player's input. When no specific type of error is occurring, the performance sound is output at a volume based on the volume setting set by the player. When a specific type of error is occurring, the error announcement sound is output at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume setting set by the player. Even while an error announcement sound is being output when a specific type of error is occurring, a volume setting screen showing the current volume setting can be displayed on the performance display means.

In the following embodiments, it is assumed that all or part of the above-mentioned prerequisite technologies (1-3) are included as the basic configuration, and the differences from those prerequisite technologies will be explained in detail.

(First embodiment)
In the first embodiment, a specific performance is executed in which a predetermined deformation process is performed on the performance image (also called "specific image") on the screen in accordance with the performance operation of the movable mechanism, but error notification images and setting menu images such as volume adjustment and brightness adjustment (these are also called "non-specific images") are not subjected to deformation processing. During gameplay, the error notification image is displayed so as not to overlap with the setting menu images for volume adjustment and brightness adjustment, but on the standby demo screen during game standby, it may be displayed to overlap with the setting menu images.

As shown in Figure 33, the foremost error display layer 521 on the performance screen 500 of the performance display device 60 can display an error notification image (error warning image 536) to notify the player that an error has occurred and the type of error. The next layer, the volume and light intensity display layer 522, can display a volume setting image 532 showing an interface for adjusting the volume by the player, and a light intensity setting image 534 showing an interface for adjusting the light intensity by the player. The next layer, the game status layer 523, can display images such as a simple decorative pattern 504, a simple hold image 507, a variation image 508, and a guidance display 530 instructing the player to shoot to the right. The displayed content is constantly updated. Note that the term "error notification image" in this embodiment may also include the guidance display 530 instructing the player to shoot to the right, in addition to the error warning image 536.

As shown in Figure 34, a specific animation (screen deformation animation) can be performed on the image displayed on the animation display device 60, which undergoes a predetermined deformation process in conjunction with the animation operation of the movable prop 520.

Figure 50 shows an example screen of an error warning image and a settings menu image during gameplay in the first embodiment. During the execution of a specific animation, screen transformation animation processing is performed for specific images that do not contain the error warning image 536 or the settings menu image 535, but not for non-specific images that contain at least one of the error warning image 536 or the settings menu image 535. During gameplay, one error warning image 536 or setting menu image 535 is displayed in a visible position that overlaps with multiple specific images but does not overlap with other non-specific images.

If an error occurs before the screen transformation animation is executed, resulting in the display of the error warning image 536, or if an error occurs during the execution of the screen transformation animation, the error warning image 536 will be displayed superimposed on the screen transformation animation. In this case, as shown in Figure 33, the error warning image 536 is displayed on the topmost error display layer 521 and not on the animation layer 524. Therefore, it is not included in the target object 516, which is the frame image subject to transformation, and no transformation process is performed. This not only ensures that the execution of the screen transformation animation is not hindered even when an error occurs, but also ensures that the visibility of the error warning image 536 is not hindered by excluding it from the screen transformation animation.

As shown in Figure 33, the volume setting image 532 and the brightness setting image 534 are displayed on the volume/brightness display layer 522, which is in front of the performance layer 524. Even if a screen transformation effect is executed during gameplay, the volume setting image 532 and the brightness setting image 534 are not displayed on the performance layer 524, and therefore are not included in the target object 516, which is the frame image that is subject to transformation, and no transformation process is performed. By excluding the volume setting image 532 and the brightness setting image 534 from the target of the screen transformation effect, the visibility of the volume setting image 532 and the brightness setting image 534 can be avoided. Even during screen transformation effects in gameplay, the error warning image 536 is displayed so as not to overlap with the setting menu image 535, which includes the volume setting image 532 and the brightness setting image 534. In this way, regarding volume adjustment for adjustable sound, even when a predetermined error occurs, the system is configured not to overlap (displayed in different display areas) so as not to obstruct the visibility of the image display that helps to understand the degree of adjustment. While theatrical displays are enhanced by image distortion, error messages and player-requested prompts are displayed normally without distortion to accurately convey the current situation. Images such as the simplified decorative symbols 504, simplified hold images 507, in-spin images 508, and the guidance display 530 for right-hand play, displayed on the game status layer 523, are not included in the target object 516, and therefore are not subjected to the screen distortion effect.

Although the movable parts 520 are not shown in Figure 50, as shown in Figure 34, the first movable part 520a, second movable part 520b, third movable part 520c, and fourth movable part 520d may be operated in a manner that overlaps with the screen transformation effect, error warning image 536, and setting menu image 535 on the screen of the performance display device 60.

Figure 51 shows a first example of the error warning image and setting menu image 535 during game standby in the first embodiment. The screen example in this figure is a screen example during game standby (for example, as shown in Figure 47(b), the state after 5 seconds have elapsed in a non-game state, as shown in Figure 47(a), when the second customization guidance is displayed after another 70 seconds have elapsed in a non-game state, i.e., 75 seconds have elapsed since the non-game period began). When a predetermined error occurs in the performance display device 60 (for example, a door opening error or frame opening error that occurs when a door/frame opening signal is detected, a prize ball payout error that stops prize ball payout due to insufficient game balls or when the upper ball tray 105 and lower ball tray 106 are full of game balls, a warning indicating that left-handed play has been detected during a guidance display that guides right-handed play, etc.), an error warning image 536 indicating the error (showing the occurrence of the error and the type of error) is displayed. Furthermore, during the waiting period for gameplay after a game has stopped, the display device 60 may display a setting menu image 535, which includes a volume setting image 532 showing an interface for the player to adjust the volume, and a light intensity setting image 534 showing an interface for the player to adjust the light intensity. In such a waiting period, the error warning image 536 is displayed so as not to overlap with the setting menu image 535, which includes the volume setting image 532 and the light intensity setting image 534.

Figure 52 shows a second screen example of the error warning image and setting menu image 535 during game standby in the first embodiment. This screen example is a screen that can be displayed during game standby (for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed in a non-game state, as shown in Figures 47(a) and 47(b), and after the player presses a performance button during the display of the customization guidance screen). It is a setting menu image 535 that the player operates to configure various customization settings, language settings, etc. Thus, the error warning image 536 can be displayed together with the setting menu image 535 on the screen of the performance display device 60 during game standby. The setting menu image 535 is an image that constitutes a setting menu including the first to ninth buttons 535a to h. During game standby as shown in this figure, the error warning image 536 can be displayed visibly in a position overlapping with the setting menu image 535.

The error displayed as the error warning image 536 in Figures 50 to 52 is an error called a "prize payout error" or "tray full error," where the payout of prize balls stops when the upper and lower ball trays 105 and 106 are full of game balls. When this error occurs, the error warning image 536 is first displayed on the screen, and an error voice message saying "Please remove the balls" is output after a predetermined time delay (for example, 5 seconds) from the time the error occurs. However, there is no error notification by the illumination of the decorative lamp 111 corresponding to the error type. The error voice message is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) and then stops. However, if the player immediately removes the game balls that were filling the trays before the error warning image 536 is displayed on the screen and the error voice notification is made, the error voice notification will not be made. Furthermore, during special gameplay, while allowing players to enjoy the jackpot animation, the game balls cannot be immediately removed from the tray until a staff member brings a box to the player's machine. Therefore, no "prize ball payout error" or "tray full error" error voice announcements are made. The error warning image 536 persists until the tray is cleared and the error is resolved.

The error sounds for "prize ball payout error" or "tray full error" are audio notifications without beeps (warning sounds), making it easy for players to notice the change in volume when they adjust it. In contrast, with error sounds that include beeps, the sound effect is too quiet to notice the change even if the volume is adjusted. Therefore, volume adjustment may be disabled, or the volume adjustment setting may only be reflected after the error is cleared. For error sounds with beeps that clear after a certain period, the volume adjustment setting may be reflected even if the error is not cleared, or volume adjustment may be enabled. Since the audio effect returns to normal, the sound adjustments should be performed as usual even if the error is not cleared.

When a pre-announcement effect is performed, including the operation of a mechanical device and a screen transformation effect, the normal hold image 506 may be subject to transformation by the screen transformation effect, but as shown in Figure 33, the simplified hold image 507 is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation effect. Furthermore, since the movable mechanical device 520 can be operated even while a screen transformation effect that includes the normal hold image 506 as a target for transformation is being performed, care must be taken to ensure that the visibility of the simplified hold image 507 is not obstructed by the movable mechanical device 520 when viewed from the front while it is in operation. In this case, the display of the normal hold image 506 may also be designed so that its visibility is not obstructed by the movable mechanical device 520, or it may be designed so that it can be obstructed. Alternatively, the normal hold image 506 may not be subject to transformation by the screen transformation effect. Furthermore, in the first pre-announcement effect (e.g., a pre-announcement of a change in the reserve), the normal reserve image 506 may be displayed in a fixed position even during the screen transformation effect so that it can be seen. In the second pre-announcement effect (e.g., a zone effect area or a chance symbol), the normal reserve image 506 may be included as a target of the transformation effect. For displays such as the simplified reserve image 507 and the simplified decorative symbols 504, whose primary purpose is not to perform an effect but to guarantee and secure the display state of the reserve image or decorative symbols, transforming them would negatively affect notifications such as the fact that a change is in progress. Therefore, they should not be transformed and should not overlap with movable parts so that the game status can be accurately conveyed.

Even if the movable mechanism 520's performance cannot be executed due to a mechanism operation error, the screen transformation performance can still be executed. To ensure that the movable mechanism 520 does not stop midway due to a mechanism operation error, the display position of the normal hold image 506 (display position A of the normal hold image 506 in performance mode A, and display position B of the normal hold image 506 in performance mode B) is positioned so that at least a portion of all hold images (including the one in question) are not hidden by the movable mechanism 520. Similarly, the simple decorative symbols 504 and the simple hold image 507 are positioned so that they are not hidden by the movable mechanism 520 even if the movable mechanism 520 stops midway due to a mechanism operation error. In the event of a relatively high-priority error such as a magnet sensor error, the performance operation of the movable mechanism 520 is also stopped. In this case, a power cycle or RAM reset is required. Therefore, the display switches from the currently running variable animation image to an error notification image (for example, an image with a black background indicating an error and a message about power cycle and RAM reset). However, the simplified decorative symbols 504 and simplified hold images 507 remain visible so that the continued variation of the symbols can be visually confirmed. However, in the event of a high-priority error, the timer update process for measuring the elapsed time of the special symbols' variation also stops. Therefore, the display of the special symbols' variation does not end, and the simplified decorative symbols 504 continue to display their variation without stopping. Even if the movable mechanism 520 is not operating, the expectation level is indicated through the animation, preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. Even if the movable mechanism 520 stops in an exposed state, important elements such as the number of held symbols can still be visually confirmed.

(Second Example)
This embodiment has a distinctive feature regarding the output pattern of the confirmation sound during volume adjustment. Below, we will mainly explain the differences from the first embodiment and the first to third prerequisite technologies, and omit the explanation of the common points.

If the volume is adjusted while the game is in standby mode, a confirmation sound indicating the volume setting will be output. This confirmation sound during standby mode will output a voice message indicating the volume level, such as "Volume is now 3," along with a sound effect. For example, the volume of this voice message could be the same as the voice message spoken by a character in a scene. If the volume is set higher, such as in a chance pattern, the confirmation sound will be louder than the normal confirmation sound. The volume of sound effects (melody, etc.) may be the same as the background music.

If the volume is adjusted during gameplay, the output of the confirmation sound will be suppressed, while the volume setting of other sound effects will be directly reflected in the volume settings of the other sound effects. Suppression of the confirmation sound output can take several forms, such as (1) not outputting the confirmation sound, (2) outputting it at a low volume, or (3) a more suppressed version than usual, for example, only sound effects will be output, omitting the audio indicating the volume level, such as "Volume has reached 3."

During the waiting period before gameplay, sound effects and background music are often not output. Therefore, outputting a confirmation sound makes it easier for players to understand the set volume level. Conversely, during gameplay, outputting a confirmation sound would interfere with the game's effects, preventing players from mistakenly believing that something is happening. It also prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to other sound effects being difficult to hear.

Furthermore, in this embodiment of the pachinko game machine, the sub-board 300 is equipped with switches (rotary switches or DIP switches) that can be operated by the administrator. These switches allow the administrator to set the reference volume (initial volume value) when the power is turned on, switch whether or not the player can adjust the volume, and set the adjustable range (maximum volume setting value) for the player's volume adjustment. When the adjustable range (maximum volume setting value) for the player's volume adjustment is set low, if the player adjusts the volume beyond this range, i.e., increases the volume when it is at the maximum volume setting value, an audio notification indicating that the volume is at the maximum setting value ("Volume is at maximum," "Volume is 3 (when '3' is the maximum volume setting value)") is issued if the machine is in standby mode. However, during gameplay, no specific notification is given that the volume is at the maximum volume setting value; instead, the currently outputting sound effects are output as is, and the current volume setting value is displayed on the image screen.

(Third embodiment)
This embodiment is characterized by its ability to display a preview image during screen transformation effects. Below, we will mainly explain the differences from the first and second embodiments and the first to third prerequisite technologies, and omit the explanation of the common points.

The special determination means (corresponding to the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212 in Figure 3) performs a special determination regarding whether or not conditions for controlling the game state to be advantageous to the player are met. The "special determination" may be, for example, a win/loss determination, a symbol lottery, particularly a symbol lottery that determines whether or not to transition to a time-saving mode, a role lottery in slots, or an AT lottery. When executing a specific performance, if a predetermined transformation process is performed, and a specific performance execution mode is selected in which a preview image suggesting the result of the special determination is displayed in the area corresponding to the original image remaining outside the transformed image, the expected probability of the special determination result being advantageous to the player is set higher than when a preview image suggesting the result of the special determination is not displayed in the area corresponding to the original image remaining outside the transformed image.

Figure 53 shows an example screen displaying a preview image in the screen transformation effect of the third embodiment. In the screen transformation effect, the target object 516, which is the frame image to be transformed, is transformed. At this time, the content of the target object 516 before transformation is retained in the form of a background image 551 in an area located outside the target object 516 during transformation, i.e., the area corresponding to the image before transformation. For example, the character image 537 displayed at the bottom center of the target object 516 is displayed so as to remain at the bottom center of the background image 551. The mode image 538 displayed at the top left of the target object 516 is displayed so as to remain at the top left of the background image 551. The background image 551 is displayed, for example, in the background layer 525 in Figure 33. Because the background image 551 is displayed as an afterimage of the target object 516, even if the content of the target object 516 changes during the transformation process, for example, if the color changes, the content and color of the background image 551 remain in the state before the transformation process.

A preview image 539, which suggests the result of a special judgment, is displayed in an area located outside the target object 516 during deformation. The preview image 539 is displayed in the form of words or symbols such as "Hit," "NEXT," or "Hot," or a specific character image. The preview image 539 may be displayed as part of the background image 551 displayed on the background layer 525, or it may be displayed on the game status layer 523 or the performance layer 524 in Figure 33. When displayed on the game status layer 523 or the performance layer 524, it may be displayed so as not to overlap with the target object 516 by appearing immediately after the target object 516 is deformed by the screen deformation effect and a gap-like area is created between it and the background image 551. By displaying the preview image 539 in an area located outside the target object 516 during deformation in this way, the entertainment value of the screen deformation effect can be enhanced. The preview image 539 may be presented not in an area outside the target object 516 during transformation, but in an area where visibility is enhanced during the screen transformation effect. The frame image 510 surrounding the target object 516 may change color from the default color to red, then gold, increasing the rank of expectation. If the screen transformation effect is displayed multiple times across multiple fluctuation displays in a pre-read effect, and the frame image 510 is repeatedly shaken to ensure visibility, the color may be changed at that time and maintained until the symbol fluctuation that is the target of the pre-read effect. Similar to Figure 32, the frame image 510 is drawn outside the screen display range of the effect display device 60 before the transformation process and is not visible until immediately before the transformation process. Furthermore, not limited to pre-read effects, the system may be configured to perform multiple screen transformation effects during multiple pseudo-fluctuations within a single symbol fluctuation using a pseudo-consecutive fluctuation effect.

In the modified version, the background image 551 may be a solid color background of black or another color. The background image 551 may also be an image from a different performance mode (different stage), serving as a stage change notification to suggest a transition in performance mode or stage. Note that the guidance display 530 and the simple decorative symbols 504 displayed in the game status layer 523 are displayed on a higher layer than the target object 516 displayed in the performance layer 524, and are therefore displayed superimposed on the target object 516. Furthermore, as another example, in cases where there is a high probability of multiple screen transformation sequences being executed due to pre-announcement sequences, etc., the display of the expected level, indicated by the color of the frame image 510, may continue to be displayed even after the completion of the first screen transformation sequence. For example, if a red frame image 510 is displayed during the screen transformation sequence, at least a portion of the red frame image may remain at the edge of the display area, or the effect sequence (such as a red effect) displayed along with the red frame image 510 may be configured to remain in the display area. Alternatively, the illumination pattern (in this example, a red-based illumination) corresponding to the chance-up mode of the screen transformation sequence may continue in parts of the frame or game board's effect lamps outside the display area. In this way, when the sequence continues due to the execution of a screen transformation sequence due to a pre-announcement sequence, etc., it continues until a predetermined timing in the target change or the pseudo-change before the development of a reach in that change, for example, the timing of the sequence development (such as the development of a super reach), and thereafter, the image display and lamp illumination sequence are executed according to the sequence sequence corresponding to the developed high-expectancy sequence.

(Fourth embodiment)
This embodiment has features related to the notification of right-hand play upon power outage recovery and the initialization operation of the movable mechanism. Below, we will mainly explain the differences from the first to third embodiments and the prerequisite technologies of the first to third embodiments, and omit the explanation of the common points.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs during right-handed play, the indicator lamp (one of the multiple decorative lamps 111 indicating right-handed play) is restored to illumination before the indicator display 530 that guides right-handed play is restored. In this embodiment, the decorative lamps 111 on the frame are designated as "right-handed play guide lamps," but in variations, predetermined decorative lamps placed on the game board may be designated as "right-handed play guide lamps," or both decorative lamps on the frame and the game board may be used.

The game state storage means (main RAM 291) stores information related to the control of the game's progress, even when the power supply to the game machine 100 is cut off. The game state recovery means, upon startup of the game machine 100, performs a recovery process based on the game progress control information stored in the game state storage means to restore the game to its state before the power supply was cut off (Figure 15, etc.).

The game area 81 comprises a first game area (left-handed shooting area), which is the area where game balls are launched in the normal state, and a second game area (right-handed shooting area), which is the area where launching game balls in a state more advantageous than the normal state is advantageous. Here, "advantageous state" may refer to, for example, a special game, a minor win game, a specific game state (time-saving state, probability fluctuation state, easy ball entry state, high base state, etc.), or any other special state where game balls should be launched into the second game area.

The main control means (main board 200) causes the display device to display a message encouraging the player to launch the game ball towards the second game area when the game state is favorable, as predetermined information regarding the progress of the game. More specifically, when the game state is favorable, the main control means (main board 200) indicates this by the lighting pattern of a specific LED (right-hand shooting lamp) included in the game state display unit 76. Lighting the specific LED (right-hand shooting lamp) indicates a favorable state (a state where right-hand shooting is recommended), and turning it off indicates that the state is not favorable. The performance control means 304 causes the performance display device 60 to display a message encouraging the player to launch the game ball towards the second game area when the game state is favorable, as predetermined information regarding the progress of the game (guidance display 530).

When a power outage occurs while the game state is favorable and the game state recovery means (main initial processing execution means 280, main power outage processing execution means 282) performs a recovery process, the right-hand shooting indicator prompting the player to launch the game ball towards the second game area is displayed before the guidance display 530 on the performance display device 60 or the lamps (decorative lamps 111) guiding the player to shoot to the right, by the illumination of the lamps on the game state display unit 76.

Furthermore, the main control means (main board 200) of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment has setting means (setting change device 170, setting change means 286, setting confirmation means 287) that can change predetermined settings related to the game machine 100. The setting means has two states: a setting change state in which the setting contents can be changed, and a setting confirmation state in which the setting contents can be confirmed. During normal power-on, the initialization operation of the movable mechanism 520 is performed after power-on. However, when power-on in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the performance display device 60 notifies that the setting change state or setting confirmation state is in effect. To ensure the visibility of the performance display device 60, the initialization operation of the movable mechanism 520 is put on hold and executed after transitioning to the game state (after the end of the setting change state or setting confirmation state). If the setting confirmation state was in effect when the recovery process was performed, a display prompting the player to launch game balls towards the second game area is shown in parallel with the initialization operation after the setting confirmation state ends and the player transitions to the game state.

Figure 54 is a time chart showing the relationship between the right-hand strike notification and the processing after power outage recovery in the fourth embodiment. Figure 54(a) shows the processing during normal power outage recovery, Figure 54(b) shows the processing during power outage recovery accompanied by setting confirmation, and Figure 54(c) shows the processing during power outage recovery accompanied by setting change.

In Figure 54(a), if a power outage occurs during the right-hand play lamp illumination period 560, when the lamp indicating right-hand play included in the game status display unit 76 is lit, or during the right-hand play guidance display period 561, when the guidance display 530 guiding players to play to the right is displayed (t10), the system transitions to the power outage recovery period 562, during which the normal power outage recovery process is performed. At this time, the right-hand play lamp illumination period 560 of the game status display unit 76 is restarted from the moment the lamp becomes lit again before the end of the power outage recovery period 562, and a 30-second error notification 567 (illumination of decorative lamps 111 and movable mechanism 520, and output of the error sound "Power is on") is performed. After the power recovery process is completed (t12), the right-hand play guidance display period 561, which displays the guidance display 530, is restarted, and the initialization operation of the movable mechanism 520 is performed in parallel (movable mechanism initialization operation period 563). Since it takes time for the image display on the display device 60 to recover after a power outage, the recovery time for the right-hand shooting lamp and the decorative lamps 111 (which indicate errors) on the game status display unit 76 is set to start earlier than the guidance display 530. This allows the player to be notified of the game status as quickly as possible and to return to gameplay smoothly.

In Figure 54(b), if a power outage occurs during the right-hand shooting lamp illumination period 560, when the lamp indicating right-hand shooting included in the game status display unit 76 is lit, or during the right-hand shooting guidance display period 561, when the guidance display 530 guiding players to shoot to the right is displayed (t10), the system transitions to a power outage recovery period 562, in which a power outage recovery process accompanied by setting confirmation is executed. In this case, a 30-second error notification 567 is executed before the end of the power outage recovery period 562, but the right-hand shooting lamp illumination period 560 of the game status display unit 76 does not resume. The right-hand shooting lamp does not light up because game balls cannot be launched until the setting confirmation state is completed. After that, when the power recovery process is completed (t12), the system enters the setting confirmation state 564, but the initialization operation of the movable mechanism 520 remains in the pending state 566. This is because the game is still stopped in the setting confirmation state 564, and this is to ensure the visibility of the management menu display. Once the setting confirmation state 564 is complete, the right-hand shooting lamp illumination period 560 of the game status display unit 76 and the right-hand shooting guidance display period 561, which displays the guidance display 530, are resumed. Simultaneously, the initialization operation of the movable mechanism 520 is performed (movable mechanism initialization operation period 563).

In Figure 54(c), if a power outage occurs during the right-hand shooting lamp illumination period 560, when the lamp indicating right-hand shooting included in the game state display unit 76 is lit, or during the right-hand shooting guidance display period 561, when the guidance display 530 guiding players to shoot to the right is displayed (t10), the system transitions to a power outage recovery period 562, in which a power outage recovery process involving a setting change is executed. In this case, a 30-second error notification 567 is executed before the end of the power outage recovery period 562. However, since the setting change involves a RAM clear, the right-hand shooting state, which is an advantageous game state, ends, and the right-hand shooting lamp illumination period 560 of the game state display unit 76 and the right-hand shooting guidance display period 561, which displays the guidance display 530, do not resume. After the power recovery process is completed (t12), the system enters a setting change state 565, but the initialization operation of the movable mechanism 520 remains in a pending state 566. In the setting change state 565, the game is still stopped, in order to ensure the visibility of the management menu display. Once the setting change state 565 is complete, the initialization operation of the movable mechanism 520 is performed (movable mechanism initialization operation period 563). The initialization operation period 563 for the movable mechanism is executed when the setting change state 565 is completed.

Furthermore, it is possible to determine specific effects (pre-announcement/pre-reading effects) that link the performance of the movable mechanism 520 with the screen transformation effects. When the power is turned on, the effects displayed before the power cut are canceled, and the pre-announcement can be executed from the next spin. When a new spin starts during the initialization operation of the movable mechanism 520, (1) the execution of the specific effect is not determined, and other pre-announcements are performed to enhance the excitement. (2) Only the screen transformation effect is performed without the movable mechanism 520. Since it is clear that a pre-announcement with the expected value according to the lottery is being executed, the player can be sufficiently informed of the expected value regardless of the length of the mechanism's execution period.

When the power is turned on, the movable mechanism 520 returns to its initial position, displays an "initializing" indicator, and performs the initialization operation. If there are multiple movable mechanisms 520, such as the first movable mechanism 520a, the second movable mechanism 520b, and the third movable mechanism 520c, they may be initialized sequentially or simultaneously. Even if one movable mechanism 520 stops due to getting stuck or the like, the initialization operation of the other movable mechanisms 520 can continue, and only the movable mechanism 520 whose initialization operation is not completed will be marked as having an operation error. If the movable mechanism 520 is large, and the front frame 102 is equipped with a movable part (for example, the performance lever 112 described later), if it operates while the door is open, there is a risk of it touching adjacent gaming machines, players, or staff, and there is a possibility of malfunction due to excessive load during operation, so the initialization operation while the door is open may be configured to be in a standby state (held state). Furthermore, in the case of the movable mechanism 520 provided on the game board, the initialization operation while the door is open may be kept in a standby state to avoid malfunctions caused by vibrations associated with the opening and closing of the door body (front frame 102). If a performance lever 112 is provided, if it cannot be returned to its initial position due to tampering or other reasons during performance execution, a message such as "Please return the lever" may be displayed, but if it cannot be returned during initialization, a message such as "Please check the lever" may be displayed. In other words, the error message for the same error may differ during gameplay and during initialization, or the notification sound or lamp lighting pattern may differ. For example, the notification sound and lamp lighting pattern may be suppressed during gameplay, and emphasized when the power is turned on to make it easier for arcade staff to prompt maintenance. If the performance button 109 or performance lever 112 is stopped due to an error (input cannot be detected), the performance button 109 or performance lever 112 may be set to automatic operation. In the case of the movable mechanism 520 provided on the game board, the button performance of the winning/losing branching mechanism, etc., is not determined (only effects, etc., are displayed without a button). As described above, proper initialization of the movable mechanism 520 is achieved, preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the performance by preventing the machine from stopping due to errors in the movable mechanism unrelated to any malfunction. Furthermore, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine, the operation of the movable mechanism upon power-on is divided into two steps: an initial position return operation that returns it to its initial position, and an initialization operation that verifies through a series of actions whether normal performance operations can be performed from the initial position. However, if the movable mechanism is in operation when the power is turned on, putting it into a standby state at power-on could lead to contact with nearby gaming machines, players, or staff, or obstruct the visibility of important information such as setting change status or setting confirmation status. Therefore, it may be configured to perform an initial position return operation, then put it into a standby state, and execute the initialization operation after the standby state is resolved.

(Fifth Example)
This embodiment is characterized by an image display and audio output that notify the power outage recovery process. Below, we will mainly explain the differences from the first to fourth embodiments and the first to third prerequisite technologies, and omit the explanation of the common points.

In this embodiment, the image displayed after power outage recovery is the power outage recovery image. Even while the power outage recovery image is displayed, the guidance display 530 indicating right-hand play is possible. Even after the power outage recovery image is hidden, the power outage recovery notification audio continues to be output, and after the notification audio output period has elapsed, the sound effect returns. Even if left-hand play is detected while the power outage recovery image is displayed, the left-hand play warning audio is suppressed, and the power outage recovery notification audio takes priority. If left-hand play detection continues while the power outage recovery image is displayed, the right-hand play warning image is displayed. When power outage recovery occurs, an audio notification is given for a certain period to ensure that surrounding arcade staff are notified. Because the power outage recovery audio is prioritized as an error notification, the power outage recovery audio is not drowned out by the sound effect even when the image display returns and the performance is displayed. Since the right-hand play warning audio notification is difficult to hear, an image is used to provide a warning.

During the recovery process, an image indicating that the recovery process is underway, called a "power outage recovery image," is displayed on the display device 60 for a predetermined period. Simultaneously with the display of the power outage recovery image, a message (guidance display 530) prompting the player to launch game balls towards the second game area 81 is also displayed on the display device 60. During the recovery process, an audio notification indicating that the recovery process is underway can also be output from the speaker 108.

If a performance start command is received during the predetermined period for displaying the power recovery image and the system is ready to display the performance, the system will switch from the power recovery image to the performance display without waiting for the predetermined period to elapse. Meanwhile, the output of an announcement voice indicating that the power recovery process is underway will continue, and after the announcement voice output period has elapsed, the system will switch from the announcement voice to the performance sound output. The predetermined period for displaying the power recovery image and the period for outputting the announcement voice indicating that the power recovery process is underway may be the same length or may be of different lengths.

Until the duration of the voice notification indicating that the system is undergoing recovery processing has elapsed, even if a game ball is detected aimed at the first game area 81 despite the guidance display 530 prompting the player to launch the game ball towards the second game area 81, the voice notification indicating that the system is undergoing recovery processing will take precedence over the voice notification prompting the player to launch the game ball towards the second game area 81.

If, during the recovery process, a guidance display 530 prompting the player to launch game balls towards the second game area 81 is shown, but the player continues to launch game balls towards the first game area 81, the guidance display 530 prompting the player to launch game balls towards the second game area 81 will be switched to a more emphatic display.

Figure 55 is a time chart showing the error notification timing for power outage recovery in the fifth embodiment. Figure 55(a) shows the error notification timing during normal power outage recovery. When a power outage occurs (t10), the system transitions to the power outage recovery period 562, during which the normal power outage recovery process is executed. At this time, before the end of the power outage recovery period 562, an error notification 567a is performed by the illumination of a lamp for 30 seconds (illumination of decorative lamps 111 and movable parts 520), an error notification 567b is performed by the output of an announcement voice saying "Power is on", and an error notification 567c is performed by displaying a special image (power outage recovery image 570) indicating power outage recovery with the text "Power outage recovery in progress". After that, when the power recovery process is completed (t12), if the right-hand play guidance display 530 was displayed before the power outage, the right-hand play guidance display period 561 is resumed.

Here, even if a leftward shot is detected while the power recovery image 570 is displayed (t14), the "Power is back on" notification voice output takes priority, and the voice output warning against leftward shots or encouraging rightward shots is suppressed. Therefore, if leftward shot detection continues while the power recovery image is displayed, the rightward shot warning image will be displayed. For example, the guidance display 530 can be enlarged or its colors inverted to enhance its display and more strongly alert the player. Even when switching the guidance display 530 to a highlighted display mode, the notification voice remains suppressed.

Figure 55(b) shows the error notification timing when the performance starts immediately after power restoration. When a power outage occurs (t10), the system transitions to a power restoration period 562 during which the normal power restoration process is executed. At this time, before the end of the power restoration period 562, an error notification 567a (illumination of decorative lamps 111 and movable parts 520) is performed for 30 seconds from the moment notification becomes possible, followed by an error notification 567b (output of the "Power is back on" voice message), and an error notification 567c (display of the power restoration image 570). After the power restoration process is completed (t12), if the right-hand play guidance display 530 was displayed before the power outage, the right-hand play guidance display period 561 is resumed.

Here, if the power recovery process is completed during the 30-second error notification 567 (t12), and a performance start command is received while the performance display is possible (t16), the system switches from the power recovery image 570 to the performance display without waiting for the 30-second notification period to elapse (performance display period 568). Meanwhile, the output of the notification audio indicating that the recovery process is underway continues, and after the output period of the notification audio (error notification 567b) has elapsed, the system switches from the notification audio to the performance sound output (performance sound output period 569).

The predetermined period during which the power-off recovery image 570 is displayed (error notification 567c) and the period during which the audio notification indicating that the recovery process is underway is output (error notification 567b) may be the same length or may be of different lengths. As shown in Figure 55(b), if the system switches from the power-off recovery image 570 to the performance display without waiting for the 30-second notification period to elapse, the notification period for the image-based error notification 567c will be shorter than the notification period for the audio-based error notification 567b. On the other hand, exceptionally, in cases such as recovery during special gameplay or during a long remaining spin time, the image display may not return during special gameplay or the recovered spin (it will not return until the jackpot end command, spin stop command, or next spin start command is received), in which case the audio-based error notification may end first.

(Sixth example)
This embodiment is characterized by the operation of multiple movable parts and multiple error notifications. Below, we will mainly explain the differences from the first to fifth embodiments and the first to third prerequisite technologies, and omit the explanation of the common points.

In this embodiment, multiple error notification images are displayed in positions that are not covered by multiple movable parts.

The first movable mechanism (first movable mechanism 520a, fourth movable mechanism 520d) is a movable mechanism that can swing around at the periphery of the game area 81 as part of the performance. The second movable mechanism (second movable mechanism 520b, third movable mechanism 520c) is a movable mechanism that can be deployed to cover most of the center of the display area as part of the performance. The movable mechanism 520 has two performance patterns: a first mechanism performance pattern in which the first movable mechanism (first movable mechanism 520a, fourth movable mechanism 520d) is operated while the second movable mechanism (second movable mechanism 520b, third movable mechanism 520c) is not operated; and a second mechanism performance pattern in which the first movable mechanism (first movable mechanism 520a, fourth movable mechanism 520d) and the second movable mechanism (second movable mechanism 520b, third movable mechanism 520c) are operated in cooperation.

The anomaly detection means (main error detection means 284, sub-error detection means 364) detects various anomalies that may occur within the gaming machine 100. The anomaly display control means, in response to the anomaly detection means detecting an anomaly, performs anomaly display control to display anomaly information indicating the occurrence of the anomaly in the anomaly display area of the display area.

Figure 56 shows the state of the movable mechanism and the location of the error notification in the sixth embodiment. Figure 56(a) shows the initial stage of operation of the movable mechanism 520, and Figure 56(b) shows the state in which the movable mechanism 520 has operated to its maximum range. The abnormality display control means, in response to the abnormality detection means detecting a first abnormality and a second abnormality, performs abnormality display control by simultaneously displaying first abnormality information 536a, indicating that the first abnormality has occurred, and second abnormality information 536b, indicating that the second abnormality has occurred, on the performance display device 60 in a mutually identifiable manner. The performance control means 304 performs performance display control even when the first abnormality information 536a and the second abnormality information 536b are displayed simultaneously on the performance display device 60 by the abnormality display control means. As abnormality display control, the abnormality display control means displays the first abnormality information 536a and the second abnormality information 536b on the performance display device 60 in a display manner that allows the performance display displayed by the performance control means 304 to be visually recognized.

The abnormality display area is an area not covered by the first movable mechanism (first movable mechanism 520a, fourth movable mechanism 520d). When the first movable mechanism (first movable mechanism 520a, fourth movable mechanism 520d) operates according to the first mechanism performance pattern, the abnormality display control means displays the first abnormality information 536a and the second abnormality information 536b in the abnormality display area without overlapping with the first movable mechanism (first movable mechanism 520a, fourth movable mechanism 520d). When the first movable mechanism (first movable mechanism 520a, fourth movable mechanism 520d) and the second movable mechanism (second movable mechanism 520b, third movable mechanism 520c) are operated according to the second mechanism performance pattern, the visibility of the performance by the second mechanism performance pattern takes precedence over the visibility of the first and second abnormal information 536a and 536b. In the display area, the area not covered by the first movable mechanism (first movable mechanism 520a, fourth movable mechanism 520d) is larger than the area covered by the first movable mechanism (first movable mechanism 520a, fourth movable mechanism 520d).

(Seventh Example)
This embodiment is characterized by its volume control during the output period of the error notification sound. Below, we will mainly explain the differences from the first to sixth embodiments and the first to third prerequisite technologies, and omit the explanation of the common points.

In this embodiment, during the error notification audio output period, the error notification audio is output at a specific volume regardless of the volume adjustment by the first and second volume adjustment means, and the sound effects are suppressed. Furthermore, if the power is restarted during the specific error notification audio output period, the volume set by the second volume adjustment means is reflected after the error is cleared.

The speaker 108 is an audio output means capable of outputting audio effects controlled by the performance control means 304. The performance input operation device 115 is an operation input means that allows the operator to transmit predetermined operation information to the performance control means 304. The main control means (main board 200) has an abnormality detection means (main error detection means 284) capable of detecting the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality.

The performance control means 304 includes a first volume adjustment means (sound control means 306) and a second volume adjustment means. The first volume adjustment means changes the volume of the sound effect output from the speaker 108 when a volume change operation is performed on the operation input means to change the volume of the sound effect output from the speaker 108. The second volume adjustment means is provided on the control board (sub-board 300) equipped with the performance control means 304 and consists of a switch (rotary switch, DIP switch, etc.) that can be operated by an operator (manager such as a game store employee). By changing the setting position of this switch, the volume of the sound effect output from the speaker 108 is changed. The volume of the sound effect output from the speaker 108 can be set based on the operation status of the first and second volume adjustment means.

When the performance control means 304 receives information from the main error detection means 284 of the main board 200 indicating the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality, it can output an abnormality notification sound (error notification voice) from the speaker 108 at a specific volume, regardless of the operation status of the first volume adjustment means and the second volume adjustment means. At this time, the performance sound is output at a suppressed predetermined volume to ensure that the error notification voice is not drowned out by the performance sound and can be clearly heard.

The performance control means 304 can perform operations to change the volume of the sound effects on the first and second volume adjustment means during the period when the error notification sound is output from the speaker 108. On the other hand, the performance control means 304 will not output the sound effects at the changed volume from the speaker 108 until the output of the error notification sound ends. However, a predetermined confirmation image indicating that the volume has been adjusted is displayed on the performance display device 60. Since the confirmation image indicates that the volume has been adjusted, the player can change the volume to their preferred level even if the volume hasn't been changed immediately.

The sound effect control means 304, during the period when an error notification sound is output from the speaker 108, performs an operation to change the volume of the sound effect on at least one of the first volume adjustment means or the second volume adjustment means. If a power outage occurs during a predetermined abnormality (such as a magnet sensor error, a particularly serious error requiring a power cycle to clear), and then the power is restored and the predetermined abnormality is resolved, the control means 304 sets the volume of the sound effect output from the speaker 108 based on the setting status of the switch related to the second volume adjustment means. In this case, since the setting is erased by the power cycle, the volume adjustment setting by the first volume adjustment means is not reflected, and no confirmation image is displayed. However, the initial volume setting by the second volume adjustment means is accepted and reflected as the initial volume setting after the error is cleared.

(Eighth example)
This embodiment is characterized by its notification of the status of the setting means and the notification of door open errors. Below, we will mainly explain the differences from the first to seventh embodiments and the first to three prerequisite technologies, and omit the explanation of the common points.

In this embodiment, the notification of the status of the setting means is given higher priority than the notification of a door open error.

The main board 200 has setting means (setting change device 170, setting change means 286, setting confirmation means 287) that can change predetermined settings related to the gaming machine 100. The setting means has three states: a setting change state where the setting can be changed, a setting change completion state where the setting has been changed, and a setting confirmation state where the setting can be confirmed. The performance control means 304 can display a performance indicator on the performance display device 60 that identifies which state the setting means of the main board 200 is in: the setting change state, the setting change completion state, or the setting confirmation state. The gaming machine 100 also has a door open error state, indicating that the door body (front frame 102, transparent plate 103, door 104) is in an open state.

Figure 57 shows the error notification patterns corresponding to various errors. This figure shows the relationship between the priority of setting status notification and door open error notification. In the illustrated table, the error type shown in a higher row has a higher notification priority. That is, the notification priority is set higher for the setting change completion state 571, the setting change state 565, and the setting confirmation state 564 than for the door open error state 572. Note that "high notification priority" indicates which error is prioritized for notification by each notification means when multiple error states occur simultaneously and the notification means used for each error overlap. If there are parts where the notification means do not overlap for multiple errors, it is possible to perform part of the error notification using the non-overlapping notification means.

In the setting change completion state 571, an error notification 567a is issued by the illumination of lamps, where many of the lamps (decorative lamps 111 on the front frame 102 and game board 80, lamps on the movable mechanism 520, etc.) flash red for 30 seconds. Also in the setting change completion state 571, an error notification 567b is issued by audio output, stating "Setting complete" for 7 seconds. In the setting change completion state 571, no error notification 567c is issued via image display, and the screen of the performance display device 60 returns to the performance display.

In setting change state 565, error notification 567a is provided by the illumination of lamps, with most of the lamps flashing red until the power is turned off or a setting key is pressed. Also in setting change state 565, error notification 567b is provided by audio output, stating "Settings are being changed" until the power is turned off or a setting key is pressed. In setting change state 565, error notification 567c is not provided by image display; instead, the screen of the display device 60 shows a management menu screen as shown in Figure 46.

In the setting confirmation state 564, error notification 567a is provided by the illumination of lamps, with most of the lamps flashing red for 30 seconds after the power is turned off or the setting key is operated. Also in the setting confirmation state 564, error notification 567b is provided by audio output, with the message "Checking settings" being output for 7 seconds after the power is turned off or the setting key is operated. In the setting confirmation state 564, error notification 567c is not provided by image display; instead, the screen of the display device 60 shows the management menu screen as shown in Figure 46.

In the door open error state 572, error notification 567a is provided by the illumination of lamps, with most of the lamps illuminating red from the door open state until 30 seconds after the door closes. Also in the door open error state 572, error notification 567b is provided by audio output, stating "The door is open" for 3 minutes while the door is open and for 7 seconds after the door closes. Finally, in the door open error state 572, error notification 567c is provided by image display, stating "The door is open" on the screen of the display device 60 from the time the door is open until it closes.

The performance control means 304 transitions from the setting change state 565 to the setting change completion state 571 when the setting change state 565 is completed while a door opening error has occurred. Conversely, the performance control means 304 transitions from the setting confirmation state 564 to the door opening error state 572 when the setting confirmation state 564 is completed while a door opening error has occurred.

The setting change state is of higher security importance compared to the setting confirmation state, and security can be enhanced by configuring it to perform more detailed external notification control. In particular, when changing settings, configuring the system to have two game states (error states) – "setting change state" (when the setting change is in progress) and "setting change complete state" (when the setting change is complete) – allows for a longer notification period to external parties, ensuring that the successful execution of the setting change is reliably communicated externally.

Furthermore, even if a power outage occurs while the game is in the "settings change completed" state, the information indicating the "settings change completed" state is not reset during the initialization of the performance control board and RAM clearing processes performed when the power is turned on. If a power outage occurs before the "settings change completed" state ends, the system is configured to re-notify that the "settings change completed" state is active. Therefore, even if someone intentionally terminates the "settings change completed" state immediately, the system is configured to always notify externally that the "settings change completed" state, i.e., that a settings change has been made, for a certain period of time.

(Ninth Example)
This embodiment has a distinctive feature regarding error notification for excessive payout abnormalities. Below, we will mainly explain the differences from the first to eighth embodiments and the first to third prerequisite technologies, and omit the explanation of the common points.

The main error detection means 284 of the main board 200 can detect abnormal ball entry status according to the ball entry status at predetermined prize entry points. When the main board 200 detects an abnormal ball entry status, it can transmit error information related to the abnormal ball entry status, including information that allows it to identify the prize entry point where the abnormality was detected, to the performance control means 304. For example, the system is configured to store data in which sensor detection information for each prize entry point (first start point 11, second start point 12, large prize entry point 20, general prize entry point 33, etc.) is assigned to each bit of a one-byte unit, and to transmit data with a bit data of "1" corresponding to the prize entry point determined to be abnormal to the performance control means 304 as error information.

The performance control means 304, upon receiving error information, causes a predetermined light-emitting device to illuminate in a manner that indicates an abnormal ball entry state. The "predetermined light-emitting device" includes the light-emitting parts of the decorative lamps 111 and movable parts 520, the light-emitting parts of each prize entry point (first start point 11, second start point 12, large prize entry point 20, general prize entry point 33, etc.), and LEDs included in the game state display unit 76.

The performance control means 304, upon receiving error information related to an abnormal ball entry state, causes a specific light-emitting device corresponding to the prize entry slot where the abnormal ball entry state was detected to illuminate in a specific mode among several modes for notifying the abnormal ball entry state. The "specific light-emitting device" is, for example, the light-emitting part of the prize entry slot where the abnormal ball entry state was detected, or an LED or decorative lamp 111 of the game state display unit 76 that is pre-assigned as a light-emitting part corresponding to the prize entry slot where the abnormal ball entry state was detected. The light-emitting part of the prize entry slot may be an LED provided on the outside or near the prize entry slot, or it may be a plurality of LEDs arranged on the game state display unit 76 in a manner corresponding to each prize entry slot.

Figure 57 shows an over-payout error 573, which is an "over-payout detection A" error. This error occurs when an abnormality in the number of winning balls per unit time or excessive payout during special gameplay is detected. Over-payout error 574 is an "over-payout detection B" error. This error occurs when an abnormality in the number of winning balls per unit number of shots (or number of balls passing through the payout slot) is detected.

If an overpayment error 573 is detected, the error notification 567a, via lamp illumination, will, if the overpayment error 573 is due to an abnormal number of winning balls per unit time, flash the lamp corresponding to the winning slot where the first sensor detected the abnormality in yellow, and illuminate the other lamps in red. If the overpayment error 573 is due to excessive payout during special gameplay, illuminate all lamps used for error notification in red. The error notification 567a via lamp illumination will continue until the power is turned off. The error notification 567b, via audio output, will output the message "Overpayment detected" until the power is turned off. The error notification 567c, via image display, will display the message "Overpayment detected" on the screen of the display device 60 until the power is turned off.

If an overpayment error 574 is detected, the error notification 567a, via lamp illumination, will cause the lamp corresponding to the first sensor that detected the anomaly to flash yellow, and the other lamps to illuminate red. This lamp illumination error notification 567a will continue until the power is turned off. The error notification 567b, via audio output, will output the message "Overpayment detected" until the power is turned off. The error notification 567c, via image display, will display the message "Overpayment detected" on the screen of the display device 60 until the power is turned off.

This allows for not only notification of an over-discharge anomaly, but also clearly indicates the location of the anomaly. In particular, by using different light patterns—such as flashing yellow and solid red—the location of the anomaly can be easily distinguished.

In the modified example, the performance control means 304 determines that an over-payout abnormality has occurred if the predetermined abnormality judgment criteria are met based on the reception status of the winning information, and transitions to an error state related to an abnormal ball entry status. When the performance control means 304 transitions to the over-payout abnormality error state, it notifies the error in the manner shown in Figure 57.

(Tenth Example)
This embodiment has a distinctive feature regarding error notification for communication line abnormalities. Below, we will mainly explain the differences from the first to ninth embodiments and the first to third prerequisite technologies, and omit the explanation of the common points.

The control means (main board 200, sub-board 300) controls the progress and presentation of the gaming machine 100. The error notification means includes an image display device, a light-emitting device, and an audio output device as means for notifying the player of errors. When a specific error is detected by the control means, the multiple devices included in the notification means can notify the player of the occurrence of that specific error, and the notification is initiated at least a predetermined time after the occurrence of the specific error.

The "specific error" referred to here is, for example, a communication line anomaly 575 in Figure 57, such as a disconnection or a temporary inability to receive normal commands. The predetermined time is, for example, at least 10 seconds from the error detection. When a communication line anomaly is detected, it may be due to a momentary or temporary malfunction, and communication may immediately return to normal. Therefore, reporting it as an error every time in such cases could be unnecessarily cumbersome. To determine whether the anomaly is persistent or merely temporary, a predetermined delay is introduced before reporting. In this embodiment, multiple error reporting means, such as error reporting by lamp illumination 567a, error reporting by audio output 567b, and error reporting by image display 567c, are used to report the error with a delay of at least 10 seconds from the error detection.

(11th Example)
This embodiment has a distinctive feature regarding the error notification for abnormal power-on. Below, we will mainly explain the differences from the first to tenth embodiments and the first to third prerequisite technologies, and omit the explanation of the common points.

The gaming machine 100 has a power-on state, which indicates that the power has been turned on. As shown in Figure 57, the power-on state includes a special power-on state (abnormal power-on 576), which indicates that the power was turned on with initialization (RAM clear) of the gaming machine 100, and a normal power-on state (normal power-on 577), which indicates that the power was turned on to restore the gaming machine 100 to its state before the power outage. The gaming machine 100 also has error states with a higher notification priority than the power-on states (abnormal power-on 576, normal power-on 577) (for example, setting change completion state 571, setting change state 565, setting confirmation state 564, overpayment error 573, overpayment error 574, communication line abnormality 575, etc., error states shown higher in Figure 57 than abnormal power-on 576 and normal power-on 577).

When the power is turned on (abnormal power on 576, normal power on 577), the performance control means 304 can notify that the power has been turned on (abnormal power on 576, normal power on 577) by controlling the light emission of the light emission device. However, the notification method for notifying that the power has been turned on by controlling the light emission of the light emission device differs between the notification method for a special power-on state (abnormal power on 576) and the notification method for a normal power-on state (normal power on 577). In the case of a normal power-on state (normal power on 577), most of the lamps used for error notification light up red for 12 seconds. In the case of a special power-on state (abnormal power on 576), only the lamps at specific locations among the lamps used for error notification (for example, lamps located at the top of the game board) flash red and white for 5 seconds, and the other lamps light up red for 30 seconds, which is longer than in the case of a normal power-on state (normal power on 577). In this special power-on state (abnormal power on 576), the 5-second blinking takes precedence over all other error notifications that may occur simultaneously (for example, setting change completion state 571, setting change state 565, overpayment error 573, overpayment error 574, communication line abnormality 575, etc.; however, the setting confirmation state does not occur simultaneously as it only occurs if there is no RAM clear operation).

In the event of a special power-on state (abnormal power-on 576), a special light-emitting mode period is set for at least a portion of the notification period to notify the system that the power has been turned on through the light-emitting control of the light-emitting device. The special light-emitting mode period is, for example, 5 seconds. During this 5-second special light-emitting mode period, even if an error with a higher notification priority than the power-on state notification occurs and may occur simultaneously (e.g., setting change completion state 571, setting change state 565, overpayment error 573, overpayment error 574, communication line abnormality 575, etc.), at least some light-emitting devices (e.g., lamps located at the top of the game board) will prioritize the notification mode for the special power-on state (flashing red and white), while other lamps will remain lit red for 30 seconds.

By making the error notification lamp illumination patterns different for normal power-on (577) and abnormal power-on (576), it is possible to clearly notify that a power-on accompanied by a RAM clear has been performed. In particular, even if a fraudulent user who illegally cleared the RAM intentionally generates another high-priority error to conceal their fraudulent activity, the abnormal power-on (576) notification takes precedence over the error notification they tried to intentionally generate, ensuring that the error is reliably reported without any attempt at deception.

Furthermore, under normal circumstances, when the power is turned on by opening or closing the door, the notification of the door open error state 572 continues for 30 seconds after closing. Therefore, the error notification time of the lamp will continue for at least 30 seconds after closing, based on the control based on the occurrence of the door open error state 572.

(Twelfth Example)
This embodiment has a distinctive feature regarding notification of door open errors. Below, we will mainly explain the differences from the first to eleventh embodiments and the first to third prerequisite technologies, and omit the explanation of the common points.

While detecting the opening of the door (front frame 102, transparent plate 103, door 104), the system transitions to a door open error state 572, indicating that the door is in an open state. In the door open error state 572 shown in Figure 57, the door open error can be notified via an image display device (effect display device 60), an audio output device (speaker 108), and a light-emitting device (various effect lamps such as decorative lamps 111 and LEDs on the game status display unit 76).

In the case of a door open error state 572, an error notification 567c can be displayed on the display device 60 as an image indicating the door open error state 572, along with the text "Door is open," for the duration that the door is open.

In the case of a door open error state 572, the light-emitting device can be illuminated to notify the door open error state 572 as an error notification 567a by lighting a lamp, during the period while the door is open and during the first period after the door open error state 572 is resolved (the period from the time the door is closed until 30 seconds later).

In the case of a door open error state 572, an error notification 567b can be provided via audio output, in which case the door open error state 572 can be notified during the door open period (and during the second period after the door open error state 572 is resolved (the period from the door closing to 7 seconds)) via the speaker 108, for example, with an audio message such as "The door is open."

If the door open error state 572 persists throughout the third period (the period while the door is open), the error notification via image display 567c and the error notification via lamp illumination 567a will continue, while the error notification via audio output 567b can be suppressed at some point during the third period. This "some point" could be, for example, three minutes after the detection of the door open error. The three-minute limit on the audio output error notification 567b while the door is open is inconvenient because it would be disruptive if the audio error notification continued even during prolonged periods of door openness, such as during maintenance work. Suppression of the audio error notification can be achieved by, for example, reducing the volume, increasing the interval between audio outputs, or stopping the audio output altogether.

If the voice error notification 567b is suppressed at any point within the third period (3 minutes after detection of the door open error), after the door open error state 572 is resolved after the third period has elapsed, the error notification 567a by lamp illumination will continue for the first period (30 seconds), while the voice error notification 567b will also be suppressed during the second period (7 seconds). For example, it would be even more inconvenient if the voice error notification were to be executed again after the door is closed, even though the duration of the voice output was limited to avoid inconvenience during maintenance work. Alternatively, if the voice error notification, such as "The door is open," is executed again after the door is closed in an unsuppressed manner, it may lead to the misconception that the door was not properly closed. As a variation, the error notification after the door is closed may be changed from "The door is open" to "The door was open" or "The door has been closed," or the audio output of the notification may be suppressed (however, suppression after the third period elapsed will result in a lower audibility setting for the notification audio indicating the door open error state 572).

(13th Example)
This embodiment is characterized by error notification related to various performance devices that do not affect the progress of the game. Below, we will mainly explain the differences from the first to twelfth embodiments and the first to third prerequisite technologies, and omit the explanation of the common points.

Figure 58 shows the error notification patterns for various performance devices that do not affect the progress of the game. Unit identification error 580 indicates an error state where the correct performance unit is not installed. Sub-control motor abnormality 581 indicates an error state where the motor is abnormal due to aging deterioration of the movable mechanism 520, etc. Sound amplifier error 582 indicates an error state where the sound amplifier used for performance is abnormal. Fan error 583 indicates an error state where an abnormality has been detected in the cooling fan. The performance unit, sub-control motor, sound amplifier, and fan are all devices used for performance and do not directly affect the progress of the game. Therefore, even if they malfunction due to aging deterioration, for example, the game can still be played, and the malfunction may be left unresolved. Furthermore, in such cases, even if an error is notified, it may not be possible to immediately resolve the malfunction.

To prevent continuous error notifications in such cases, the error notification is canceled when a phenomenon indicating that a player has started playing is detected. The control means notifies the player of the performance device error state when an error occurs. The notification of the performance device error state is terminated when at least one of the following is detected: the elapsed time of a predetermined notification period, the passage of the game ball through the out-out port 34, or the closing operation of the door body (front frame 102, transparent plate 103, door 104).

In the case of unit identification error 580, error notification 567a involves illuminating a red error notification lamp, error notification 567b involves outputting an audio message such as "A frame unit connection abnormality has been detected," and error notification 567c involves displaying an image with the text "A frame unit connection abnormality has been detected." The error notification 567a (lamp illumination), 567b (audio output), and 567c (image display) all stop when at least one of the following is detected: the elapsed time (60 seconds), the passage of a game ball through the out-out port 34, or the closing operation of the door body. However, some lamps remain lit until the power is turned off.

In the event of a sub-control motor malfunction 581, the error notification 567a is provided by illuminating a lamp in red, the error notification 567b is provided by outputting an audio message such as "A connection abnormality in the movable mechanism has been detected," and the error notification 567c is provided by displaying an image with the text "A connection abnormality in the movable mechanism has been detected." The error notification 567a by lamp illumination, the error notification 567b by audio output, and the error notification 567c by image display all stop when at least one of the following is detected: the elapsed time (10 minutes), the passage of the game ball through the out-out port 34, or the closing operation of the door body. The retry operation of the movable mechanism (retry based on the error stop during the initialization process after power outage recovery) is performed after the door is closed. Performing the retry operation after closing, when vibrations from opening and closing the door and interference from nearby game machines are less likely to occur, allows for reliable verification of the retry operation. The initialization of the movable mechanism itself may also be configured to occur after the door is closed, after a setting change, or after setting confirmation.

In the case of sound amplifier error 582, the error notification 567a is indicated by illuminating a pink lamp, and the error notification 567c is indicated by displaying an image with the text "Sound amplifier malfunction detected." Because the error is due to a sound amplifier malfunction, the audio error notification 567b is omitted. Both the lamp-illuminated error notification 567a and the image-displayed error notification 567c stop when at least one of the following is detected: the elapsed time (10 minutes), the passage of a game ball through the out-out opening 34, or the closing operation of the door.

In the case of fan error 583, error notification 567a involves illuminating a red error notification lamp, error notification 567b involves outputting an audio message such as "Fan malfunction detected," and error notification 567c involves displaying an image with the text "Fan malfunction detected." The error notification 567a (lamp illumination), 567b (audio output), and 567c (image display) all stop when at least one of the following is detected: the elapsed time (10 minutes), the passage of a game ball through the out-out port 34, or the closing operation of the door. However, some lamps remain illuminated until the power is turned off.

Furthermore, the techniques described in the examples and modifications may be specified by the following embodiments.

[First aspect]
An image display device capable of displaying images,
A movable prop that can be operated as part of the performance,
It comprises a means for controlling the effects of the game,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying an error notification image for notifying an error,
The display device can show a settings menu image on its screen while the game is in standby mode, which may include at least one of the settings menus for volume adjustment and brightness adjustment.
The screen of the aforementioned display device during gameplay can display a setting menu image that may include at least one of the setting menus for volume adjustment and brightness adjustment.
It is possible to perform a specific effect that performs a predetermined deformation process on the image displayed on the effect display device in accordance with the movement of the movable mechanism,
During the execution of the specified performance, the predetermined transformation process is performed on specified images that do not include the error notification image and the setting menu image, but the predetermined transformation process is not performed on non-specified images that include at least one of the error notification image and the setting menu image.
During gameplay, one of the error notification images or the setting menu image is displayed in a visible position that does not overlap with other non-specific images, but overlaps with multiple specific images.
A gaming machine characterized in that, while the game is in standby mode, the error notification image can be displayed in a position that overlaps with the setting menu image in a visible manner.

[Second form]
An image display device capable of displaying images,
It comprises a means for controlling the effects of the game,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying an error notification image for notifying an error,
The display device can show a settings menu image on its screen while the game is in standby mode, which may include a settings menu for adjusting the volume.
The screen of the aforementioned display device during gameplay can display a settings menu image that may include a volume adjustment settings menu.
The aforementioned display device can perform a specific effect that involves a predetermined transformation process on the image displayed.
During the execution of the specified performance, the predetermined transformation process is performed on specified images that do not include the error notification image and the setting menu image, but the predetermined transformation process is not performed on non-specified images that include at least one of the error notification image and the setting menu image.
During gameplay, one of the error notification images or the setting menu image is displayed in a visible position that does not overlap with other non-specific images, but overlaps with multiple specific images.
If the volume is adjusted while the game is in standby mode, a confirmation sound indicating the volume adjustment setting will be output.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the volume is adjusted during gameplay, the output of the confirmation sound is suppressed, while the volume setting of other sound effects other than the confirmation sound is reflected in the setting of the volume adjustment.

[Third aspect]
An image display device capable of displaying images,
A means for controlling the game's effects,
It includes a special determination means that performs a special determination regarding whether or not conditions for controlling the game state to be advantageous to the player are met,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The aforementioned display device can perform a specific effect that involves a predetermined transformation process on the image displayed.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when executing the aforementioned specific performance, if a specific performance execution method is selected in which a preview image suggesting the result of the special judgment is displayed in the area corresponding to the original image remaining outside the transformed image when the predetermined transformation process is performed, the expectation that the result of the special judgment will be favorable to the player is set higher than when the preview image suggesting the result of the special judgment is not displayed in the area corresponding to the original image remaining outside the transformed image.

[Fourth aspect]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A means for controlling the game's effects,
A game board having a game area,
A game state storage means that stores information related to the control of the game's progress in a way that allows it to be retained even when the power supply to the game machine is stopped,
When the gaming machine is started, a game state recovery means performs a recovery process to restore the game to the state it was in before the power supply was cut off, based on information regarding the control of the game's progress stored in the game state storage means.
It is equipped with movable props that can be operated as part of the performance,
The aforementioned game area comprises a first game area and a second game area, which is advantageous when game balls are launched in a state more favorable than the normal state.
The main control means causes the game state display device to display a message prompting the player to launch the game ball toward the second game area when the game state is in the advantageous state, as predetermined information regarding the progress of the game.
The aforementioned performance control means is
When the game state is in the advantageous state described above, a display prompting the player to launch the game ball towards the second game area is displayed on the display device as predetermined information relating to the progress of the game.
When the game state is in the advantageous state described above, and a power outage occurs and the recovery process is performed by the game state recovery means, the display prompting the player to launch the game ball towards the second game area is displayed on the game state display device before the performance display device.
The main control means has setting means that can change predetermined settings related to the gaming machine,
The setting means has two states: a setting change state in which the setting content can be changed, and a setting confirmation state in which the setting content can be confirmed.
During normal power-on, the initialization operation of the movable mechanism is performed. However, when power-on in a setting change state or setting confirmation state, the initialization operation of the movable mechanism is put on hold and executed after transitioning to the game state.
The gaming machine is characterized in that, if the setting confirmation state was in place when the recovery process was performed, a display prompting the player to launch a game ball toward the second game area is shown in parallel with the initialization operation after the setting confirmation state ends and the player transitions to the game state.

[5-1 aspect]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A means for controlling the game's effects,
A game board having a game area,
A game state storage means that stores information related to the control of the game's progress, so as to be able to retain it even when the power supply to the game machine is stopped,
When the gaming machine is started, a game state recovery means performs a recovery process to restore the game to the state it was in before the power supply was cut off, based on information regarding the control of the game's progress stored in the game state storage means.
A movable prop that can be operated as part of the performance,
Equipped with a speaker that outputs sound,
The game area comprises a first game area and a second game area, which is advantageous when game balls are launched in a state more favorable than the normal state.
The main control means causes the game state display device to display a message prompting the player to launch the game ball toward the second game area when the game state is in the advantageous state, as predetermined information relating to the progress of the game.
The aforementioned performance control means is
When the game state is in the advantageous state described above, a display prompting the player to launch the game ball towards the second game area is shown on the display device as predetermined information relating to the progress of the game.
When the game state is in the advantageous state described above, and a power outage occurs and the recovery process is performed by the game state recovery means, the display prompting the player to launch the game ball towards the second game area is displayed on the game state display device before the performance display device.
During the execution of the recovery process, an image indicating that the recovery process is underway, which is called a power outage recovery image, is displayed on the display device for a predetermined period of time, and in parallel with the display of the power outage recovery image, an indication prompting the launch of game balls toward the second game area is displayed on the display device.
During the execution of the recovery process, it is possible to output an audio notification from the speaker indicating that the recovery process is in progress.
The gaming machine is characterized in that, if a performance start command is received during the predetermined period in which the power recovery image is displayed and the machine is in a state where performance display is possible, it switches from the power recovery image to the performance display without waiting for the predetermined period to elapse, while continuing to output an announcement sound indicating that the recovery process is in progress, and after the period for outputting the announcement sound has elapsed, it switches from outputting the announcement sound to outputting the performance sound.
[5-2nd aspect]
The gaming machine according to embodiment 5-1, characterized in that, until the output period for the notification sound indicating that the recovery process is in progress has elapsed, even if a display prompting the player to launch a game ball towards the second game area is shown, if a game ball directed towards the first game area is detected, the output of the notification sound indicating that the recovery process is in progress is prioritized over the notification sound prompting the player to launch a game ball towards the second game area.

[Sixth aspect]
An image display device having an image display area,
As a visual effect, a first movable mechanism capable of swinging at the periphery of the game area,
As a performance element, a second movable mechanism that can be deployed in the center of the aforementioned display area is provided,
An effect control means for controlling the effect display that displays an effect display corresponding to the progress of the game in the display area,
An anomaly detection means for detecting an anomaly,
The system includes an abnormality display control means that, in response to the abnormality detection means detecting the abnormality, performs abnormality display control to display abnormality information indicating that the abnormality has occurred in the abnormality display area of the display area,
The abnormality display control means, in response to the abnormality detection means detecting a first abnormality and a second abnormality as abnormalities, causes the display device to simultaneously display, in a manner that allows mutual identification, first abnormality information indicating that the first abnormality has occurred and second abnormality information indicating that the second abnormality has occurred.
Even when the first abnormal information and the second abnormal information are displayed simultaneously on the performance display device by the abnormal display control means, the performance control means controls the performance display.
The abnormality display control means, as abnormality display control, causes the performance display shown on the performance display device by the performance control means to display the first abnormality information and the second abnormality information in a display manner that is visible to the viewer.
The movable mechanism has two performance patterns: a first mechanism performance pattern in which the first movable mechanism is operated without operating the second movable mechanism, and a second mechanism performance pattern in which the first and second movable mechanisms are operated in cooperation.
The abnormality display area is an area not covered by the first movable mechanism,
The abnormality display control means displays the abnormality information in the abnormality display area without overlapping with the first movable mechanism when the first movable mechanism is operated according to the first mechanism performance pattern, and when the first and second movable mechanisms are operated according to the second mechanism performance pattern, the visibility of the performance by the second mechanism performance pattern takes precedence over the visibility of the abnormality information display.
A gaming machine characterized in that the area not covered by the first movable component in the display area is larger than the area covered by the first movable component.

[Seventh aspect]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A means for controlling the game's effects,
Audio output means capable of outputting audio effects controlled by the aforementioned performance control means,
The system includes an operation input means that can transmit predetermined operation information to the performance control means by being operated by an operator,
The main control means includes an abnormality detection means capable of detecting when a predetermined abnormality occurs.
The aforementioned performance control means is
When a volume change operation is performed on the operation input means to change the volume of the sound effect output from the sound output means, a first volume adjustment means changes the volume of the sound effect output from the sound output means.
The control board equipped with the aforementioned performance control means includes a second volume adjustment means, which consists of a switch that can be operated by the operator, and which changes the volume of the sound performance output from the sound output means by changing the setting position of the switch.
The volume of the sound effect output from the sound output means can be set based on the operation status of the first volume adjustment means and the second volume adjustment means.
The aforementioned performance control means is
When the abnormality detection means of the main control means receives information that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the audio output means can output an abnormality notification sound at a specific volume to notify the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, regardless of the operation status of the first volume adjustment means and the second volume adjustment means.
During the period in which the abnormal notification sound is output from the audio output means, the first volume adjustment means and the second volume adjustment means can be operated to change the volume of the sound effect, while until the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the audio output means will not output the sound effect at the volume changed during that period.
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the period in which the abnormal notification sound is output from the audio output means, if an operation to change the volume of the sound effect is performed on at least one of the first volume adjustment means or the second volume adjustment means, and a power outage occurs during the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, and then the power is restored and the predetermined abnormality is resolved, the volume of the sound effect output from the audio output means is set based on the setting status of the switch related to the second volume adjustment means.

[8th type]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
It comprises a means for controlling the effects of the game,
The main control means has setting means that can change predetermined settings related to the gaming machine,
The setting means has two states: a setting change state in which the setting content can be changed, and a setting confirmation state in which the setting content can be confirmed.
The aforementioned performance control means is capable of displaying a performance indicator on the performance display device that allows the setting means of the main control means to identify whether it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
The gaming machine has a door open error state, which indicates that the door is in an open state.
In the aforementioned performance control means, the notification priority is set to be higher for the setting change state and the setting confirmation state than for the door open error state.
The aforementioned performance control means is characterized in that, when a door opening error occurs, it transitions from the setting change state to the setting change completion state when the setting change state is completed, and transitions from the setting confirmation state to the door opening error state when the setting confirmation state is completed.

[9-1 aspect]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A means for controlling the game's effects,
A game board having a game area,
The game area comprises a plurality of prize-winning slots arranged therein,
The main control means is capable of detecting abnormal ball entry conditions according to the ball entry status at a predetermined prize entry point.
When the main control means detects an abnormality in the ball entry state, it can transmit error information related to the abnormality in the ball entry state, including information that allows it to identify the prize entry slot where the abnormality was detected, to the performance control means.
The aforementioned performance control means, upon receiving the error information, causes a predetermined light-emitting device to light up in a manner that notifies of an abnormal ball entry state, and causes a specific light-emitting device corresponding to the prize entry slot where the abnormal ball entry state was detected to light up in a specific manner among a plurality of manners that notify of an abnormal ball entry state.
[9-2nd aspect]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A means for controlling the game's effects,
A game board having a game area,
The game area comprises a plurality of prize-winning slots arranged therein,
The main control means can notify the performance control means of prize information that can identify which of the plurality of prize slots a prize has been won in,
The aforementioned performance control means can transition to an error state related to an abnormal ball entry state if a predetermined abnormality judgment criterion is met based on the reception status of the prize winning information.
The aforementioned performance control means is characterized in that, when the game transitions to the error state, it causes a predetermined light-emitting device to light up in a manner that notifies of an abnormal ball entry state, and causes a specific light-emitting device corresponding to the prize entry opening that satisfies the conditions for the occurrence of an abnormal ball entry state to light up in a specific manner among a plurality of manners that notify of an abnormal ball entry state.

[Tenth aspect]
Control means for controlling the progress and effects of the gaming machine,
The system includes notification means, which includes an image display device, a light-emitting device, and an audio output device, as means for providing notifications to the player.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a specific error is detected by the control means, the occurrence of the specific error can be notified by a plurality of devices included in the notification means, and the notification is started at least a predetermined time after the occurrence of the specific error.

[Personal 11]
A main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
It comprises a means for controlling the effects of the game,
The gaming machine has a power-on state, which indicates that the power has been turned on.
The aforementioned power-on state includes a special power-on state indicating that power has been turned on with initialization of the gaming machine, and a normal power-on state indicating that power has been turned on to restore the gaming machine to its state before the power was cut off.
The gaming machine may also have an error state that has a higher notification priority than the aforementioned power-on state.
When the power-on state is reached, the performance control means can notify that the power-on state has been reached by controlling the light emission of the light-emitting device.
The notification method for indicating that the power-on state has been reached by controlling the light emission of the light-emitting device differs between the notification method for the special power-on state and the notification method for the normal power-on state.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the special power-on state is in effect, the machine notifies that the power-on state has been reached by controlling the light emission of the light-emitting device, and a special light emission mode period is set for at least a portion of the notification period, and during that special light emission mode period, even if an error condition occurs that has a higher notification priority than the notification of the power-on state, at least some of the light-emitting devices are instructed to prioritize notifying the special power-on state.

[Twelfth aspect]
A door that can be opened and closed in the front,
The game machine includes control means for controlling the progress and effects of the game,
The control means is
While detecting the opening of the aforementioned door body, the system transitions to a door open error state, indicating that the door body is in an open state.
In the aforementioned door open error state, the door open error can be notified by an image display device, an audio output device, and a light-emitting device.
The image display device can display an image indicating the door open error state for the duration of the door open error state.
The light-emitting device is capable of emitting light in a manner that notifies the door open error state over the period of the door open error state and the first period after the door open error state has been resolved.
The audio output device can notify the door open error state over the period of the door open error state and the second period after the door open error state has been resolved.
If the aforementioned door open error state continues for a third period, the notification mode of the door open error state by the image display device and the notification mode of the door open error state by the light-emitting device will continue, while the notification mode of the door open error state by the audio output device can be changed to be suppressed at any time within the third period.
The gaming machine is characterized in that, if the notification method of the door open error state by the voice output device is suppressed at any point during the third period, after the door open error state is resolved after the third period has elapsed, the light-emitting device will notify the door open error state throughout the first period, while the notification method of the door open error state by the voice output device will also be suppressed during the second period.

[13th aspect]
A door that can be opened and closed in the front,
A movable prop that can be operated as part of the performance,
The game machine includes control means for controlling the progress and effects of the game,
The game has a state where an error related to various display devices that does not affect the progress of the game has been detected.
The control means notifies the performance device of the performance device error state when the performance device error state occurs, and the notification of the performance device error state is terminated when at least one of the following is detected: the elapsed time of a predetermined notification period, the passage of a game ball through the out-out opening, or the closing operation of the door body.

60 Display device for effects, 66 Movable mechanism, 80 Game board, 81 Game area, 100 Game machine, 108 Speaker, 304 Effects control means, 520 Movable mechanism, 520a First movable mechanism, 520b Second movable mechanism, 535 Setting menu image, 539 Preview image, 564 Setting confirmation status, 565 Setting change status, 566 Hold status, 567 Error notification, 570 Image during power outage recovery.

Claims (1)

An image display device capable of displaying images,
It comprises a means for controlling the effects of the game,
The aforementioned performance control means is
The aforementioned display device is capable of displaying an error notification image for notifying an error,
The display device can show a settings menu image on its screen while the game is in standby mode, which may include a settings menu for adjusting the volume.
The screen of the aforementioned display device during gameplay can display a settings menu image that may include a volume adjustment settings menu.
The display device can perform a specific animation that performs a predetermined reduction process on the image displayed, and in the predetermined reduction process, the content of the target image before reduction is retained in the form of a background image in the area corresponding to the target image before reduction , outside the target image during reduction .
During the execution of the aforementioned specific performance, the predetermined reduction process is performed on specific images that do not include the error notification image and the setting menu image, but the predetermined reduction process is not performed on non-specific images that include at least one of the error notification image and the setting menu image.
During gameplay, one of the error notification images or the setting menu image is displayed in a visible position that does not overlap with other non-specific images, but overlaps with multiple specific images.
If the volume is adjusted while the game is in standby mode, a confirmation sound indicating the volume adjustment setting will be output.
A gaming machine characterized in that, if the volume is adjusted during gameplay, the output of the confirmation sound is suppressed, while the volume setting of other sound effects other than the confirmation sound is reflected in the setting of the volume adjustment.